TOSHIBA TMP86FS49AUG

8 Bit Microcontroller
TLCS-870/C Series
TMP86FS49AUG
TMP86FS49AUG
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023 _ D
TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless,
semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and
vulnerability to physical stress.
It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards
of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction
or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to
property.
In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating
ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications.
Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the “Handling Guide for
Semiconductor Devices,” or “TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook” etc. 021023_A
The Toshiba products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications
(computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic
appliances, etc.).
These Toshiba products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires
extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunction or failure of which may cause loss of
human life or bodily injury (“Unintended Usage”). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control
instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments,
combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended
Usage of Toshiba products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B
The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products
of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations.
060106_Q
The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No
responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third
parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any
patent or patent rights of TOSHIBA or others. 021023_C
The products described in this document may include products subject to the foreign exchange and
foreign trade laws. 021023_F
For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3
of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
© 2007 TOSHIBA CORPORATION
All Rights Reserved
TMP86FS49AUG
Differences among Products
Differences in Functions
86CH49
86CM49
86PM49
86CS49
86FS49
ROM
16 Kbytes
(Mask)
32 Kbytes
(Mask)
32 Kbytes
(OTP)
60 Kbytes
(Mask)
RAM
512 bytes
1 Kbyte
1 Kbyte
2 Kbytes
2 Kbytes
128 bytes
(Flash control register contained)
I/O
56 pins
High-current port
13 pins (sink open drain)
Interrupt
External: 5 interrupts, Internal: 19 interrupts
Timer/counter
16-bit: 2 channels
8-bit: 4 channels
UART
2 channels
SIO
2 channels
I2C
1 channel
Key-on wake-up
4 channels
10-bit AD converter
(note2)
16 channels
Flash Security
N.A.
VDD
Structurer of
TEST pin
R
RIN
without protect diode
on the VDD side
R
without pull
down resister
Emulation chip
Package
86FS49B
60 Kbytes
(Flash)
128 bytes
(Flash control register not contained)
DBR(note1)
86FS49A
Read/Write
protect
Read protect
VDD
R
RIN
without protect diode
on the VDD side
R
VDD
R
without pull
down resister
without pull
down resister
without protect diode
on the VDD side
R
without pull
down resister
TMP86C949XB
QFP64P-14140.80A
QFP64-P-1414-0.80A
LQFP64-P-1010-0.50D
SDIP64-P-750-1.78
QFP64-P-1414-0.80A
LQFP64-P-1010-0.50D
–
Note 1: The products with Flash memory (86FS49, 86FS49A, 86FS49B) contain the Flash control register (FLSCR) at 0FFFH in
the DBR area. The products with mask ROM or OTP and the emulation chip do not have the FLSCR register. In these
devices, therefore, a program that accesses the FLSCR register cannot function properly (executes differently as in the
case of a Flash product).
Note 2: In this data sheet,the following pin names and register names have been changed from the data sheet of the old edition.
Although the names have been changed, their functions remain the same.
TMP86FS49AUG
OLD name
NEW name
AD Converter
analog input pin name
P60(AIN00)
P61(AIN01)
P62(AIN02)
P63(AIN03)
P64(AIN04)
P65(AIN05)
P66(AIN06)
P67(AIN07)
P70(AIN10)
P71(AIN11)
P72(AIN12)
P73(AIN13)
P74(AIN14)
P75(AIN15)
P76(AIN16)
P77(AIN17)
P60(AIN0)
P61(AIN1)
P62(AIN2)
P63(AIN3)
P64(AIN4)
P65(AIN5)
P66(AIN6)
P67(AIN7)
P70(AIN8)
P71(AIN9)
P72(AIN10)
P73(AIN11)
P74(AIN12)
P75(AIN13)
P76(AIN14)
P77(AIN15)
ADCCR1 register <SAIN>
function name
0000:AIN00
0001:AIN01
0010:AIN02
0011:AIN03
0100:AIN04
0101:AIN05
0110:AIN06
0111:AIN07
1000:AIN10
1001:AIN11
1010:AIN12
1011:AIN13
1100:AIN14
1101:AIN15
1110:AIN16
1111:AIN17
0000:AIN0
0001:AIN1
0010:AIN2
0011:AIN3
0100:AIN4
0101:AIN5
0110:AIN6
0111:AIN7
1000:AIN8
1001:AIN9
1010:AIN10
1011:AIN11
1100:AIN12
1101:AIN13
1110:AIN14
1111:AIN15
TMP86FS49AUG
Differences in Electrical Characteristics
86CH49
86CM49
86CS49
86FS49
86FS49A
86FS49B
86PM49
[V]
[V]
[V]
5.5
5.5
5.5
[V]
[V]
5.5
5.5
(a)
8
16 [MHz]
(a)
4.5
3.6
3.6
3.0
2.7
3.0
2.7
(b)
(a)
(Note 1)
1
4.2
8
1.8
1.8
16 [MHz]
1
4.2
8
16 [MHz]
1.8
1
4.2
8
0.030
0.034
4.2
4.5
(Note 3)
(b)
0.030
0.034
1
(b)
3.0
2.7
3.0
2.7
2.0
1.8
1.8
(Note 2)
3.6
(a)
0.030
0.034
3.0
2.7
0.030
0.034
Read / Fetch
3.6
(a)
(a) 1.8V to 5.5V (-40 to 85°C)
16 [MHz]
(a) 2.0V to 5.5V (-40 to 85°C)
(a) 4.5V to 5.5V (-40 to 85°C)
(a) 3.0V to 5.5V (-40 to 85°C)
(b) 1.8V to 2.0V (-20 to 85°C)
(b) 3.0V to 3.6V (-40 to 85°C)
(b) 2.7V to 3.0V (-20 to 85°C)
1
4.2
8
16 [MHz]
(a) 2.7V to 5.5V (-40 to 85°C)
[V]
5.5
(a)
4.5
3.6
-
-
3.0
2.7
1.8
0.030
0.034
Erase / Program
Operating condition (MCU mode)
4.5
4.5
3.6
0.030
0.034
4.5
-
-
1
4.2
8
16 [MHz]
(a) 4.5V to 5.5V (-10 to 40°C)
[V]
5.5
(a)
3.6
-
-
1.8
Operating
Current
3.0
2.7
0.030
0.034
(Serial PROM mode)
Operating condition
4.5
-
2
4.2
8
16 [MHz]
(a) 4.5V to 5.5V (-10 to 40°C)
Operating current varies with each product. For details, refer to the datasheet (electrical characteristics) of each product.
(Note 4)
Note 1: With the 86CS49, the operating temperature (Topr) is -20 °C to 85 °C when the supply voltage VDD is less than
2.0 V.
Note 2: With the 86FS49, the supply voltage VDD is specified as two separate ranges. While the MCU is operating, do not
change the supply voltage from range (a) to range (b) or from range (b) to range (a).
Note 3: With the 86FS49A, the operating temperature (Topr) is -20 °C to 85 °C when the supply voltage VDD is less than
3.0 V.
Note 4: With the 86FS49A/B, when a program is executing in the Flash memory or when data is being read from the Flash
memory, the Flash memory operates in an intermittent manner causing peak currents in the Flash memory
momentarily, as shown in Figure. In this case, the supply current IDD (in NORMAL1, NORMAL2 and SLOW1
modes) is defined as the sum of the average peak current and MCU current.
1 machine cycle (4/fc or 4/fs)
n
Program counter (PC)
n+1
n+2
n+3
Momentary Flash current
I DDP-P
[mA]
Max. current Sum of average momentary
Typ. current Flash current and MCU current
MCU current
Intermittent Operation of Flash Memory
TMP86FS49AUG
Revision History
Date
Revision
2006/2/22
1
First Release
2006/3/22
2
Contents Revised
2006/10/18
3
Contents Revised
2007/2/2
4
Periodical updating.No change in contents.
2007/2/2
5
Periodical updating.No change in contents.
2007/6/26
6
Contents Revised
Table of Contents
Differences among Products
TMP86FS49AUG
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
3
4
5
2. Operational Description
2.1
CPU Core Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
Memory Address Map............................................................................................................................... 9
Program Memory (Flash) .......................................................................................................................... 9
Data Memory (RAM) ................................................................................................................................. 9
2.2.1
2.2.2
Clock Generator...................................................................................................................................... 10
Timing Generator .................................................................................................................................... 12
2.2
System Clock Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.2.1
2.2.2.2
Configuration of timing generator
Machine cycle
2.2.3.1
2.2.3.2
2.2.3.3
Single-clock mode
Dual-clock mode
STOP mode
2.2.4.1
2.2.4.2
2.2.4.3
2.2.4.4
STOP mode
IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0)
SLOW mode
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.3
Operation Mode Control Circuit .............................................................................................................. 13
Operating Mode Control ......................................................................................................................... 18
Reset Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
External Reset Input ...............................................................................................................................
Address trap reset ..................................................................................................................................
Watchdog timer reset..............................................................................................................................
System clock reset..................................................................................................................................
31
32
32
32
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.1
3.2
Interrupt latches (IL23 to IL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Interrupt enable register (EIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.2.1
3.2.2
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF) .......................................................................................................... 36
Individual interrupt enable flags (EF23 to EF4) ...................................................................................... 37
3.3.1
3.3.2
Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows........................................................................ 39
Saving/restoring general-purpose registers ............................................................................................ 40
Note 3: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.3 Interrupt Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.3.2.1
Using PUSH and POP instructions
i
3.3.2.2
Using data transfer instructions
3.3.3
Interrupt return ........................................................................................................................................ 41
3.4.1
3.4.2
Address error detection .......................................................................................................................... 42
Debugging .............................................................................................................................................. 42
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Software Interrupt (INTSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
External Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1
4.2
SFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
DBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5. I/O Ports
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
Port P0 (P07 to P00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port P1 (P17 to P10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port P2 (P22 to P20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port P3 (P37 to P30) (Large Current Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port P4 (P47 to P40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port P5 (P54 to P50) (Large Current Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port P6 (P67 to P60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port P7 (P77 to P70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
52
54
55
56
58
59
62
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.1
6.2
Watchdog Timer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Watchdog Timer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer ...................................................................
Watchdog Timer Enable .........................................................................................................................
Watchdog Timer Disable ........................................................................................................................
Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)......................................................................................................
Watchdog Timer Reset ...........................................................................................................................
66
67
68
68
69
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS) ................................................................................
Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT) ..................................................................................
Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP).......................................................................................................
Address Trap Reset ................................................................................................................................
70
70
70
71
6.3
Address Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.1
Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 73
Control .................................................................................................................................................... 73
Function .................................................................................................................................................. 74
7.2.1
7.2.2
Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 75
Control .................................................................................................................................................... 75
7.2
ii
Time Base Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
Divider Output (DVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.1
8.2
8.3
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
Timer mode.............................................................................................................................................
External Trigger Timer Mode ..................................................................................................................
Event Counter Mode ...............................................................................................................................
Window Mode .........................................................................................................................................
Pulse Width Measurement Mode............................................................................................................
Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode .............................................................................
80
82
84
85
86
89
9. 16-Bit Timer/Counter2 (TC2)
9.1
9.2
9.3
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
Timer mode............................................................................................................................................. 95
Event counter mode................................................................................................................................ 97
Window mode ......................................................................................................................................... 97
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1
10.2
10.3
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
10.3.1
10.3.2
10.3.3
10.3.4
10.3.5
10.3.6
10.3.7
10.3.8
10.3.9
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) ............................................................................................................
8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4) ....................................................................................................
8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4).................................................................
8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4)..............................................................
16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) ..........................................................................................................
16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4) ............................................................................................
16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)......................................................
16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4) ...........................................
Warm-Up Counter Mode.....................................................................................................................
10.3.9.1
10.3.9.2
105
106
106
109
111
112
112
115
117
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode
(NORMAL1 → NORMAL2 → SLOW2 → SLOW1)
High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
(SLOW1 → SLOW2 → NORMAL2 → NORMAL1)
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1
11.2
11.3
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
11.3.1
11.3.2
11.3.3
11.3.4
11.3.5
11.3.6
11.3.7
11.3.8
11.3.9
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6) ............................................................................................................
8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5, 6) ....................................................................................................
8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC5, 6).................................................................
8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5, 6)..............................................................
16-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6) ..........................................................................................................
16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5 and 6) ............................................................................................
16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)......................................................
16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC5 and 6) ...........................................
Warm-Up Counter Mode.....................................................................................................................
11.3.9.1
125
126
126
129
131
132
132
135
137
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode
iii
11.3.9.2
(NORMAL1 → NORMAL2 → SLOW2 → SLOW1)
High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
(SLOW1 → SLOW2 → NORMAL2 → NORMAL1)
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Sampling Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP Bit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit/Receive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8.1
12.8.2
Data Transmit Operation .................................................................................................................... 144
Data Receive Operation ..................................................................................................................... 144
12.9.1
12.9.2
12.9.3
12.9.4
12.9.5
12.9.6
Parity Error..........................................................................................................................................
Framing Error......................................................................................................................................
Overrun Error ......................................................................................................................................
Receive Data Buffer Full.....................................................................................................................
Transmit Data Buffer Empty ...............................................................................................................
Transmit End Flag ..............................................................................................................................
12.9
139
140
142
143
143
144
144
144
Status Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
145
145
145
146
146
147
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART2 )
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Sampling Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP Bit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit/Receive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.8.1
13.8.2
Data Transmit Operation .................................................................................................................... 154
Data Receive Operation ..................................................................................................................... 154
13.9.1
13.9.2
13.9.3
13.9.4
13.9.5
13.9.6
Parity Error..........................................................................................................................................
Framing Error......................................................................................................................................
Overrun Error ......................................................................................................................................
Receive Data Buffer Full.....................................................................................................................
Transmit Data Buffer Empty ...............................................................................................................
Transmit End Flag ..............................................................................................................................
13.9
149
150
152
153
153
154
154
154
Status Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
155
155
155
156
156
157
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.1
14.2
14.3
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
14.3.1
Clock source
Shift edge
14.3.2.1
Transmit mode
14.3.2
iv
Serial clock ......................................................................................................................................... 162
14.3.1.1
14.3.1.2
Transfer bit direction ........................................................................................................................... 164
14.3.2.2
14.3.2.3
Receive mode
Transmit/receive mode
14.3.3.1
14.3.3.2
14.3.3.3
Transmit mode
Receive mode
Transmit/receive mode
14.3.3
Transfer modes................................................................................................................................... 165
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.1
15.2
15.3
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
15.3.1
Serial clock ......................................................................................................................................... 180
15.3.1.1
15.3.1.2
Clock source
Shift edge
15.3.2.1
15.3.2.2
15.3.2.3
Transmit mode
Receive mode
Transmit/receive mode
15.3.3.1
15.3.3.2
15.3.3.3
Transmit mode
Receive mode
Transmit/receive mode
15.3.2
15.3.3
Transfer bit direction ........................................................................................................................... 182
Transfer modes................................................................................................................................... 183
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Data Format in the I2C Bus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I2C Bus Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.5.1
Acknowledgement mode specification................................................................................................ 199
16.5.1.1
16.5.1.2
Acknowledgment mode (ACK = “1”)
Non-acknowledgment mode (ACK = “0”)
16.5.3.1
16.5.3.2
Clock source
Clock synchronization
16.5.2
16.5.3
Number of transfer bits ....................................................................................................................... 200
Serial clock ......................................................................................................................................... 200
16.5.4
16.5.5
16.5.6
16.5.7
16.5.8
16.5.9
16.5.10
16.5.11
16.5.12
16.5.13
Slave address and address recognition mode specification ...............................................................
Master/slave selection ........................................................................................................................
Transmitter/receiver selection.............................................................................................................
Start/stop condition generation ...........................................................................................................
Interrupt service request and cancel...................................................................................................
Setting of I2C bus mode .....................................................................................................................
Arbitration lost detection monitor ......................................................................................................
Slave address match detection monitor............................................................................................
GENERAL CALL detection monitor ..................................................................................................
Last received bit monitor...................................................................................................................
16.6.1
16.6.2
16.6.3
Device initialization ............................................................................................................................. 205
Start condition and slave address generation..................................................................................... 205
1-word data transfer............................................................................................................................ 205
16.6
195
195
195
196
197
201
201
201
202
202
203
203
204
204
204
Data Transfer of I2C Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
16.6.3.1
16.6.3.2
16.6.4
16.6.5
When the MST is “1” (Master mode)
When the MST is “0” (Slave mode)
Stop condition generation ................................................................................................................... 208
Restart ................................................................................................................................................ 209
17. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
17.1
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
v
17.2
17.3
Register configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
17.3.1
17.3.2
17.3.3
Software Start Mode ........................................................................................................................... 215
Repeat Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 215
Register Setting ................................................................................................................................ 216
17.6.1
17.6.2
17.6.3
17.6.4
Restrictions for AD Conversion interrupt (INTADC) usage .................................................................
Analog input pin voltage range ...........................................................................................................
Analog input shared pins ....................................................................................................................
Noise Countermeasure .......................................................................................................................
17.4
17.5
17.6
STOP/SLOW Modes during AD Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Precautions about AD Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
219
219
219
219
18. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
18.1
18.2
18.3
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
19. Flash Memory
19.1
Flash Memory Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
19.1.1
19.1.2
Flash Memory Command Sequence Execution Control (FLSCR<FLSMD>) ..................................... 224
Flash Memory Bank Select Control (FLSCR<BANKSEL>) ................................................................ 224
19.2.1
19.2.2
19.2.3
19.2.4
19.2.5
19.2.6
Byte Program ......................................................................................................................................
Sector Erase (4-kbyte Erase) .............................................................................................................
Chip Erase (All Erase) ........................................................................................................................
Product ID Entry .................................................................................................................................
Product ID Exit ....................................................................................................................................
Read Protect .......................................................................................................................................
19.4.1
Flash Memory Control in the Serial PROM Mode............................................................................... 228
19.2
19.3
19.4
Command Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
225
225
226
226
226
226
Toggle Bit (D6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Access to the Flash Memory Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
19.4.1.1
19.4.2
How to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the RAM area (in the RAM loader mode within the
serial PROM mode)
Flash Memory Control in the MCU mode............................................................................................ 230
19.4.2.1
How to write to the flash memory by executing a user write control program in the RAM area (in the MCU mode)
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.1
20.2
20.3
20.3.1
20.3.2
20.3.3
20.3.4
Serial PROM Mode Control Pins ........................................................................................................
Pin Function........................................................................................................................................
Example Connection for On-Board Writing.........................................................................................
Activating the Serial PROM Mode ......................................................................................................
20.6.1
20.6.2
20.6.3
Flash Memory Erasing Mode (Operating command: F0H) ................................................................. 241
Flash Memory Writing Mode (Operation command: 30H) .................................................................. 243
RAM Loader Mode (Operation Command: 60H) ................................................................................ 246
20.4
20.5
20.6
vi
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Memory Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Serial PROM Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
234
234
235
236
Interface Specifications for UART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Operation Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Operation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
20.6.4
20.6.5
20.6.6
20.6.7
Flash Memory SUM Output Mode (Operation Command: 90H) .........................................................
Product ID Code Output Mode (Operation Command: C0H)..............................................................
Flash Memory Status Output Mode (Operation Command: C3H) ......................................................
Flash Memory Read Protection Setting Mode (Operation Command: FAH) ......................................
20.8.1
20.8.2
Calculation Method ............................................................................................................................. 254
Calculation data .................................................................................................................................. 255
20.10.1
20.10.2
20.10.3
Password String................................................................................................................................ 257
Handling of Password Error .............................................................................................................. 257
Password Management during Program Development .................................................................... 257
20.7
20.8
248
249
251
252
Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Checksum (SUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
20.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
20.10 Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
20.11
20.12
20.13
20.14
20.15
Product ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash Memory Status Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Erasure Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UART Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258
258
260
261
262
21. Input/Output Circuit
21.1
21.2
Control pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Input/Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
22. Electrical Characteristics
22.1
22.2
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Recommended Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
22.2.1
22.2.2
22.2.3
22.3
22.4
22.5
22.6
DC Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AD Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.6.1
22.7
22.8
MCU mode (Flash Programming or erasing) ..................................................................................... 268
MCU mode (Except Flash Programming or erasing) ......................................................................... 268
Serial PROM mode ............................................................................................................................. 269
270
271
272
272
Write/Retention Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 272
Recommended Oscillating Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Handling Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
23. Package Dimensions
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical
specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI).
vii
viii
TMP86FS49AUG
CMOS 8-Bit Microcontroller
TMP86FS49AUG
The TMP86FS49AUG is a single-chip 8-bit high-speed and high-functionality microcomputer incorporating
61440 bytes of Flash Memory. It is pin-compatible with the TMP86CM49/CS49UG (Mask ROM version). The
TMP86FS49AUG can realize operations equivalent to those of the TMP86CM49/CS49UG by programming the onchip Flash Memory.
Product No.
ROM
(FLASH)
RAM
Package
MASK ROM MCU
Emulation Chip
TMP86FS49AUG
61440
bytes
2048
bytes
LQFP64-P-1010-0.50D
TMP86CM49/CS49UG
TMP86C949XB
1.1 Features
1. 8-bit single chip microcomputer TLCS-870/C series
- Instruction execution time :
0.25 µs (at 16 MHz)
122 µs (at 32.768 kHz)
- 132 types & 731 basic instructions
2. 24interrupt sources (External : 5 Internal : 19)
3. Input / Output ports (56 pins)
Large current output: 13pins (Typ. 20mA), LED direct drive
4. Watchdog Timer
5. Prescaler
- Time base timer
- Divider output function
6. 16-bit timer counter: 1 ch
- Timer, External trigger, Window, Pulse width measurement,
Event counter, Programmable pulse generate (PPG) modes
7. 16-bit timer counter: 1 ch
- Timer, Event counter, Window modes
This product uses the Super Flash technology under the licence of Silicon Storage Technology, Inc. Super Flash is registered trademark of Silicon
Storage Technology, Inc.
060116EBP
• The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023_D
• TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can
malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when
utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations
in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property.
In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most
recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the “Handling Guide for
Semiconductor Devices,” or “TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook” etc. 021023_A
• The TOSHIBA products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These TOSHIBA products are neither
intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunctionor failure of
which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury (“Unintended Usage”). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments,
airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of TOSHIBA products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's
own risk. 021023_B
• The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or
sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q
• The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by
TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of TOSHIBA or others. 021023_C
• The products described in this document are subject to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_E
• For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and
Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
Page 1
1.1 Features
TMP86FS49AUG
8. 8-bit timer counter : 4 ch
- Timer, Event counter, Programmable divider output (PDO),
Pulse width modulation (PWM) output,
Programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes
9. 8-bit UART : 2 ch
10. High-Speed SIO: 2ch
11. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus): 1ch
12. 10-bit successive approximation type AD converter
- Analog input: 16 ch
13. Key-on wakeup : 4 ch
14. Clock operation
Single clock mode
Dual clock mode
15. Low power consumption operation
STOP mode: Oscillation stops. (Battery/Capacitor back-up.)
SLOW1 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock
stop.)
SLOW2 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock
oscillate.)
IDLE0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR<TBTCK>.
IDLE1 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by interruputs(CPU restarts).
IDLE2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. Release by interruputs. (CPU restarts).
SLEEP0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using low frequency clock.Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR<TBTCK>.
SLEEP1 mode: CPU stops, and peripherals operate using low frequency clock. Release by interruput.(CPU restarts).
SLEEP2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock.
interruput.
16. Wide operation voltage:
4.5 V to 5.5 V at 16MHz /32.768 kHz
2.7 V to 5.5 V at 8 MHz /32.768 kHz
Page 2
Release by
TMP86FS49AUG
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
RESET
(STOP/INT5) P20
(INT0) P00
(BOOT/RXD1) P01
(TXD1) P02
(INT1) P03
(SI1) P04
(SO1) P05
(SCK1) P06
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
VSS
XIN
XOUT
TEST
VDD
(XTIN) P21
(XTOUT) P22
(INT3/TC2) P15
(PDO5/PWM5/TC5) P16
(PDO6/PWM6/PPG6/TC6) P17
(SCL) P50
(SDA) P51
P52
P53
P54
P30
P31
P32
P33
P34
P35
P36
P37
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
P14 (TC4/PDO4/PWM4/PPG4)
P13 (TC3/PDO3/PWM3)
P12 (PPG)
P11 (DVO)
P10 (TC1)
P47
P46 (SCK2)
P45 (SO2)
P44 (SI2)
P43
P42 (TXD2)
P41 (RXD2)
P40
P77 (AIN15)
P76 (AIN14)
P75 (AIN13)
1.2 Pin Assignment
Figure 1-1 Pin Assignment
Page 3
P74(AIN12)
P73(AIN11)
P72(AIN10)
P71(AIN9)
P70(AIN8)
P67(AIN7/STOP3)
P66(AIN6/STOP2)
P65(AIN5/STOP1)
P64(AIN4/STOP0)
P63(AIN3)
P62(AIN2)
P61(AIN1)
P60(AIN0)
AVDD
VAREF
P07(INT2)
1.3 Block Diagram
TMP86FS49AUG
1.3 Block Diagram
Figure 1-2 Block Diagram
Page 4
TMP86FS49AUG
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
The TMP86FS49AUG has MCU mode, parallel PROM mode, and serial PROM mode. Table 1-1 shows the pin
functions in MCU mode. The serial PROM mode is explained later in a separate chapter.
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(1/3)
Pin Name
P07
INT2
Pin Number
Input/Output
Functions
17
IO
I
PORT07
External interrupt 2 input
16
IO
IO
PORT06
Serial clock input/output 1
P05
SO1
15
IO
O
PORT05
Serial data output 1
P04
SI1
14
IO
I
PORT04
Serial data input 1
P03
INT1
13
IO
I
PORT03
External interrupt 1 input
P02
TXD1
12
IO
O
PORT02
UART data output 1
P01
RXD1
BOOT
11
IO
I
I
PORT01
UART data input 1
Serial PROM mode control input
10
IO
I
PORT00
External interrupt 0 input
51
IO
I
O
PORT17
TC6 input
PDO6/PWM6/PPG6 output
50
IO
I
O
PORT16
TC5 input
PDO5/PWM5 output
49
IO
I
I
PORT15
TC2 input
External interrupt 3 input
48
IO
I
O
PORT14
TC4 input
PDO4/PWM4/PPG4 output
47
IO
I
O
PORT13
TC3 input
PDO3/PWM3 output
46
IO
O
PORT12
PPG output
45
IO
O
PORT11
Divider Output
P10
TC1
44
IO
I
PORT10
TC1 input
P22
XTOUT
7
IO
O
PORT22
Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external
clock
P21
XTIN
6
IO
I
PORT21
Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external
clock
P06
SCK1
P00
INT0
P17
TC6
PDO6/PWM6/PPG6
P16
TC5
PDO5/PWM5
P15
TC2
INT3
P14
TC4
PDO4/PWM4/PPG4
P13
TC3
PDO3/PWM3
P12
PPG
P11
DVO
Page 5
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP86FS49AUG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(2/3)
Pin Name
Pin Number
Input/Output
Functions
9
IO
I
I
PORT20
External interrupt 5 input
STOP mode release signal input
P37
64
IO
PORT37
P36
63
IO
PORT36
P35
62
IO
PORT35
P34
61
IO
PORT34
P33
60
IO
PORT33
P32
59
IO
PORT32
P31
58
IO
PORT31
P30
57
IO
PORT30
P47
43
IO
PORT47
42
IO
IO
PORT46
Serial clock input/output 2
P45
SO2
41
IO
O
PORT45
Serial data output 2
P44
SI2
40
IO
I
PORT44
Serial data input 2
P43
39
IO
PORT43
P42
TXD2
38
IO
O
PORT42
UART data output 2
P41
RXD2
37
IO
I
PORT41
UART data input 2
P40
36
IO
PORT40
P54
56
IO
PORT54
P53
55
IO
PORT53
P52
54
IO
PORT52
P51
SDA
53
IO
IO
PORT51
I2C bus data
P50
SCL
52
IO
IO
PORT50
I2C bus clock
P67
AIN7
STOP3
27
IO
I
I
PORT67
Analog Input7
STOP3 input
P66
AIN6
STOP2
26
IO
I
I
PORT66
Analog Input6
STOP2 input
P65
AIN5
STOP1
25
IO
I
I
PORT65
Analog Input5
STOP1 input
P64
AIN4
STOP0
24
IO
I
I
PORT64
Analog Input4
STOP0 input
P20
INT5
STOP
P46
SCK2
Page 6
TMP86FS49AUG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(3/3)
Pin Name
Pin Number
Input/Output
Functions
P63
AIN3
23
IO
I
PORT63
Analog Input3
P62
AIN2
22
IO
I
PORT62
Analog Input2
P61
AIN1
21
IO
I
PORT61
Analog Input1
P60
AIN0
20
IO
I
PORT60
Analog Input0
P77
AIN15
35
IO
I
PORT77
Analog Input15
P76
AIN14
34
IO
I
PORT76
Analog Input14
P75
AIN13
33
IO
I
PORT75
Analog Input13
P74
AIN12
32
IO
I
PORT74
Analog Input12
P73
AIN11
31
IO
I
PORT73
Analog Input11
P72
AIN10
30
IO
I
PORT72
Analog Input10
P71
AIN9
29
IO
I
PORT71
Analog Input9
P70
AIN8
28
IO
I
PORT70
Analog Input8
XIN
2
I
Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock
XOUT
3
O
Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock
RESET
8
I
Reset signal
TEST
4
I
Test pin for out-going test. Normally, be fixed to low.
VAREF
18
I
Analog Base Voltage Input Pin for A/D Conversion
AVDD
19
I
Analog Power Supply
VDD
5
I
+5V
VSS
1
I
0(GND)
Page 7
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP86FS49AUG
Page 8
TMP86FS49AUG
2. Operational Description
2.1 CPU Core Functions
The CPU core consists of a CPU, a system clock controller, and an interrupt controller.
This section provides a description of the CPU core, the program memory, the data memory, and the reset circuit.
2.1.1
Memory Address Map
The TMP86FS49AUG memory is composed Flash, RAM, DBR(Data buffer register) and SFR(Special function register). They are all mapped in 64-Kbyte address space. Figure 2-1 shows the TMP86FS49AUG memory
address map.
0000H
SFR
SFR:
64 bytes
003FH
0040H
2048
bytes
RAM
RAM:
Special function register includes:
I/O ports
Peripheral control registers
Peripheral status registers
System control registers
Program status word
Random access memory includes:
Data memory
Stack
083FH
0F80H
DBR:
128
bytes
DBR
Data buffer register includes:
Peripheral control registers
Peripheral status registers
0FFFH
1000H
Flash:
Program memory
61440
bytes
Flash
FFB0H
Vector table for interrupts
(16 bytes)
FFBFH
FFC0H
Vector table for vector call instructions
(32 bytes)
FFDFH
FFE0H
Vector table for interrupts
FFFFH
(32 bytes)
Figure 2-1 Memory Address Map
2.1.2
Program Memory (Flash)
The TMP86FS49AUG has a 61440 bytes (Address 1000H to FFFFH) of program memory (Flash ).
2.1.3
Data Memory (RAM)
The TMP86FS49AUG has 2048 bytes (Address 0040H to 083FH) of internal RAM. The first 192 bytes
(0040H to 00FFH) of the internal RAM are located in the direct area; instructions with shorten operations are
available against such an area.
Page 9
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
TMP86FS49AUG
The data memory contents become unstable when the power supply is turned on; therefore, the data memory
should be initialized by an initialization routine.
Example :Clears RAM to “00H”. (TMP86FS49AUG)
SRAMCLR:
LD
HL, 0040H
; Start address setup
LD
A, H
; Initial value (00H) setup
LD
BC, 07FFH
LD
(HL), A
INC
HL
DEC
BC
JRS
F, SRAMCLR
2.2 System Clock Controller
The system clock controller consists of a clock generator, a timing generator, and a standby controller.
Timing generator control register
TBTCR
0036H
Clock
generator
XIN
fc
High-frequency
clock oscillator
Timing
generator
XOUT
Standby controller
0038H
XTIN
Low-frequency
clock oscillator
SYSCR1
fs
System clocks
0039H
SYSCR2
System control registers
XTOUT
Clock generator control
Figure 2-2 System Colck Control
2.2.1
Clock Generator
The clock generator generates the basic clock which provides the system clocks supplied to the CPU core
and peripheral hardware. It contains two oscillation circuits: One for the high-frequency clock and one for the
low-frequency clock. Power consumption can be reduced by switching of the standby controller to low-power
operation based on the low-frequency clock.
The high-frequency (fc) clock and low-frequency (fs) clock can easily be obtained by connecting a resonator
between the XIN/XOUT and XTIN/XTOUT pins respectively. Clock input from an external oscillator is also
possible. In this case, external clock is applied to XIN/XTIN pin with XOUT/XTOUT pin not connected.
Page 10
TMP86FS49AUG
Low-frequency clock
High-frequency clock
XIN
XOUT
XIN
XOUT
XTIN
XTOUT
(Open)
(a) Crystal/Ceramic
resonator
XTIN
XTOUT
(Open)
(c) Crystal
(b) External oscillator
(d) External oscillator
Figure 2-3 Examples of Resonator Connection
Note:The function to monitor the basic clock directly at external is not provided for hardware, however, with disabling all interrupts and watchdog timers, the oscillation frequency can be adjusted by monitoring the pulse
which the fixed frequency is outputted to the port by the program.
The system to require the adjustment of the oscillation frequency should create the program for the adjustment in advance.
Page 11
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
2.2.2
TMP86FS49AUG
Timing Generator
The timing generator generates the various system clocks supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware
from the basic clock (fc or fs). The timing generator provides the following functions.
1. Generation of main system clock
2. Generation of divider output (DVO) pulses
3. Generation of source clocks for time base timer
4. Generation of source clocks for watchdog timer
5. Generation of internal source clocks for timer/counters
6. Generation of warm-up clocks for releasing STOP mode
2.2.2.1
Configuration of timing generator
The timing generator consists of a 2-stage prescaler, a 21-stage divider, a main system clock generator,
and machine cycle counters.
An input clock to the 7th stage of the divider depends on the operating mode, SYSCR2<SYSCK> and
TBTCR<DV7CK>, that is shown in Figure 2-4. As reset and STOP mode started/canceled, the prescaler
and the divider are cleared to “0”.
fc or fs
Main system clock generator
Machine cycle counters
SYSCK
DV7CK
High-frequency
clock fc
Low-frequency
clock fs
1 2
fc/4
S
A
Divider
Y
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
B
Multiplexer
S
B0
B1
A0 Y0
A1 Y1
Multiplexer
Warm-up
controller
Watchdog
timer
Timer counter, Serial interface, Time-base-timer, divider output, etc. (Peripheral functions)
Figure 2-4 Configuration of Timing Generator
Page 12
TMP86FS49AUG
Timing Generator Control Register
TBTCR
(0036H)
7
6
(DVOEN)
5
(DVOCK)
DV7CK
4
3
DV7CK
(TBTEN)
Selection of input to the 7th stage
of the divider
2
1
0
(TBTCK)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
0: fc/28 [Hz]
1: fs
R/W
Note 1: In single clock mode, do not set DV7CK to “1”.
Note 2: Do not set “1” on DV7CK while the low-frequency clock is not operated stably.
Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don’t care
Note 4: In SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, the DV7CK setting is ineffective, and fs is input to the 7th stage of the divider.
Note 5: When STOP mode is entered from NORMAL1/2 mode, the DV7CK setting is ineffective during the warm-up period after
release of STOP mode, and the 6th stage of the divider is input to the 7th stage during this period.
2.2.2.2
Machine cycle
Instruction execution and peripheral hardware operation are synchronized with the main system clock.
The minimum instruction execution unit is called an “machine cycle”. There are a total of 10 different
types of instructions for the TLCS-870/C Series: Ranging from 1-cycle instructions which require one
machine cycle for execution to 10-cycle instructions which require 10 machine cycles for execution. A
machine cycle consists of 4 states (S0 to S3), and each state consists of one main system clock.
1/fc or 1/fs [s]
Main system clock
State
S0
S1
S2
S3
S0
S1
S2
S3
Machine cycle
Figure 2-5 Machine Cycle
2.2.3
Operation Mode Control Circuit
The operation mode control circuit starts and stops the oscillation circuits for the high-frequency and lowfrequency clocks, and switches the main system clock. There are three operating modes: Single clock mode,
dual clock mode and STOP mode. These modes are controlled by the system control registers (SYSCR1 and
SYSCR2). Figure 2-6 shows the operating mode transition diagram.
2.2.3.1
Single-clock mode
Only the oscillation circuit for the high-frequency clock is used, and P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT)
pins are used as input/output ports. The main-system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock. In
the single-clock mode, the machine cycle time is 4/fc [s].
(1)
NORMAL1 mode
In this mode, both the CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock.
The TMP86FS49AUG is placed in this mode after reset.
Page 13
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
TMP86FS49AUG
(2)
IDLE1 mode
In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remains active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are
halted; however on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock).
IDLE1 mode is started by SYSCR2<IDLE> = "1", and IDLE1 mode is released to NORMAL1
mode by an interrupt request from the on-chip peripherals or external interrupt inputs. When the IMF
(Interrupt master enable flag) is “1” (Interrupt enable), the execution will resume with the acceptance
of the interrupt, and the operation will return to normal after the interrupt service is completed. When
the IMF is “0” (Interrupt disable), the execution will resume with the instruction which follows the
IDLE1 mode start instruction.
(3)
IDLE0 mode
In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation.
This mode is enabled by SYSCR2<TGHALT> = "1".
When IDLE0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the
peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected
with TBTCR<TBTCK>, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits.
When returned from IDLE0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering NORMAL1 mode back
again. IDLE0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR<TBTEN> is set. When IMF =
“1”, EF7 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = “1”, and TBTCR<TBTEN> = “1”, interrupt processing is performed. When IDLE0 mode is entered while TBTCR<TBTEN> = “1”, the INTTBT
interrupt latch is set after returning to NORMAL1 mode.
2.2.3.2
Dual-clock mode
Both the high-frequency and low-frequency oscillation circuits are used in this mode. P21 (XTIN) and
P22 (XTOUT) pins cannot be used as input/output ports. The main system clock is obtained from the
high-frequency clock in NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and is obtained from the low-frequency clock in
SLOW and SLEEP modes. The machine cycle time is 4/fc [s] in the NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and
4/fs [s] (122 µs at fs = 32.768 kHz) in the SLOW and SLEEP modes.
The TLCS-870/C is placed in the signal-clock mode during reset. To use the dual-clock mode, the lowfrequency oscillator should be turned on at the start of a program.
(1)
NORMAL2 mode
In this mode, the CPU core operates with the high-frequency clock. On-chip peripherals operate
using the high-frequency clock and/or low-frequency clock.
(2)
SLOW2 mode
In this mode, the CPU core operates with the low-frequency clock, while both the high-frequency
clock and the low-frequency clock are operated. As the SYSCR2<SYSCK> becomes "1", the hardware changes into SLOW2 mode. As the SYSCR2<SYSCK> becomes “0”, the hardware changes
into NORMAL2 mode. As the SYSCR2<XEN> becomes “0”, the hardware changes into SLOW1
mode. Do not clear SYSCR2<XTEN> to “0” during SLOW2 mode.
(3)
SLOW1 mode
This mode can be used to reduce power-consumption by turning off oscillation of the high-frequency clock. The CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the low-frequency clock.
Page 14
TMP86FS49AUG
Switching back and forth between SLOW1 and SLOW2 modes are performed by
SYSCR2<XEN>. In SLOW1 and SLEEP modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is
stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped.
(4)
IDLE2 mode
In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remain active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are
halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock and/or
the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of IDLE2 mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode,
except that operation returns to NORMAL2 mode.
(5)
SLEEP1 mode
In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit of the low-frequency clock remains active. The CPU,
the watchdog timer, and the internal oscillation circuit of the high-frequency clock are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of SLEEP mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode, except that operation returns to SLOW1 mode.
In SLOW1 and SLEEP1 modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from
the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped.
(6)
SLEEP2 mode
The SLEEP2 mode is the idle mode corresponding to the SLOW2 mode. The status under the
SLEEP2 mode is same as that under the SLEEP1 mode, except for the oscillation circuit of the highfrequency clock.
(7)
SLEEP0 mode
In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. This mode
is enabled by setting “1” on bit SYSCR2<TGHALT>.
When SLEEP0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the
peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected
with TBTCR<TBTCK>, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits.
When returned from SLEEP0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering SLOW1 mode back
again. SLEEP0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR<TBTEN> is set. When IMF
= “1”, EF7 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = “1”, and TBTCR<TBTEN> = “1”, interrupt processing is performed. When SLEEP0 mode is entered while TBTCR<TBTEN> = “1”, the INTTBT
interrupt latch is set after returning to SLOW1 mode.
2.2.3.3
STOP mode
In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit is turned off, causing all system operations to be halted. The
internal status immediately prior to the halt is held with a lowest power consumption during STOP mode.
STOP mode is started by the system control register 1 (SYSCR1), and STOP mode is released by a
inputting (Either level-sensitive or edge-sensitive can be programmably selected) to the STOP pin. After
the warm-up period is completed, the execution resumes with the instruction which follows the STOP
mode start instruction.
Page 15
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
TMP86FS49AUG
IDLE0
mode
RESET
Reset release
Note 2
SYSCR2<TGHALT> = "1"
SYSCR1<STOP> = "1"
SYSCR2<IDLE> = "1"
NORMAL1
mode
Interrupt
STOP pin input
IDLE1
mode
(a) Single-clock mode
SYSCR2<XTEN> = "0"
SYSCR2<XTEN> = "1"
SYSCR2<IDLE> = "1"
IDLE2
mode
NORMAL2
mode
Interrupt
SYSCR1<STOP> = "1"
STOP pin input
SYSCR2<SYSCK> = "0"
SYSCR2<SYSCK> = "1"
STOP
SYSCR2<IDLE> = "1"
SLEEP2
mode
SLOW2
mode
Interrupt
SYSCR2<XEN> = "0"
SYSCR2<XEN> = "1"
SYSCR2<IDLE> = "1"
SLEEP1
mode
Interrupt
(b) Dual-clock mode
SYSCR1<STOP> = "1"
SLOW1
mode
STOP pin input
SYSCR2<TGHALT> = "1"
Note 2
SLEEP0
mode
Note 1: NORMAL1 and NORMAL2 modes are generically called NORMAL; SLOW1 and SLOW2 are called SLOW; IDLE0, IDLE1
and IDLE2 are called IDLE; SLEEP0, SLEEP1 and SLEEP2 are called SLEEP.
Note 2: The mode is released by falling edge of TBTCR<TBTCK> setting.
Figure 2-6 Operating Mode Transition Diagram
Table 2-1 Operating Mode and Conditions
Oscillator
Operating Mode
High
Frequency
Low
Frequency
RESET
NORMAL1
Single clock
IDLE1
Oscillation
Reset
Operate
Halt
Operate
Halt
Operate with
high frequency
Machine Cycle
Time
4/fc [s]
–
4/fc [s]
Halt
Oscillation
Operate with
low frequency
Oscillation
Halt
Operate
Operate
Operate with
low frequency
SLOW1
4/fs [s]
Stop
SLEEP0
STOP
Reset
Stop
SLEEP2
SLEEP1
Reset
Halt
SLOW2
Dual clock
Other
Peripherals
Stop
NORMAL2
IDLE2
TBT
Operate
IDLE0
STOP
CPU Core
Halt
Stop
Halt
Page 16
Halt
–
TMP86FS49AUG
System Control Register 1
SYSCR1
7
6
5
4
(0038H)
STOP
RELM
RETM
OUTEN
3
2
1
0
WUT
(Initial value: 0000 00**)
STOP
STOP mode start
0: CPU core and peripherals remain active
1: CPU core and peripherals are halted (Start STOP mode)
R/W
RELM
Release method for STOP
mode
0: Edge-sensitive release
1: Level-sensitive release
R/W
RETM
Operating mode after STOP
mode
0: Return to NORMAL1/2 mode
1: Return to SLOW1 mode
R/W
Port output during STOP mode
0: High impedance
1: Output kept
R/W
OUTEN
WUT
Warm-up time at releasing
STOP mode
Return to NORMAL mode
Return to SLOW mode
00
3 x 216/fc
3 x 213/fs
01
216/fc
213/fs
10
3 x 214/fc
3 x 26/fs
11
214/fc
26/fs
R/W
Note 1: Always set RETM to “0” when transiting from NORMAL mode to STOP mode. Always set RETM to “1” when transiting
from SLOW mode to STOP mode.
Note 2: When STOP mode is released with RESET pin input, a return is made to NORMAL1 regardless of the RETM contents.
Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don’t care
Note 4: Bits 1 and 0 in SYSCR1 are read as undefined data when a read instruction is executed.
Note 5: As the hardware becomes STOP mode under OUTEN = “0”, input value is fixed to “0”; therefore it may cause external
interrupt request on account of falling edge.
Note 6: When the key-on wakeup is used, RELM should be set to "1".
Note 7: Port P20 is used as STOP pin. Therefore, when stop mode is started, OUTEN does not affect to P20, and P20 becomes
High-Z mode.
Note 8: The warmig-up time should be set correctly for using oscillator.
System Control Register 2
SYSCR2
(0039H)
7
6
5
4
XEN
XTEN
SYSCK
IDLE
3
2
1
TGHALT
0
(Initial value: 1000 *0**)
XEN
High-frequency oscillator control
0: Turn off oscillation
1: Turn on oscillation
XTEN
Low-frequency oscillator control
0: Turn off oscillation
1: Turn on oscillation
SYSCK
Main system clock select
(Write)/main system clock monitor (Read)
0: High-frequency clock (NORMAL1/NORMAL2/IDLE1/IDLE2)
1: Low-frequency clock (SLOW1/SLOW2/SLEEP1/SLEEP2)
IDLE
CPU and watchdog timer control
(IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes)
0: CPU and watchdog timer remain active
1: CPU and watchdog timer are stopped (Start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes)
TGHALT
TG control (IDLE0 and SLEEP0
modes)
0: Feeding clock to all peripherals from TG
1: Stop feeding clock to peripherals except TBT from TG.
(Start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes)
R/W
R/W
Note 1: A reset is applied if both XEN and XTEN are cleared to “0”, XEN is cleared to “0” when SYSCK = “0”, or XTEN is cleared
to “0” when SYSCK = “1”.
Note 2: *: Don’t care, TG: Timing generator, *; Don’t care
Note 3: Bits 3, 1 and 0 in SYSCR2 are always read as undefined value.
Note 4: Do not set IDLE and TGHALT to “1” simultaneously.
Note 5: Because returning from IDLE0/SLEEP0 to NORMAL1/SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period
of IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode might be shorter than the period setting by TBTCR<TBTCK>.
Note 6: When IDLE1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode is released, IDLE is automatically cleared to “0”.
Note 7: When IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released, TGHALT is automatically cleared to “0”.
Note 8: Before setting TGHALT to “1”, be sure to stop peripherals. If peripherals are not stopped, the interrupt latch of peripherals
may be set after IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released.
Page 17
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
2.2.4
TMP86FS49AUG
Operating Mode Control
2.2.4.1
STOP mode
STOP mode is controlled by the system control register 1, the STOP pin input and key-on wakeup input
(STOP3 to STOP0) which is controlled by the STOP mode release control register (STOPCR).
The STOP pin is also used both as a port P20 and an INT5 (external interrupt input 5) pin. STOP mode is
started by setting SYSCR1<STOP> to “1”. During STOP mode, the following status is maintained.
1. Oscillations are turned off, and all internal operations are halted.
2. The data memory, registers, the program status word and port output latches are all held in the
status in effect before STOP mode was entered.
3. The prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to “0”.
4. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction (e.g., [SET (SYSCR1).7])
which started STOP mode.
STOP mode includes a level-sensitive mode and an edge-sensitive mode, either of which can be
selected with the SYSCR1<RELM>. Do not use any key-on wakeup input (STOP3 to STOP0) for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive mode.
Note 1: The STOP mode can be released by either the STOP or key-on wakeup pin (STOP3 to STOP0).
However, because the STOP pin is different from the key-on wakeup and can not inhibit the release
input, the STOP pin must be used for releasing STOP mode.
Note 2: During STOP period (from start of STOP mode to end of warm up), due to changes in the external
interrupt pin signal, interrupt latches may be set to “1” and interrupts may be accepted immediately
after STOP mode is released. Before starting STOP mode, therefore, disable interrupts. Also, before
enabling interrupts after STOP mode is released, clear unnecessary interrupt latches.
(1)
Level-sensitive release mode (RELM = “1”)
In this mode, STOP mode is released by setting the STOP pin high or setting the STOP3 to STOP0
pin input which is enabled by STOPCR. This mode is used for capacitor backup when the main
power supply is cut off and long term battery backup.
Even if an instruction for starting STOP mode is executed while STOP pin input is high or STOP3
to STOP0 input is low, STOP mode does not start but instead the warm-up sequence starts immediately. Thus, to start STOP mode in the level-sensitive release mode, it is necessary for the program to
first confirm that the STOP pin input is low or STOP3 to STOP0 input is high. The following two
methods can be used for confirmation.
1. Testing a port.
2. Using an external interrupt input INT5 (INT5 is a falling edge-sensitive input).
Example 1 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode by testing a port P20.
SSTOPH:
LD
(SYSCR1), 01010000B
; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode
TEST
(P2PRD). 0
; Wait until the STOP pin input goes low level
JRS
F, SSTOPH
; IMF ← 0
DI
SET
(SYSCR1). 7
; Starts STOP mode
Page 18
TMP86FS49AUG
Example 2 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode with an INT5 interrupt.
PINT5:
TEST
(P2PRD). 0
; To reject noise, STOP mode does not start if
JRS
F, SINT5
LD
(SYSCR1), 01010000B
port P20 is at high
; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode.
; IMF ← 0
DI
SET
SINT5:
(SYSCR1). 7
; Starts STOP mode
RETI
VIH
STOP pin
XOUT pin
NORMAL
operation
STOP
operation
Warm up
Confirm by program that the
STOP pin input is low and start
STOP mode.
NORMAL
operation
STOP mode is released by the hardware.
Always released if the STOP
pin input is high.
Figure 2-7 Level-sensitive Release Mode
Note 1: Even if the STOP pin input is low after warm-up start, the STOP mode is not restarted.
Note 2: In this case of changing to the level-sensitive mode from the edge-sensitive mode, the release
mode is not switched until a rising edge of the STOP pin input is detected.
(2)
Edge-sensitive release mode (RELM = “0”)
In this mode, STOP mode is released by a rising edge of the STOP pin input. This is used in applications where a relatively short program is executed repeatedly at periodic intervals. This periodic
signal (for example, a clock from a low-power consumption oscillator) is input to the STOP pin. In
the edge-sensitive release mode, STOP mode is started even when the STOP pin input is high level.
Do not use any STOP3 to STOP0 pin input for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive release mode.
Example :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode
; IMF ← 0
DI
LD
(SYSCR1), 10010000B
; Starts after specified to the edge-sensitive release mode
VIH
STOP pin
XOUT pin
NORMAL
operation
STOP
operation
Warm up
NORMAL
operation
STOP mode started
by the program.
STOP
operation
STOP mode is released by the hardware at the rising
edge of STOP pin input.
Figure 2-8 Edge-sensitive Release Mode
Page 19
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
TMP86FS49AUG
STOP mode is released by the following sequence.
1. In the dual-clock mode, when returning to NORMAL2, both the high-frequency and lowfrequency clock oscillators are turned on; when returning to SLOW1 mode, only the lowfrequency clock oscillator is turned on. In the single-clock mode, only the high-frequency
clock oscillator is turned on.
2. A warm-up period is inserted to allow oscillation time to stabilize. During warm up, all
internal operations remain halted. Four different warm-up times can be selected with the
SYSCR1<WUT> in accordance with the resonator characteristics.
3. When the warm-up time has elapsed, normal operation resumes with the instruction following the STOP mode start instruction.
Note 1: When the STOP mode is released, the start is made after the prescaler and the divider of the
timing generator are cleared to "0".
Note 2: STOP mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin, which immediately
performs the normal reset operation.
Note 3: When STOP mode is released with a low hold voltage, the following cautions must be observed.
The power supply voltage must be at the operating voltage level before releasing STOP mode.
The RESET pin input must also be “H” level, rising together with the power supply voltage. In this
case, if an external time constant circuit has been connected, the RESET pin input voltage will
increase at a slower pace than the power supply voltage. At this time, there is a danger that a
reset may occur if input voltage level of the RESET pin drops below the non-inverting high-level
input voltage (Hysteresis input).
Table 2-2 Warm-up Time Example (at fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Warm-up Time [ms]
WUT
00
01
10
11
Return to NORMAL Mode
Return to SLOW Mode
12.288
4.096
3.072
1.024
750
250
5.85
1.95
Note 1: The warm-up time is obtained by dividing the basic clock by the divider. Therefore, the warm-up
time may include a certain amount of error if there is any fluctuation of the oscillation frequency
when STOP mode is released. Thus, the warm-up time must be considered as an approximate
value.
Page 20
Page 21
Figure 2-9 STOP Mode Start/Release
Divider
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
Main
system
clock
Oscillator
circuit
STOP pin
input
Divider
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
Main
system
clock
Oscillator
circuit
0
Halt
Turn off
Turn on
Turn on
n
Count up
a+3
Warm up
a+2
n+2
n+3
n+4
0
(b) STOP mode release
1
Instruction address a + 2
a+4
2
Instruction address a + 3
a+5
(a) STOP mode start (Example: Start with SET (SYSCR1). 7 instruction located at address a)
n+1
SET (SYSCR1). 7
a+3
3
Instruction address a + 4
a+6
0
Halt
Turn off
TMP86FS49AUG
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
2.2.4.2
TMP86FS49AUG
IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and maskable
interrupts. The following status is maintained during these modes.
1. Operation of the CPU and watchdog timer (WDT) is halted. On-chip peripherals continue to
operate.
2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the
status in effect before these modes were entered.
3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts these modes.
Starting IDLE1/2 and
SLEEP1/2 modes by
instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Yes
Reset input
Reset
No
No
Interrupt request
Yes
“0”
IMF
“1” (Interrupt release mode)
Normal
release mode
Interrupt processing
Execution of the instruction which follows the
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2
modes start instruction
Figure 2-10 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes
Page 22
TMP86FS49AUG
• Start the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes
After IMF is set to "0", set the individual interrupt enable flag (EF) which releases IDLE1/2
and SLEEP1/2 modes. To start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, set SYSCR2<IDLE> to “1”.
• Release the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode.
These modes are selected by interrupt master enable flag (IMF). After releasing IDLE1/2 and
SLEEP1/2 modes, the SYSCR2<IDLE> is automatically cleared to “0” and the operation mode
is returned to the mode preceding IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes.
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin.
After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
(1)
Normal release mode (IMF = “0”)
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled by the individual
interrupt enable flag (EF). After the interrupt is generated, the program operation is resumed from the
instruction following the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start instruction. Normally, the interrupt
latches (IL) of the interrupt source used for releasing must be cleared to “0” by load instructions.
(2)
Interrupt release mode (IMF = “1”)
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled with the individual
interrupt enable flag (EF) and the interrupt processing is started. After the interrupt is processed, the
program operation is resumed from the instruction following the instruction, which starts IDLE1/2
and SLEEP1/2 modes.
Note: When a watchdog timer interrupts is generated immediately before IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2
modes are started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2
modes will not be started.
Page 23
Page 24
Figure 2-11 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes Start/Release
Watchdog
timer
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
Interrupt
request
Main
system
clock
Watchdog
timer
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
Interrupt
request
Main
system
clock
Watchdog
timer
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
Interrupt
request
Main
system
clock
Halt
Halt
Halt
Halt
Operate
Operate
Operate
Acceptance of interrupt
Instruction address a + 2
a+4
(b) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes release
㽳㩷Interrupt release mode
a+3
㽲㩷Normal release mode
a+3
(a) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a)
Operate
SET (SYSCR2). 4
a+2
Halt
a+3
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
TMP86FS49AUG
TMP86FS49AUG
2.2.4.3
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0)
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and the time base
timer control register (TBTCR). The following status is maintained during IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes.
1. Timing generator stops feeding clock to peripherals except TBT.
2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the
status in effect before IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes were entered.
3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts IDLE0 and
SLEEP0 modes.
Note: Before starting IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, be sure to stop (Disable) peripherals.
Stopping peripherals
by instruction
Starting IDLE0, SLEEP0
modes by instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Reset input
Yes
Reset
No
No
TBT
source clock
falling
edge
Yes
No
TBTCR<TBTEN>
= "1"
Yes
No
TBT interrupt
enable
Yes
(Normal release mode)
No
IMF = "1"
Yes (Interrupt release mode)
Interrupt processing
Execution of the instruction
which follows the IDLE0,
SLEEP0 modes start
instruction
Figure 2-12 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes
Page 25
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
TMP86FS49AUG
• Start the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes
Stop (Disable) peripherals such as a timer counter.
To start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, set SYSCR2<TGHALT> to “1”.
• Release the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode.
These modes are selected by interrupt master flag (IMF), the individual interrupt enable flag
of TBT and TBTCR<TBTEN>.
After releasing IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, the SYSCR2<TGHALT> is automatically
cleared to “0” and the operation mode is returned to the mode preceding IDLE0 and SLEEP0
modes. Before starting the IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR<TBTEN> is set to “1”,
INTTBT interrupt latch is set to “1”.
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin.
After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start/release without reference to TBTCR<TBTEN> setting.
(1)
Normal release mode (IMF•EF7•TBTCR<TBTEN> = “0”)
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the
TBTCR<TBTCK>. After the falling edge is detected, the program operation is resumed from the
instruction following the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start instruction. Before starting the IDLE0 or
SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR<TBTEN> is set to “1”, INTTBT interrupt latch is set to “1”.
(2)
Interrupt release mode (IMF•EF7•TBTCR<TBTEN> = “1”)
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the
TBTCR<TBTCK> and INTTBT interrupt processing is started.
Note 1: Because returning from IDLE0, SLEEP0 to NORMAL1, SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of IDLE0, SLEEP0 mode might be the shorter than the period setting by TBTCR<TBTCK>.
Note 2: When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated immediately before IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode is
started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode will not be
started.
Page 26
Page 27
Figure 2-13 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes Start/Release
Watchdog
timer
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
TBT clock
Halt
Halt
Halt
Watchdog
timer
Main
system
clock
Halt
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
TBT clock
Main
system
clock
Watchdog
timer
Instruction
execution
Program
counter
Interrupt
request
Main
system
clock
a+3
Halt
Operate
Operate
(b) IDLE and SLEEP0 modes release
㽳㩷Interrupt release mode
a+3
㽲㩷Normal release mode
a+3
Acceptance of interrupt
Instruction address a + 2
a+4
(a) IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a
Operate
SET (SYSCR2). 2
a+2
TMP86FS49AUG
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller
2.2.4.4
TMP86FS49AUG
SLOW mode
SLOW mode is controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2).
The following is the methods to switch the mode with the warm-up counter.
(1)
Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode
First, set SYSCR2<SYSCK> to switch the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for
SLOW2 mode. Next, clear SYSCR2<XEN> to turn off high-frequency oscillation.
Note: The high-frequency clock can be continued oscillation in order to return to NORMAL2 mode from
SLOW mode quickly. Always turn off oscillation of high-frequency clock when switching from
SLOW mode to stop mode.
Example 1 :Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode.
SET
(SYSCR2). 5
; SYSCR2<SYSCK> ← 1
(Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency
clock for SLOW2)
CLR
(SYSCR2). 7
; SYSCR2<XEN> ← 0
(Turns off high-frequency oscillation)
Example 2 :Switching to the SLOW1 mode after low-frequency clock has stabilized.
SET
(SYSCR2). 6
; SYSCR2<XTEN> ← 1
LD
(TC5CR), 43H
; Sets mode for TC6, 5 (16-bit mode, fs for source)
LD
(TC6CR), 05H
; Sets warming-up counter mode
LDW
(TTREG5), 8000H
; Sets warm-up time (Depend on oscillator accompanied)
; IMF ← 0
DI
SET
(EIRE). 2
; IMF ← 1
EI
SET
; Enables INTTC6
(TC6CR). 3
; Starts TC6, 5
CLR
(TC6CR). 3
; Stops TC6, 5
SET
(SYSCR2). 5
; SYSCR2<SYSCK> ← 1
:
PINTTC6:
(Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock)
CLR
(SYSCR2). 7
; SYSCR2<XEN> ← 0
(Turns off high-frequency oscillation)
RETI
:
VINTTC6:
DW
PINTTC6
; INTTC6 vector table
Page 28
TMP86FS49AUG
(2)
Switching from SLOW1 mode to NORMAL2 mode
First, set SYSCR2<XEN> to turn on the high-frequency oscillation. When time for stabilization
(Warm up) has been taken by the timer/counter (TC6,TC5), clear SYSCR2<SYSCK> to switch the
main system clock to the high-frequency clock.
SLOW mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the
operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: After SYSCK is cleared to “0”, executing the instructions is continiued by the low-frequency clock
for the period synchronized with low-frequency and high-frequency clocks.
High-frequency clock
Low-frequency clock
Main system clock
SYSCK
Example :Switching from the SLOW1 mode to the NORMAL2 mode (fc = 16 MHz, warm-up time is 4.0 ms).
SET
(SYSCR2). 7
; SYSCR2<XEN> ← 1 (Starts high-frequency oscillation)
LD
(TC5CR), 63H
; Sets mode for TC6, 5 (16-bit mode, fc for source)
LD
(TC6CR), 05H
; Sets warming-up counter mode
LD
(TTREG6), 0F8H
; Sets warm-up time
; IMF ← 0
DI
SET
(EIRE). 2
; IMF ← 1
EI
SET
; Enables INTTC6
(TC6CR). 3
; Starts TC6, 5
CLR
(TC6CR). 3
; Stops TC6, 5
CLR
(SYSCR2). 5
; SYSCR2<SYSCK> ← 0
:
PINTTC6:
(Switches the main system clock to the high-frequency clock)
RETI
:
VINTTC6:
DW
PINTTC6
; INTTC6 vector table
Page 29
Page 30
Figure 2-14 Switching between the NORMAL2 and SLOW Modes
SET (SYSCR2). 7
SET (SYSCR2). 5
SLOW1 mode
Instruction
execution
XEN
SYSCK
Highfrequency
clock
Lowfrequency
clock
Main
system
clock
NORMAL2
mode
Instruction
execution
XEN
SYSCK
Highfrequency
clock
Lowfrequency
clock
Main
system
clock
(b) Switching to the NORMAL2 mode
Warm up during SLOW2 mode
CLR (SYSCR2). 5
(a) Switching to the SLOW mode
SLOW2 mode
CLR (SYSCR2). 7
NORMAL2
mode
SLOW1 mode
Turn off
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
TMP86FS49AUG
TMP86FS49AUG
2.3 Reset Circuit
The TMP86FS49AUG has four types of reset generation procedures: An external reset input, an address trap reset,
a watchdog timer reset and a system clock reset. Of these reset, the address trap reset, the watchdog timer and the
system clock reset are a malfunction reset. When the malfunction reset request is detected, reset occurs during the
maximum 24/fc[s].
The malfunction reset circuit such as watchdog timer reset, address trap reset and system clock reset is not initialized when power is turned on. Therefore, reset may occur during maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5µs at 16.0 MHz) when
power is turned on.
Table 2-3 shows on-chip hardware initialization by reset action.
Table 2-3 Initializing Internal Status by Reset Action
On-chip Hardware
Initial Value
Program counter
(PC)
(FFFEH)
Stack pointer
(SP)
Not initialized
General-purpose registers
(W, A, B, C, D, E, H, L, IX, IY)
(JF)
Not initialized
Zero flag
(ZF)
Not initialized
Carry flag
(CF)
Not initialized
Half carry flag
(HF)
Not initialized
Sign flag
(SF)
Not initialized
Overflow flag
(VF)
Not initialized
(IMF)
0
(EF)
0
(IL)
0
Interrupt individual enable flags
Interrupt latches
2.3.1
Initial Value
Prescaler and divider of timing generator
0
Not initialized
Jump status flag
Interrupt master enable flag
On-chip Hardware
Watchdog timer
Enable
Output latches of I/O ports
Refer to I/O port circuitry
Control registers
Refer to each of control
register
RAM
Not initialized
External Reset Input
The RESET pin contains a Schmitt trigger (Hysteresis) with an internal pull-up resistor.
When the RESET pin is held at “L” level for at least 3 machine cycles (12/fc [s]) with the power supply voltage within the operating voltage range and oscillation stable, a reset is applied and the internal state is initialized.
When the RESET pin input goes high, the reset operation is released and the program execution starts at the
vector address stored at addresses FFFEH to FFFFH.
VDD
RESET
Internal reset
Watchdog timer reset
Malfunction
reset output
circuit
Address trap reset
System clock reset
Figure 2-15 Reset Circuit
Page 31
2. Operational Description
2.3 Reset Circuit
TMP86FS49AUG
2.3.2
Address trap reset
If the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction
from the on-chip RAM (when WDTCR1<ATAS> is set to “1”), DBR or the SFR area, address trap reset will be
generated. The reset time is maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5µs at 16.0 MHz).
Note:The operating mode under address trapped is alternative of reset or interrupt. The address trap area is alternative.
Instruction
execution
Reset release
JP a
Instruction at address r
Address trap is occurred
Internal reset
maximum 24/fc [s]
4/fc to 12/fc [s]
16/fc [s]
Note 1: Address “a” is in the SFR, DBR or on-chip RAM (WDTCR1<ATAS> = “1”) space.
Note 2: During reset release, reset vector “r” is read out, and an instruction at address “r” is fetched and decoded.
Figure 2-16 Address Trap Reset
2.3.3
Watchdog timer reset
Refer to Section “Watchdog Timer”.
2.3.4
System clock reset
If the condition as follows is detected, the system clock reset occurs automatically to prevent dead lock of the
CPU. (The oscillation is continued without stopping.)
- In case of clearing SYSCR2<XEN> and SYSCR2<XTEN> simultaneously to “0”.
- In case of clearing SYSCR2<XEN> to “0”, when the SYSCR2<SYSCK> is “0”.
- In case of clearing SYSCR2<XTEN> to “0”, when the SYSCR2<SYSCK> is “1”.
The reset time is maximum 24/fc (1.5 µs at 16.0 MHz).
Page 32
TMP86FS49AUG
Page 33
2. Operational Description
2.3 Reset Circuit
TMP86FS49AUG
Page 34
TMP86FS49AUG
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
The TMP86FS49AUG has a total of 24 interrupt sources excluding reset. Interrupts can be nested with priorities.
Four of the internal interrupt sources are non-maskable while the rest are maskable.
Interrupt sources are provided with interrupt latches (IL), which hold interrupt requests, and independent vectors.
The interrupt latch is set to “1” by the generation of its interrupt request which requests the CPU to accept its interrupts. Interrupts are enabled or disabled by software using the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and interrupt enable
flag (EF). If more than one interrupts are generated simultaneously, interrupts are accepted in order which is dominated by hardware. However, there are no prioritized interrupt factors among non-maskable interrupts.
Interrupt Factors
Internal/External
Enable Condition
Interrupt
Latch
Vector
Address
Priority
(Reset)
Non-maskable
–
FFFE
1
Internal
INTSWI (Software interrupt)
Non-maskable
–
FFFC
2
Internal
INTUNDEF (Executed the undefined instruction
interrupt)
Non-maskable
–
FFFC
2
Internal
INTATRAP (Address trap interrupt)
Non-maskable
IL2
FFFA
2
Internal
INTWDT (Watchdog timer interrupt)
Non-maskable
IL3
FFF8
2
External
INT0
IMF• EF4 = 1, INT0EN = 1
IL4
FFF6
5
Internal
INTTC1
IMF• EF5 = 1
IL5
FFF4
6
External
INT1
IMF• EF6 = 1
IL6
FFF2
7
Internal
INTTBT
IMF• EF7 = 1
IL7
FFF0
8
External
INT2
IMF• EF8 = 1
IL8
FFEE
9
Internal
INTTC4
IMF• EF9 = 1
IL9
FFEC
10
Internal
INTTC3
IMF• EF10 = 1
IL10
FFEA
11
Internal
INTSBI
IMF• EF11 = 1
IL11
FFE8
12
External
INT3
IMF• EF12 = 1
IL12
FFE6
13
Internal
INTSIO1
IMF• EF13 = 1
IL13
FFE4
14
Internal
INTSIO2
IMF• EF14 = 1
IL14
FFE2
15
Internal
INTADC
IMF• EF15 = 1
IL15
FFE0
16
Internal
INTRXD1
IMF• EF16 = 1
IL16
FFBE
17
Internal
INTTXD1
IMF• EF17 = 1
IL17
FFBC
18
Internal
INTTC6
IMF• EF18 = 1
IL18
FFBA
19
Internal
INTTC5
IMF• EF19 = 1
IL19
FFB8
20
Internal
INTRXD2
IMF• EF20 = 1
IL20
FFB6
21
Internal
INTTXD2
IMF• EF21 = 1
IL21
FFB4
22
Internal
INTTC2
IMF• EF22 = 1
IL22
FFB2
23
External
INT5
IMF• EF23 = 1
IL23
FFB0
24
Note 1: To use the address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), clear WDTCR1<ATOUT> to “0” (It is set for the “reset request” after reset is
cancelled). For details, see “Address Trap”.
Note 2: To use the watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT), clear WDTCR1<WDTOUT> to "0" (It is set for the "Reset request" after
reset is released). For details, see "Watchdog Timer".
Note 3: If an INTADC interrupt request is generated while an interrupt with priority lower than the interrupt latch IL15 (INTADC) is
being accepted, the INTADC interrupt latch may be cleared without the INTADC interrupt being processed. For details,
refer to the corresponding notes in the chapter on the AD converter.
3.1 Interrupt latches (IL23 to IL2)
An interrupt latch is provided for each interrupt source, except for a software interrupt and an executed the undefined instruction interrupt. When interrupt request is generated, the latch is set to “1”, and the CPU is requested to
accept the interrupt if its interrupt is enabled. The interrupt latch is cleared to "0" immediately after accepting interrupt. All interrupt latches are initialized to “0” during reset.
Page 35
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR)
TMP86FS49AUG
The interrupt latches are located on address 002EH, 003CH and 003DH in SFR area. Each latch can be cleared to
"0" individually by instruction. However, IL2 and IL3 should not be cleared to "0" by software. For clearing the
interrupt latch, load instruction should be used and then IL2 and IL3 should be set to "1". If the read-modify-write
instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions are used, interrupt request would be cleared inadequately if interrupt is requested while such instructions are executed.
Interrupt latches are not set to “1” by an instruction.
Since interrupt latches can be read, the status for interrupt requests can be monitored by software.
Note: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to
"0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL
(Enable interrupt by EI instruction)
In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on
interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL
should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Clears interrupt latches
; IMF ← 0
DI
LDW
(ILL), 1110100000111111B
; IL12, IL10 to IL6 ← 0
; IMF ← 1
EI
Example 2 :Reads interrupt latchess
WA, (ILL)
; W ← ILH, A ← ILL
TEST
(ILL). 7
; if IL7 = 1 then jump
JR
F, SSET
LD
Example 3 :Tests interrupt latches
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR)
The interrupt enable register (EIR) enables and disables the acceptance of interrupts, except for the non-maskable
interrupts (Software interrupt, undefined instruction interrupt, address trap interrupt and watchdog interrupt). Nonmaskable interrupt is accepted regardless of the contents of the EIR.
The EIR consists of an interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and the individual interrupt enable flags (EF). These
registers are located on address 002CH, 003AH and 003BH in SFR area, and they can be read and written by an
instructions (Including read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions).
3.2.1
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF)
The interrupt enable register (IMF) enables and disables the acceptance of the whole maskable interrupt.
While IMF = “0”, all maskable interrupts are not accepted regardless of the status on each individual interrupt
enable flag (EF). By setting IMF to “1”, the interrupt becomes acceptable if the individuals are enabled. When
an interrupt is accepted, IMF is cleared to “0” after the latest status on IMF is stacked. Thus the maskable interrupts which follow are disabled. By executing return interrupt instruction [RETI/RETN], the stacked data,
which was the status before interrupt acceptance, is loaded on IMF again.
The IMF is located on bit0 in EIRL (Address: 003AH in SFR), and can be read and written by an instruction.
The IMF is normally set and cleared by [EI] and [DI] instruction respectively. During reset, the IMF is initialized to “0”.
Page 36
TMP86FS49AUG
3.2.2
Individual interrupt enable flags (EF23 to EF4)
Each of these flags enables and disables the acceptance of its maskable interrupt. Setting the corresponding
bit of an individual interrupt enable flag to “1” enables acceptance of its interrupt, and setting the bit to “0” disables acceptance. During reset, all the individual interrupt enable flags (EF23 to EF4) are initialized to “0” and
all maskable interrupts are not accepted until they are set to “1”.
Note:In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear
IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF
or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction)
In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Enables interrupts individually and sets IMF
; IMF ← 0
DI
LDW
:
(EIRL), 1110100010100000B
; EF15 to EF13, EF11, EF7, EF5 ← 1
Note: IMF should not be set.
:
; IMF ← 1
EI
Example 2 :C compiler description example
unsigned int _io (3AH) EIRL;
/* 3AH shows EIRL address */
_DI();
EIRL = 10100000B;
:
_EI();
Page 37
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR)
TMP86FS49AUG
Interrupt Latches
(Initial value: 00000000 000000**)
ILH,ILL
(003DH, 003CH)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
IL15
IL14
IL13
IL12
IL11
IL10
IL9
IL8
IL7
IL6
IL5
IL4
IL3
IL2
ILH (003DH)
1
0
ILL (003CH)
(Initial value: 00000000)
ILE
(002EH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IL23
IL22
IL21
IL20
IL19
IL18
IL17
IL16
ILE (002EH)
IL23 to IL2
at RD
0: No interrupt request
Interrupt latches
at WR
0: Clears the interrupt request
1: (Interrupt latch is not set.)
1: Interrupt request
R/W
Note 1: To clear any one of bits IL7 to IL4, be sure to write "1" into IL2 and IL3.
Note 2: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0"
(Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt
by EI instruction)
In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Note 3: Do not clear IL with read-modify-write instructions such as bit operations.
Interrupt Enable Registers
(Initial value: 00000000 0000***0)
EIRH,EIRL
(003BH, 003AH)
15
14
13
EF15
EF14
EF13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
EF12
EF11
EF10
EF9
EF8
EF7
EF6
EF5
EIRH (003BH)
4
3
2
1
EF4
0
IMF
EIRL (003AH)
(Initial value: 00000000)
EIRE
(002CH)
7
6
5
EF23
EF22
EF21
4
3
2
1
0
EF20
EF19
EF18
EF17
EF16
EIRE (002CH)
EF23 to EF4
IMF
Individual-interrupt enable flag
(Specified for each bit)
0:
1:
Disables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt.
Enables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt.
Interrupt master enable flag
0:
1:
Disables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts
Enables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts
R/W
Note 1: *: Don’t care
Note 2: Do not set IMF and the interrupt enable flag (EF15 to EF4) to “1” at the same time.
Note 3: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0"
(Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt
by EI instruction)
In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Page 38
TMP86FS49AUG
3.3 Interrupt Sequence
An interrupt request, which raised interrupt latch, is held, until interrupt is accepted or interrupt latch is cleared to
“0” by resetting or an instruction. Interrupt acceptance sequence requires 8 machine cycles (2 µs @16 MHz) after the
completion of the current instruction. The interrupt service task terminates upon execution of an interrupt return
instruction [RETI] (for maskable interrupts) or [RETN] (for non-maskable interrupts). Figure 3-1 shows the timing
chart of interrupt acceptance processing.
3.3.1
Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows.
a. The interrupt master enable flag (IMF) is cleared to “0” in order to disable the acceptance of any following interrupt.
b. The interrupt latch (IL) for the interrupt source accepted is cleared to “0”.
c. The contents of the program counter (PC) and the program status word, including the interrupt master
enable flag (IMF), are saved (Pushed) on the stack in sequence of PSW + IMF, PCH, PCL. Meanwhile, the stack pointer (SP) is decremented by 3.
d. The entry address (Interrupt vector) of the corresponding interrupt service program, loaded on the vector table, is transferred to the program counter.
e. The instruction stored at the entry address of the interrupt service program is executed.
Note:When the contents of PSW are saved on the stack, the contents of IMF are also saved.
Interrupt service task
1-machine cycle
Interrupt
request
Interrupt
latch (IL)
IMF
Execute
instruction
PC
SP
Execute
instruction
a−1
a
Execute
instruction
Interrupt acceptance
a+1
b
a
b+1 b+2 b + 3
n−1 n−2
n
Execute RETI instruction
c+2
c+1
a
n−2 n−1
n-3
a+1 a+2
n
Note 1: a: Return address entry address, b: Entry address, c: Address which RETI instruction is stored
Note 2: On condition that interrupt is enabled, it takes 38/fc [s] or 38/fs [s] at maximum (If the interrupt latch is set at the first
machine cycle on 10 cycle instruction) to start interrupt acceptance processing since its interrupt latch is set.
Figure 3-1 Timing Chart of Interrupt Acceptance/Return Interrupt Instruction
Example: Correspondence between vector table address for INTTBT and the entry address of the interrupt
service program
Vector table address
FFF0H
03H
FFF1H
D2H
Entry address
Vector
D203H
0FH
D204H
06H
Figure 3-2 Vector table address,Entry address
Page 39
Interrupt
service
program
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.3 Interrupt Sequence
TMP86FS49AUG
A maskable interrupt is not accepted until the IMF is set to “1” even if the maskable interrupt higher than the
level of current servicing interrupt is requested.
In order to utilize nested interrupt service, the IMF is set to “1” in the interrupt service program. In this case,
acceptable interrupt sources are selectively enabled by the individual interrupt enable flags.
To avoid overloaded nesting, clear the individual interrupt enable flag whose interrupt is currently serviced,
before setting IMF to “1”. As for non-maskable interrupt, keep interrupt service shorten compared with length
between interrupt requests; otherwise the status cannot be recovered as non-maskable interrupt would simply
nested.
3.3.2
Saving/restoring general-purpose registers
During interrupt acceptance processing, the program counter (PC) and the program status word (PSW,
includes IMF) are automatically saved on the stack, but the accumulator and others are not. These registers are
saved by software if necessary. When multiple interrupt services are nested, it is also necessary to avoid using
the same data memory area for saving registers. The following methods are used to save/restore the generalpurpose registers.
3.3.2.1
Using PUSH and POP instructions
If only a specific register is saved or interrupts of the same source are nested, general-purpose registers
can be saved/restored using the PUSH/POP instructions.
Example :Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
PINTxx:
PUSH
WA
; Save WA register
(interrupt processing)
POP
WA
; Restore WA register
RETI
; RETURN
Address
(Example)
SP
b-5
A
SP
b-4
SP
b-3
PCL
W
PCL
PCH
PCH
PCH
PSW
PSW
PSW
At acceptance of
an interrupt
At execution of
PUSH instruction
PCL
At execution of
POP instruction
b-2
b-1
SP
b
At execution of
RETI instruction
Figure 3-3 Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
3.3.2.2
Using data transfer instructions
To save only a specific register without nested interrupts, data transfer instructions are available.
Page 40
TMP86FS49AUG
Example :Save/store register using data transfer instructions
PINTxx:
LD
(GSAVA), A
; Save A register
(interrupt processing)
LD
A, (GSAVA)
; Restore A register
RETI
; RETURN
Main task
Interrupt
service task
Interrupt
acceptance
Saving
registers
Restoring
registers
Interrupt return
Saving/Restoring general-purpose registers using PUSH/POP data transfer instruction
Figure 3-4 Saving/Restoring General-purpose Registers under Interrupt Processing
3.3.3
Interrupt return
Interrupt return instructions [RETI]/[RETN] perform as follows.
[RETI]/[RETN] Interrupt Return
1. Program counter (PC) and program status word
(PSW, includes IMF) are restored from the stack.
2. Stack pointer (SP) is incremented by 3.
As for address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), it is required to alter stacked data for program counter (PC) to
restarting address, during interrupt service program.
Note:If [RETN] is executed with the above data unaltered, the program returns to the address trap area and
INTATRAP occurs again.When interrupt acceptance processing has completed, stacked data for PCL and
PCH are located on address (SP + 1) and (SP + 2) respectively.
Example 1 :Returning from address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) service program
PINTxx:
POP
WA
; Recover SP by 2
LD
WA, Return Address
;
PUSH
WA
; Alter stacked data
(interrupt processing)
RETN
; RETURN
Page 41
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.4 Software Interrupt (INTSW)
TMP86FS49AUG
Example 2 :Restarting without returning interrupt
(In this case, PSW (Includes IMF) before interrupt acceptance is discarded.)
PINTxx:
INC
SP
; Recover SP by 3
INC
SP
;
INC
SP
;
(interrupt processing)
LD
EIRL, data
; Set IMF to “1” or clear it to “0”
JP
Restart Address
; Jump into restarting address
Interrupt requests are sampled during the final cycle of the instruction being executed. Thus, the next interrupt can be accepted immediately after the interrupt return instruction is executed.
Note 1: It is recommended that stack pointer be return to rate before INTATRAP (Increment 3 times), if return interrupt instruction [RETN] is not utilized during interrupt service program under INTATRAP (such as Example
2).
Note 2: When the interrupt processing time is longer than the interrupt request generation time, the interrupt service
task is performed but not the main task.
3.4 Software Interrupt (INTSW)
Executing the SWI instruction generates a software interrupt and immediately starts interrupt processing (INTSW
is highest prioritized interrupt).
Use the SWI instruction only for detection of the address error or for debugging.
3.4.1
Address error detection
FFH is read if for some cause such as noise the CPU attempts to fetch an instruction from a non-existent
memory address during single chip mode. Code FFH is the SWI instruction, so a software interrupt is generated and an address error is detected. The address error detection range can be further expanded by writing
FFH to unused areas of the program memory. Address trap reset is generated in case that an instruction is
fetched from RAM, DBR or SFR areas.
3.4.2
Debugging
Debugging efficiency can be increased by placing the SWI instruction at the software break point setting
address.
3.5 Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF)
Taking code which is not defined as authorized instruction for instruction causes INTUNDEF. INTUNDEF is generated when the CPU fetches such a code and tries to execute it. INTUNDEF is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTUNDEF interrupt process starts, soon after it is
requested.
Note: The undefined instruction interrupt (INTUNDEF) forces CPU to jump into vector address, as software interrupt
(SWI) does.
3.6 Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
Fetching instruction from unauthorized area for instructions (Address trapped area) causes reset output or address
trap interrupt (INTATRAP). INTATRAP is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTATRAP interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested.
Note: The operating mode under address trapped, whether to be reset output or interrupt processing, is selected on
watchdog timer control register (WDTCR).
Page 42
TMP86FS49AUG
3.7 External Interrupts
The TMP86FS49AUG has 5 external interrupt inputs. These inputs are equipped with digital noise reject circuits
(Pulse inputs of less than a certain time are eliminated as noise).
Edge selection is also possible with INT1 to INT3. The INT0/P00 pin can be configured as either an external interrupt input pin or an input/output port, and is configured as an input port during reset.
Edge selection, noise reject control and INT0/P00 pin function selection are performed by the external interrupt
control register (EINTCR).
Source
INT0
INT1
INT2
INT3
INT5
Pin
INT0
INT1
INT2
INT3
INT5
Enable Conditions
Release Edge
Digital Noise Reject
IMF ΠEF4 ΠINT0EN=1
Falling edge
Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered
to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode,
pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals.
IMF ΠEF6 = 1
Falling edge
or
Rising edge
Pulses of less than 15/fc or 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 49/fc or 193/fc [s] or
more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW
or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s]
are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or
more are considered to be signals.
IMF ΠEF8 = 1
Falling edge
or
Rising edge
Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered
to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode,
pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals.
IMF ΠEF12 = 1
Falling edge
or
Rising edge
Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered
to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode,
pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals.
Falling edge
Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered
to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode,
pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as
noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals.
IMF ΠEF23 = 1
Note 1: In NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, if a signal with no noise is input on an external interrupt pin, it takes a maximum of "signal establishment time + 6/fs[s]" from the input signal's edge to set the interrupt latch.
Note 2: When INT0EN = "0", IL4 is not set even if a falling edge is detected on the INT0 pin input.
Note 3: When a pin with more than one function is used as an output and a change occurs in data or input/output status, an interrupt request signal is generated in a pseudo manner. In this case, it is necessary to perform appropriate processing such
as disabling the interrupt enable flag.
Page 43
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.7 External Interrupts
TMP86FS49AUG
External Interrupt Control Register
EINTCR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
(0037H)
INT1NC
INT0EN
-
-
INT3ES
INT2ES
INT1ES
0
(Initial value: 00** 000*)
INT1NC
Noise reject time select
0: Pulses of less than 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise
1: Pulses of less than 15/fc [s] are eliminated as noise
R/W
INT0EN
P00/INT0 pin configuration
0: P00 input/output port
1: INT0 pin (Port P00 should be set to an input mode)
R/W
INT3 ES
INT3 edge select
0: Rising edge
1: Falling edge
R/W
INT2 ES
INT2 edge select
0: Rising edge
1: Falling edge
R/W
INT1 ES
INT1 edge select
0: Rising edge
1: Falling edge
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don’t care
Note 2: When the system clock frequency is switched between high and low or when the external interrupt control register
(EINTCR) is overwritten, the noise canceller may not operate normally. It is recommended that external interrupts are disabled using the interrupt enable register (EIR).
Note 3: The maximum time from modifying INT1NC until a noise reject time is changed is 26/fc.
Page 44
TMP86FS49AUG
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
The TMP86FS49AUG adopts the memory mapped I/O system, and all peripheral control and data transfers are
performed through the special function register (SFR) or the data buffer register (DBR). The SFR is mapped on
address 0000H to 003FH, DBR is mapped on address 0F80H to 0FFFH.
This chapter shows the arrangement of the special function register (SFR) and data buffer register (DBR) for
TMP86FS49AUG.
4.1 SFR
Address
Read
Write
0000H
P0DR
0001H
P1DR
0002H
P2DR
0003H
P3DR
0004H
P4DR
0005H
P5DR
0006H
P6DR
0007H
P7DR
0008H
P0OUTCR
0009H
P1CR
000AH
P4OUTCR
000BH
P0PRD
-
000CH
P2PRD
-
000DH
P3PRD
-
000EH
P4PRD
-
000FH
P5PRD
-
0010H
TC1DRAL
0011H
TC1DRAH
0012H
TC1DRBL
0013H
TC1DRBH
0014H
TTREG3
0015H
TTREG4
0016H
TTREG5
0017H
TTREG6
0018H
PWREG3
0019H
PWREG4
001AH
PWREG5
001BH
PWREG6
001CH
ADCCR1
001DH
ADCCR2
001EH
ADCDR2
001FH
ADCDR1
0020H
SIO1CR
0021H
SIO1SR
-
0022H
SIO1RDB
SIO1TDB
0023H
TC2CR
0024H
TC2DRL
0025H
TC2DRH
Page 45
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1 SFR
TMP86FS49AUG
Address
Read
Write
0026H
TC1CR
0027H
TC3CR
0028H
TC4CR
0029H
TC5CR
002AH
002BH
TC6CR
SIO2RDB
SIO2TDB
002CH
EIRE
002DH
Reserved
002EH
ILE
002FH
Reserved
0030H
Reserved
0031H
SIO2CR
0032H
SIO2SR
0033H
Reserved
0034H
-
WDTCR1
0035H
-
WDTCR2
0036H
TBTCR
0037H
EINTCR
0038H
SYSCR1
0039H
SYSCR2
003AH
EIRL
003BH
EIRH
003CH
ILL
003DH
ILH
003EH
Reserved
003FH
PSW
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program.
Note 2: − ; Cannot be accessed.
Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such
as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 46
TMP86FS49AUG
4.2 DBR
Address
Read
Write
0F80H
Reserved
0F81H
Reserved
0F82H
Reserved
0F83H
Reserved
0F84H
Reserved
0F85H
Reserved
0F86H
Reserved
0F87H
Reserved
0F88H
Reserved
0F89H
Reserved
0F8AH
Reserved
0F8BH
Reserved
0F8CH
Reserved
0F8DH
Reserved
0F8EH
Reserved
0F8FH
Reserved
0F90H
SBISRA
0F91H
SBICRA
SBIDBR
0F92H
-
I2CAR
0F93H
SBISRB
SBICRB
0F94H
0F95H
Reserved
UART1SR
UART1CR1
0F96H
-
UART1CR2
0F97H
RD1BUF
TD1BUF
0F98H
UART2SR
UART2CR1
0F99H
-
UART2CR2
0F9AH
RD2BUF
TD2BUF
0F9BH
P6CR1
0F9CH
P6CR2
0F9DH
P7CR1
0F9EH
P7CR2
0F9FH
-
Address
Read
0FA0H
STOPCR
Write
Reserved
: :
: :
0FBFH
Reserved
Address
Read
0FC0H
Write
Reserved
: :
: :
0FDFH
Reserved
Page 47
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.2 DBR
TMP86FS49AUG
Address
Read
Write
0FE0H
Reserved
0FE1H
Reserved
0FE2H
Reserved
0FE3H
Reserved
0FE4H
Reserved
0FE5H
Reserved
0FE6H
Reserved
0FE7H
Reserved
0FE8H
Reserved
0FE9H
Reserved
0FEAH
Reserved
0FEBH
Reserved
0FECH
Reserved
0FEDH
Reserved
0FEEH
Reserved
0FEFH
Reserved
0FF0H
Reserved
0FF1H
Reserved
0FF2H
Reserved
0FF3H
Reserved
0FF4H
Reserved
0FF5H
Reserved
0FF6H
Reserved
0FF7H
Reserved
0FF8H
Reserved
0FF9H
Reserved
0FFAH
Reserved
0FFBH
Reserved
0FFCH
Reserved
0FFDH
Reserved
0FFEH
Reserved
0FFFH
FLSCR
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program.
Note 2: − ; Cannot be accessed.
Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such
as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 48
TMP86FS49AUG
5. I/O Ports
The TMP86FS49AUG has 8 parallel input/output ports (56 pins) as follows.
Primary Function
Secondary Functions
Port P0
8-bit I/O port
External interrupt, Serial PROM mode cotrol input, serial interface input/output,
UART input/output.
Port P1
8-bit I/O port
External interrupt, timer counter input/output, divider output.
Port P2
3-bit I/O port
Low-frequency resonator connections, external interrupt input, STOP mode
release signal input.
Port P3
8-bit I/O port
Port P4
8-bit I/O port
Serial interface input/output and UART input/output.
Port P5
5-bit I/O port
Serial bus interface input/output.
Port P6
8-bit I/O port
Analog input and key-on wakeup input.
Port P7
8-bit I/O port
Analog input.
Each output port contains a latch, which holds the output data. All input ports do not have latches, so the external
input data should be externally held until the input data is read from outside or reading should be performed several
timer before processing. Figure 5-1 shows input/output timing examples.
External data is read from an I/O port in the S1 state of the read cycle during execution of the read instruction. This
timing cannot be recognized from outside, so that transient input such as chattering must be processed by the program.
Output data changes in the S2 state of the write cycle during execution of the instruction which writes to an I/O
port.
Fetch cycle
S0
Instruction execution cycle
S1
S2 S3
Example: LD
Fetch cycle
S0
S1 S2
S3
Read cycle
S0 S1
S2
S3
A, (x)
Input strobe
Data input
(a) Input timing
Fetch cycle
S0
Instruction execution cycle
S1
S2 S3
Example: LD
Fetch cycle
S0
S1 S2
S3
Write cycle
S0 S1
S2
S3
(x), A
Output strobe
Old
Data output
(b) Output timing
Note: The positions of the read and write cycles may vary, depending on the instruction.
Figure 5-1 Input/Output Timing (Example)
Page 49
New
5. I/O Ports
5.1 Port P0 (P07 to P00)
TMP86FS49AUG
5.1 Port P0 (P07 to P00)
Port P0 is an 8-bit input/output port.
Port P0 is also used as an external interrupt input, Serial PROM mode control input, a serial interface input/output
and an UART input/output.
When used as an input port, an external interrupt input, a serial interface input/output and an UART input/output,
the corresponding output latch (P0DR) should be set to "1".
During reset, the P0DR is initialized to "1", and the P0OUTCR is initialized to "0".
It can be selected whether output circuit of P0 port is a C-MOS output or a sink open drain individually, by setting
P0OUTCR. When a corresponding bit of P0OUTCR is "0". the output circuit is selected to a sink open drain and
when a corresponding bit of P0OUTCR is "1", the output circuit is selected to a C-MOS output.
When used as an input port, an external interrupt input, a serial interface input and an UART input, the corresponding output control (P0OUTCR) should be set to "0" after P0DR is set to "1".
P0 port output latch (P0DR) and P0 port terminal input (P0PRD) are located on their respective address.
When read the output latch data, the P0DR should be read. When read the terminal input data, the P0PRD register
should be read.
Table 5-1 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports (P07 to P00)
Programmed Value
Function
P0DR
P0OUTCR
Port input, external input, serial interface input or
UART input, Serial PROM mode cotrol input
“1”
“0”
Port “0” output
“0”
Port “1” output, serial interface output or UART
output
“1”
Programming
for each applications
STOP
OUTEN
P0OUTCRi
D
Q
P0OUTCRi input
Data input (P0PRD)
Output latch read (P0DR)
Data output (P0DR)
Control output
D
Q
P0i
Output latch
Control input
Note: i = 7 to 0
Figure 5-2 Port 0 and P0OUTCR
Page 50
TMP86FS49AUG
P0DR
(0000H)
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P07
INT2
P06
SCK1
P05
SO1
P04
SI1
P03
INT1
P02
TXD1
P01
RXD1
BOOT
INT0
P00
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P0OUTCR
(0008H)
P0OUTCR
P0PRD
(000BH)
Read only
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
P07
Port P0 output circuit control (Set for each bit individually)
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
Page 51
P01
0: Sink open-drain output
1: C-MOS output
P00
R/W
5. I/O Ports
5.2 Port P1 (P17 to P10)
TMP86FS49AUG
5.2 Port P1 (P17 to P10)
Port P1 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or output in one-bit unit.
Port P1 is also used as a timer/counter input/output, an external interrupt input and a divider output.
Input/output mode is specified by the P1 control register (P1CR).
During reset, the P1CR is initialized to "0" and port P1 becomes an input mode. And the P1DR is initialized to "0".
When used as an input port, a timer/counter input and an external interrupt input, the corresponding bit of P1CR
should be set to "0".
When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P1CR should be set to "1".
When used as a timer/counter output and a divider output, P1DR is set to "1" beforehand and the corresponding bit
of P1CR should be set to "1".
When P1CR is "1", the content of the corresponding output latch is read by reading P1DR.
Table 5-2 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports
Programmed Value
Function
P1DR
P1CR
*
“0”
Port “0” output
“0”
“1”
Port “1” output, a timer output or a divider output
“1”
“1”
Port input, timer/counter input or external interrupt
input
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates “1” or “0” either of which can be selected.
STOP
OUTEN
P1CRi
D
Q
D
Q
P1CRi input
Data input (P1DR)
Data output (P1DR)
P1i
Output latch
Control output
Control input
Note: i = 7 to 0
Figure 5-3 Port 1 and P1CR
Note: The port set to an input mode reads the terminal input data. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used
together, the content of the output latch which is specified as input mode might be changed by executing a bit
Manipulation instruction.
Page 52
TMP86FS49AUG
P1DR
(0001H)
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
P17
TC6
P16
TC5
P14
TC4
P13
TC3
PWM6
PWM5
P15
TC2
INT3
PWM4
PWM3
PDO6
PDO5
PDO4
PDO3
PPG6
P1CR
(0009H)
7
1
0
P12
P11
PPG
DVO
P10
TC1
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
PPG4
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P1CR
I/O control for port P1 (Specified for each bit)
Page 53
0: Input mode
1: Output mode
R/W
5. I/O Ports
5.3 Port P2 (P22 to P20)
TMP86FS49AUG
5.3 Port P2 (P22 to P20)
Port P2 is a 3-bit input/output port.
It is also used as an external interrupt, a STOP mode release signal input, and low-frequency crystal oscillator connection pins. When used as an input port or a secondary function pins, respective output latch (P2DR) should be set
to “1”.
During reset, the P2DR is initialized to “1”.
A low-frequency crystal oscillator (32.768 kHz) is connected to pins P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) in the dualclock mode. In the single-clock mode, pins P21 and P22 can be used as normal input/output ports.
It is recommended that pin P20 should be used as an external interrupt input, a STOP mode release signal input, or
an input port. If it is used as an output port, the interrupt latch is set on the falling edge of the output pulse.
P2 port output latch (P2DR) and P2 port terminal input (P2PRD) are located on their respective address.
When read the output latch data, the P2DR should be read and when read the terminal input data, the P2PRD register should be read. If a read instruction is executed for port P2, read data of bits 7 to 3 are unstable.
Data input (P20PRD)
Data input (P20)
Data output (P20)
D
P20 (INT5, STOP)
Q
Output latch
Contorl input
Data input (P21PRD)
Osc. enable
Output latch read (P21)
Data output (P21)
D
P21 (XTIN)
Q
Output latch
Data input (P22PRD)
Output latch read (P22)
Data output (P22)
D
P22 (XTOUT)
Q
Output latch
STOP
OUTEN
XTEN
fs
Figure 5-4 Port 2
P2DR
(0002H)
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P22
XTOUT
P21
XTIN
P20
INT5
(Initial value: **** *111)
STOP
P2PRD
(000CH)
Read only
P22
P21
P20
Note: Port P20 is used as STOP pin. Therefore, when stop mode is started, OUTEN does not affect to P20, and P20 becomes
high-Z mode.
Page 54
TMP86FS49AUG
5.4 Port P3 (P37 to P30) (Large Current Port)
Port P3 is an 8-bit input/output port.
When used as an input port, the corresponding output latch (P3DR) should be set to "1".
During reset, the P3DR is initialized to "1".
P3 port output latch (P3DR) and P3 port terminal input (P3PRD) are located on their respective address.
When read the output latch data, the P3DR should be read. When read the terminal input data, the P3PRD register
should be read.
STOP
OUTEN
Data input (P3PRD)
Output latch read (P3DR)
Data output (P3DR)
D
P3i
Q
Note: i = 7 to 0
Figure 5-5 Port 3
P3DR
(0003H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P37
P36
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
P37
P36
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
R/W
P3PRD
(000DH)
Read only
Page 55
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
5. I/O Ports
5.5 Port P4 (P47 to P40)
TMP86FS49AUG
5.5 Port P4 (P47 to P40)
Port P4 is an 8-bit input/output port.
Port P4 is also used as a serial interface input/output and an UART input/output.
When used as an input port, a serial interface input/output and an UART input/output, the corresponding output
latch (P4DR) should be set to "1".
During reset, the P4DR is initialized to "1", and the P4OUTCR is initialized to "0".
It can be selected whether output circuit of P4 port is a C-MOS output or a sink open drain individually, by setting
P4OUTCR. When a corresponding bit of P4OUTCR is "0". the output circuit is selected to a sink open drain and
when a corresponding bit of P4OUTCR is "1", the output circuit is selected to a C-MOS output.
When used as an input port, a serial interface input and an UART input, the corresponding output control
(P4OUTCR) should be set to "0" after P4DR is set to "1".
P4 port output latch (P4DR) and P4 port terminal input (P4PRD) are located on their respective address.
When read the output latch data, the P4DR should be read. When read the terminal input data, the P4PRD register
should be read.
Table 5-3 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports (P47 to P40)
Programmed Value
Function
P4DR
P4OUTCR
Port input UART input or serial interface input
“1”
“0”
Port “0” output
“0”
Port “1” output UART output or serial interface
output
“1”
Programming
for each applications
STOP
OUTEN
P4OUTCRi
D
Q
P4OUTCRi input
Data input (P4PRD)
Output latch read (P4DR)
Data output (P4DR)
Control output
D
Q
P4i
Output latch
Control input
Note: i = 7 to 0
Figure 5-6 Port 4
Page 56
TMP86FS49AUG
P4DR
(0004H)
R/W
7
P47
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P46
P45
SO2
P44
SI2
P43
P42
TXD2
P41
RXD2
P40
SCK2
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P4OUTCR
(000AH)
P4OUTCR
P4PRD
(000EH)
Read only
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
P47
Port P4 output circuit control (Set for each bit individually)
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
Page 57
P41
0: Sink open-drain output
1: C-MOS output
P40
R/W
5. I/O Ports
5.6 Port P5 (P54 to P50) (Large Current Port)
TMP86FS49AUG
5.6 Port P5 (P54 to P50) (Large Current Port)
Port P5 is an 5-bit input/output port.
Port P5 is also used as an I2C Bus input/output.
When used as an input port and I2C Bus input/output, the corresponding output latch (P5DR) should be set to "1".
During reset, the P5DR is initialized to "1".
P5 port output latch (P5DR) and P5 port terminal input (P5PRD) are located on their respective address.
When read the output latch data, the P5DR should be read. When read the terminal input data, the P5PRD register
should be read.
If a read instruction is executed for port P5, read data of bit 7 to 5 are unstable.
STOP
OUTEN
Data input (P5PRD)
Output latch read (P5DR)
Data output (P5DR)
D
Q
P5i
Output latch
Control output
Control input
Note: i = 4 to 0
Figure 5-7 Port 5
P5DR
(0005H)
R/W
P5PRD
(000FH)
Read only
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P54
P53
P52
P51
SDA
P50
SCL
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Page 58
(Initial value: ***1 1111)
TMP86FS49AUG
5.7 Port P6 (P67 to P60)
Port P6 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or output in one-bit unit.
Port P6 is also used as an analog input and key-on wakeup input.
Input/output mode is specified by the P6 control register (P6CR1) and P6 input control register (P6CR2).
During reset, the P6CR1 is initialized to "0" the P6CR2 is initialized to "1" and port P6 becomes an input mode.
And the P6DR is initialized to "0".
When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P6CR1 should be set to "1".
When used as an input port , the corresponding bit of P6CR1 should be set to "0" and then, the corresponding bit of
P6CR2 should be set to "1".
When used as a key-on wakeup input , the corresponding bit of P6CR1 should be set to "0" and then, the corresponding bit of STOPkEN should be set to "1".
When used as an analog input, the corresponding bit of P6CR1 should be set to "0" and then, the corresponding bit
of P6CR2 should be set to "0".
When P6CR1 is "1", the content of the corresponding output latch is read by reading P6DR.
Table 5-4 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports
Programmed Value
Function
P6DR
P6CR1
P6CR2
STOPkEN
Port input
*
“0”
“1”
*
Key-on wakeup input
*
"0"
*
"1"
Analog input
*
“0”
“0”
*
Port “0” output
“0”
“1”
*
*
Port “1” output
“1”
“1”
*
*
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates “1” or “0” either of which can be selected.
Table 5-5 Values Read from P6DR and Register Programming
Conditions
Values Read from P6DR
P6CR1
P6CR2
“0”
“0”
“0”
“0”
“1”
Terminal input data
“0”
“1”
Output latch contents
“1”
Page 59
5. I/O Ports
5.7 Port P6 (P67 to P60)
TMP86FS49AUG
P6CR2i
D
Q
D
Q
D
Q
P6CR2i input
P6CR1i
P6CR1i input
Control input
Data input (P6DRi)
Data output (P6DRi)
P6i
STOP
OUTTEN
Analog input
AINDS
SAIN
a) P63 to P60
Key-on wakeup
STOPkEN
P6CR2j
D
Q
D
Q
D
Q
P6CR2j input
P6CR1j
P6CR1j input
Data input (P6DRj)
Data output (P6DRj)
P6j
STOP
OUTTEN
Analog input
AINDS
SAIN
b) P67 to P64
Note 1: i = 3 to 0, j = 7 to 4, k = 3 to 0
Note 2: STOP is bit7 in SYSCR1.
Note 3: SAIN is AD input select signal.
Note 4: STOPkEN is input select signal in a key-on wakeup.
Figure 5-8 Port 6, P6CR1 and P6CR2
Page 60
TMP86FS49AUG
P6DR
(0006H)
R/W
P6CR1
(0F9BH)
P6CR2
(0F9CH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P67
AIN7
STOP3
P66
AIN6
STOP2
P65
AIN5
STOP1
P64
AIN4
STOP0
P63
AIN3
P62
AIN2
P61
AIN1
P60
AIN0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P6CR1
I/O control for port P6 (Specified for each bit)
7
6
5
4
3
0: Input mode
1: Output mode
2
1
R/W
0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
P6CR2
P6 port input control (Specified for each bit)
0: Analog input
1: Port input
R/W
Note 1: The port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used together,
the output latch contents for the port in input mode might be changed by executing a bit manipulation instruction.
Note 2: When used as an analog inport, be sure to clear the corresponding bit of P6CR2 to disable the port input.
Note 3: Do not set the output mode (P6CR1 = “1”) for the pin used as an analog input pin.
Note 4: Pins not used for analog input can be used as I/O ports. During AD conversion, output instructions should not be executed
to keep a precision. In addition, a variable signal should not be input to a port adjacent to the analog input during AD conversion.
Page 61
5. I/O Ports
5.8 Port P7 (P77 to P70)
TMP86FS49AUG
5.8 Port P7 (P77 to P70)
Port P7 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or output in one-bit unit.
Port P7 is also used as an analog input.
Input/output mode is specified by the P7 control register (P7CR1) and P7 input control register (P7CR2).
During reset, the P7CR1 is initialized to "0" the P7CR2 is initialized to "1" and port P7 becomes an input mode.
And the P7DR is initialized to "0".
When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P7CR1 should be set to "1".
When used as an input port, the corresponding bit of P7CR1 should be set to "0" and then, the corresponding bit of
P7CR2 should be set to "1".
When used as an analog input, the corresponding bit of P7CR1 should be set to "0" and then, the corresponding bit
of P7CR2 should be set to "0".
When P7CR1 is "1", the content of the corresponding output latch is read by reading P7DR.
Table 5-6 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports
Programmed Value
Function
P7DR
P7CR1
P7CR2
Port input external interrupt input or key-on wakeup
input
*
“0”
“1”
Analog input
*
“0”
“0”
Port “0” output
“0”
“1”
*
Port “1” output
“1”
“1”
*
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates “1” or “0” either of which can be selected.
Table 5-7 Values Read from P7DR and Register Programming
Conditions
Values Read from P7DR
P7CR1
P7CR2
“0”
“0”
“0”
“0”
“1”
Terminal input data
“0”
“1”
Output latch contents
“1”
Page 62
TMP86FS49AUG
P7CR2i
D
Q
D
Q
D
Q
P7CR2i input
P7CR1i
P7CR1i input
Control input
Data input (P7DRi)
Data output (P7DRi)
P7i
STOP
OUTTEN
Analog input
AINDS
SAIN
Note 1: i = 7 to 0
Note 2: STOP is bit7 in SYSCR1.
Note 3: SAIN is AD input select signal.
Figure 5-9 Port 7, P7CR1 and P7CR2
P7DR
(0007H)
R/W
P7CR1
(0F9DH)
P7CR2
(0F9EH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P77
AIN15
P76
AIN14
P75
AIN13
P74
AIN12
P73
AIN11
P72
AIN10
P71
AIN9
P70
AIN8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P7CR1
I/O control for port P7 (Specified for each bit)
7
6
5
4
3
0: Input mode
1: Output mode
2
1
R/W
0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
P7CR2
P7 port input control (Specified for each bit)
0: Analog input
1: Port input, external interrupt input or key-on wakeup
input
R/W
Note 1: The port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used together,
the output latch contents for the port in input mode might be changed by executing a bit manipulation instruction.
Note 2: When used as an analog inport, be sure to clear the corresponding bit of P7CR2 to disable the port input.
Note 3: Do not set the output mode (P7CR1 = “1”) for the pin used as an analog input pin.
Note 4: Pins not used for analog input can be used as I/O ports. During AD conversion, output instructions should not be executed
to keep a precision. In addition, a variable signal should not be input to a port adjacent to the analog input during AD conversion.
Page 63
5. I/O Ports
5.8 Port P7 (P77 to P70)
TMP86FS49AUG
Page 64
TMP86FS49AUG
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
The watchdog timer is a fail-safe system to detect rapidly the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops due to spurious noises or the deadlock conditions, and return the CPU to a system recovery routine.
The watchdog timer signal for detecting malfunctions can be programmed only once as “reset request” or “interrupt request”. Upon the reset release, this signal is initialized to “reset request”.
When the watchdog timer is not used to detect malfunctions, it can be used as the timer to provide a periodic interrupt.
Note: Care must be taken in system design since the watchdog timer functions are not be operated completely due to
effect of disturbing noise.
6.1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Reset release
23
15
Binary counters
Selector
fc/2 or fs/2
fc/221 or fs/213
fc/219 or fs/211
fc/217 or fs/29
Clock
Clear
R
Overflow
1
WDT output
2
S
2
Q
Interrupt request
Internal reset
Q
S R
WDTEN
WDTT
Writing
disable code
Writing
clear code
WDTOUT
Controller
0034H
WDTCR1
0035H
WDTCR2
Watchdog timer control registers
Figure 6-1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Page 65
Reset
request
INTWDT
interrupt
request
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control
TMP86FS49AUG
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control
The watchdog timer is controlled by the watchdog timer control registers (WDTCR1 and WDTCR2). The watchdog timer is automatically enabled after the reset release.
6.2.1
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer
The CPU malfunction is detected, as shown below.
1. Set the detection time, select the output, and clear the binary counter.
2. Clear the binary counter repeatedly within the specified detection time.
If the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops or the deadlock conditions occur for some reason, the watchdog timer output is activated by the binary-counter overflow unless the binary counters are cleared. When
WDTCR1<WDTOUT> is set to “1” at this time, the reset request is generated and then internal hardware is
initialized. When WDTCR1<WDTOUT> is set to “0”, a watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT) is generated.
The watchdog timer temporarily stops counting in the STOP mode including the warm-up or IDLE/SLEEP
mode, and automatically restarts (continues counting) when the STOP/IDLE/SLEEP mode is inactivated.
Note:The watchdog timer consists of an internal divider and a two-stage binary counter. When the clear code 4EH
is written, only the binary counter is cleared, but not the internal divider. The minimum binary-counter overflow
time, that depends on the timing at which the clear code (4EH) is written to the WDTCR2 register, may be 3/
4 of the time set in WDTCR1<WDTT>. Therefore, write the clear code using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the
time set to WDTCR1<WDTT>.
Example :Setting the watchdog timer detection time to 221/fc [s], and resetting the CPU malfunction detection
Within 3/4 of WDT
detection time
LD
(WDTCR2), 4EH
: Clears the binary counters.
LD
(WDTCR1), 00001101B
: WDTT ← 10, WDTOUT ← 1
LD
(WDTCR2), 4EH
: Clears the binary counters (always clears immediately before and
after changing WDTT).
(WDTCR2), 4EH
: Clears the binary counters.
(WDTCR2), 4EH
: Clears the binary counters.
:
:
LD
Within 3/4 of WDT
detection time
:
:
LD
Page 66
TMP86FS49AUG
Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
WDTCR1
(0034H)
7
WDTEN
6
5
4
3
(ATAS)
(ATOUT)
WDTEN
Watchdog timer enable/disable
2
1
0
WDTT
WDTOUT
(Initial value: **11 1001)
0: Disable (Writing the disable code to WDTCR2 is required.)
1: Enable
NORMAL1/2 mode
WDTT
WDTOUT
Watchdog timer detection time
[s]
Watchdog timer output select
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2
mode
00
225/fc
217/fs
217/fs
01
223/fc
215/fs
215fs
10
221fc
213/fs
213fs
11
219/fc
211/fs
211/fs
0: Interrupt request
1: Reset request
Write
only
Write
only
Write
only
Note 1: After clearing WDTOUT to “0”, the program cannot set it to “1”.
Note 2: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don’t care
Note 3: WDTCR1 is a write-only register and must not be used with any of read-modify-write instructions. If WDTCR1 is read, a
don’t care is read.
Note 4: To activate the STOP mode, disable the watchdog timer or clear the counter immediately before entering the STOP mode.
After clearing the counter, clear the counter again immediately after the STOP mode is inactivated.
Note 5: To clear WDTEN, set the register in accordance with the procedures shown in “6.2.3 Watchdog Timer Disable”.
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2
(0035H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
Write
Watchdog timer control code
4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (Clear code)
B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (Disable code)
D2H: Enable assigning address trap area
Others: Invalid
Write
only
Note 1: The disable code is valid only when WDTCR1<WDTEN> = 0.
Note 2: *: Don’t care
Note 3: The binary counter of the watchdog timer must not be cleared by the interrupt task.
Note 4: Write the clear code 4EH using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set in WDTCR1<WDTT>.
6.2.2
Watchdog Timer Enable
Setting WDTCR1<WDTEN> to “1” enables the watchdog timer. Since WDTCR1<WDTEN> is initialized
to “1” during reset, the watchdog timer is enabled automatically after the reset release.
Page 67
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control
6.2.3
TMP86FS49AUG
Watchdog Timer Disable
To disable the watchdog timer, set the register in accordance with the following procedures. Setting the register in other procedures causes a malfunction of the microcontroller.
1. Set the interrupt master flag (IMF) to “0”.
2. Set WDTCR2 to the clear code (4EH).
3. Set WDTCR1<WDTEN> to “0”.
4. Set WDTCR2 to the disable code (B1H).
Note:While the watchdog timer is disabled, the binary counters of the watchdog timer are cleared.
Example :Disabling the watchdog timer
: IMF ← 0
DI
LD
(WDTCR2), 04EH
: Clears the binary counter
LDW
(WDTCR1), 0B101H
: WDTEN ← 0, WDTCR2 ← Disable code
Table 6-1 Watchdog Timer Detection Time (Example: fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Watchdog Timer Detection Time[s]
WDTT
6.2.4
NORMAL1/2 mode
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW
mode
00
2.097
4
4
01
524.288 m
1
1
10
131.072 m
250 m
250 m
11
32.768 m
62.5 m
62.5 m
Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)
When WDTCR1<WDTOUT> is cleared to “0”, a watchdog timer interrupt request (INTWDT) is generated
by the binary-counter overflow.
A watchdog timer interrupt is the non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt
master flag (IMF).
When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt
is already accepted, the new watchdog timer interrupt is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is
held pending. Therefore, if watchdog timer interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the
RETN instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller.
To generate a watchdog timer interrupt, set the stack pointer before setting WDTCR1<WDTOUT>.
Example :Setting watchdog timer interrupt
LD
SP, 083FH
: Sets the stack pointer
LD
(WDTCR1), 00001000B
: WDTOUT ← 0
Page 68
TMP86FS49AUG
6.2.5
Watchdog Timer Reset
When a binary-counter overflow occurs while WDTCR1<WDTOUT> is set to “1”, a watchdog timer reset
request is generated. When a watchdog timer reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. The reset
time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 µs @ fc = 16.0 MHz).
Note:When a watchdog timer reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate
value because it has slight errors.
219/fc [s]
217/fc
Clock
Binary counter
(WDTT=11)
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
Overflow
INTWDT interrupt request
(WDTCR1<WDTOUT>= "0")
Internal reset
A reset occurs
(WDTCR1<WDTOUT>= "1")
Write 4EH to WDTCR2
Figure 6-2 Watchdog Timer Interrupt
Page 69
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.3 Address Trap
TMP86FS49AUG
6.3 Address Trap
The Watchdog Timer Control Register 1 and 2 share the addresses with the control registers to generate address
traps.
Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
7
WDTCR1
(0034H)
6
5
4
3
ATAS
ATOUT
(WDTEN)
2
1
(WDTT)
0
(WDTOUT)
(Initial value: **11 1001)
ATAS
Select address trap generation in
the internal RAM area
0: Generate no address trap
1: Generate address traps (After setting ATAS to “1”, writing the control code
D2H to WDTCR2 is required)
ATOUT
Select operation at address trap
0: Interrupt request
1: Reset request
Write
only
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2
(0035H)
7
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
6.3.1
6
Write
Watchdog timer control code
and address trap area control
code
D2H: Enable address trap area selection (ATRAP control code)
4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (WDT clear code)
B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (WDT disable code)
Others: Invalid
Write
only
Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS)
WDTCR1<ATAS> specifies whether or not to generate address traps in the internal RAM area. To execute
an instruction in the internal RAM area, clear WDTCR1<ATAS> to “0”. To enable the WDTCR1<ATAS> setting, set WDTCR1<ATAS> and then write D2H to WDTCR2.
Executing an instruction in the SFR or DBR area generates an address trap unconditionally regardless of the
setting in WDTCR1<ATAS>.
6.3.2
Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT)
When an address trap is generated, either the interrupt request or the reset request can be selected by
WDTCR1<ATOUT>.
6.3.3
Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
While WDTCR1<ATOUT> is “0”, if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an
attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1<ATAS> is “1”), DBR or the
SFR area, address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) will be generated.
An address trap interrupt is a non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (IMF).
When an address trap interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including an address trap interrupt is
already accepted, the new address trap is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending.
Therefore, if address trap interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the RETN instruction, too
many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller.
To generate address trap interrupts, set the stack pointer beforehand.
Page 70
TMP86FS49AUG
6.3.4
Address Trap Reset
While WDTCR1<ATOUT> is “1”, if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an
attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1<ATAS> is “1”), DBR or the
SFR area, address trap reset will be generated.
When an address trap reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum
24/fc [s] (1.5 µs @ fc = 16.0 MHz).
Note:When an address trap reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate
value because it has slight errors.
Page 71
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.3 Address Trap
TMP86FS49AUG
Page 72
TMP86FS49AUG
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
The time base timer generates time base for key scanning, dynamic displaying, etc. It also provides a time base
timer interrupt (INTTBT).
7.1 Time Base Timer
7.1.1
Configuration
MPX
fc/223 or fs/215
fc/221 or fs/213
fc/216 or fs/28
fc/214 or fs/26
fc/213 or fs/25
fc/212 or fs/24
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/29 or fs/2
Source clock
IDLE0, SLEEP0
release request
Falling edge
detector
INTTBT
interrupt request
3
TBTCK
TBTEN
TBTCR
Time base timer control register
Figure 7-1 Time Base Timer configuration
7.1.2
Control
Time Base Timer is controlled by Time Base Timer control register (TBTCR).
Time Base Timer Control Register
7
TBTCR
(0036H)
6
(DVOEN)
TBTEN
5
(DVOCK)
Time Base Timer
enable / disable
4
3
(DV7CK)
TBTEN
2
1
0
TBTCK
(Initial Value: 0000 0000)
0: Disable
1: Enable
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode
TBTCK
Time Base Timer interrupt
Frequency select : [Hz]
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2
SLEEP1/2
Mode
000
fc/223
fs/215
fs/215
001
fc/221
fs/213
fs/213
010
fc/216
fs/28
–
011
fc/2
14
6
–
100
fc/213
fs/25
–
101
fc/2
12
4
–
110
fc/211
fs/23
–
111
9
fs/2
–
fc/2
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care
Page 73
fs/2
fs/2
R/W
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.1 Time Base Timer
TMP86FS49AUG
Note 2: The interrupt frequency (TBTCK) must be selected with the time base timer disabled (TBTEN="0"). (The interrupt frequency must not be changed with the disable from the enable state.) Both frequency selection and enabling can be performed simultaneously.
Example :Set the time base timer frequency to fc/216 [Hz] and enable an INTTBT interrupt.
LD
(TBTCR) , 00000010B
; TBTCK ← 010
LD
(TBTCR) , 00001010B
; TBTEN ← 1
; IMF ← 0
DI
SET
(EIRL) . 7
Table 7-1 Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency [Hz]
TBTCK
7.1.3
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
000
1.91
1
1
001
7.63
4
4
010
244.14
128
–
011
976.56
512
–
100
1953.13
1024
–
101
3906.25
2048
–
110
7812.5
4096
–
111
31250
16384
–
Function
An INTTBT ( Time Base Timer Interrupt ) is generated on the first falling edge of source clock ( The divider
output of the timing generator which is selected by TBTCK. ) after time base timer has been enabled.
The divider is not cleared by the program; therefore, only the first interrupt may be generated ahead of the set
interrupt period ( Figure 7-2 ).
Source clock
TBTCR<TBTEN>
INTTBT
Interrupt period
Enable TBT
Figure 7-2 Time Base Timer Interrupt
Page 74
TMP86FS49AUG
7.2 Divider Output (DVO)
Approximately 50% duty pulse can be output using the divider output circuit, which is useful for piezoelectric
buzzer drive. Divider output is from DVO pin.
7.2.1
Configuration
Output latch
D
Data output
Q
DVO pin
MPX
A
B
C Y
D
S
2
fc/213 or fs/25
fc/212 or fs/24
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/210 or fs/22
Port output latch
TBTCR<DVOEN>
DVOEN
DVOCK
TBTCR
DVO pin output
Divider output control register
(a) configuration
(b) Timing chart
Figure 7-3 Divider Output
7.2.2
Control
The Divider Output is controlled by the Time Base Timer Control Register.
Time Base Timer Control Register
7
TBTCR
(0036H)
DVOEN
DVOEN
6
5
DVOCK
4
3
(DV7CK)
(TBTEN)
Divider output
enable / disable
2
1
0
(TBTCK)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
0: Disable
1: Enable
R/W
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2
SLEEP1/2
Mode
00
fc/213
fs/25
fs/25
01
fc/212
fs/24
fs/24
10
fc/211
fs/23
fs/23
11
fc/210
fs/22
fs/22
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode
DVOCK
Divider Output (DVO)
frequency selection: [Hz]
R/W
Note: Selection of divider output frequency (DVOCK) must be made while divider output is disabled (DVOEN="0"). Also, in other
words, when changing the state of the divider output frequency from enabled (DVOEN="1") to disable(DVOEN="0"), do not
change the setting of the divider output frequency.
Page 75
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.2 Divider Output (DVO)
TMP86FS49AUG
Example :1.95 kHz pulse output (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD
(TBTCR) , 00000000B
; DVOCK ← "00"
LD
(TBTCR) , 10000000B
; DVOEN ← "1"
Table 7-2 Divider Output Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Divider Output Frequency [Hz]
DVOCK
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2
Mode
00
1.953 k
1.024 k
1.024 k
01
3.906 k
2.048 k
2.048 k
10
7.813 k
4.096 k
4.096 k
11
15.625 k
8.192 k
8.192 k
Page 76
B
A
TC1㩷㫇㫀㫅
Falling
Decoder
Page 77
B
C
fc/27
fc/23
Figure 8-1 TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
S
ACAP1
TC1CR
Y
Y
S
A
B
Source
clock
Start
Clear
Selector
TC1DRA
CMP
PPG output
mode
16-bit timer register A, B
TC1DRB
16-bit up-counter
MPPG1
INTTC1 interript
S
Match
Q
Enable
Toggle
Set
Clear
Pulse width
measurement
mode
TC1S clear
TFF1
PPG output
mode
Internal
reset
Write to TC1CR
Note: Function I/O may not operate depending on I/O port setting. For more details, see the chapter "I/O Port".
Capture
Window mode
TC1 control register
TC1CK
2
A
fc/211, fs/23
Clear
Set Q
Command start
METT1
External
trigger start
D
Edge detector
Rising
External
trigger
TC1S
2
Port
(Note)
Pulse width
measurement
mode
Y
S
MCAP1
Clear
Set
Toggle
Q
Port
(Note)
㪧㪧㪞
pin
TMP86FS49AUG
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.1 Configuration
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.2 TimerCounter Control
TMP86FS49AUG
8.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 1 is controlled by the TimerCounter 1 control register (TC1CR) and two 16-bit timer registers
(TC1DRA and TC1DRB).
Timer Register
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TC1DRA
(0011H, 0010H)
TC1DRAH (0011H)
TC1DRAL (0010H)
(Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111)
Read/Write
TC1DRB
(0013H, 0012H)
TC1DRBH (0013H)
TC1DRBL (0012H)
(Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111)
Read/Write (Write enabled only in the PPG output mode)
TimerCounter 1 Control Register
TC1CR
(0026H)
TFF1
7
6
TFF1
ACAP1
MCAP1
METT1
MPPG1
5
4
3
TC1S
2
1
TC1CK
0
Read/Write
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
TC1M
Timer F/F1 control
0: Clear
1: Set
ACAP1
Auto capture control
0:Auto-capture disable
1:Auto-capture enable
MCAP1
Pulse width measurement mode control
0:Double edge capture
1:Single edge capture
METT1
External trigger timer
mode control
0:Trigger start
1:Trigger start and stop
MPPG1
PPG output control
0:Continuous pulse generation
1:One-shot
TC1S
TC1 start control
R/W
R/W
Timer
Extrigger
Event
Window
Pulse
00: Stop and counter clear
O
O
O
O
O
O
01: Command start
O
–
–
–
–
O
10: Rising edge start
(Ex-trigger/Pulse/PPG)
Rising edge count (Event)
Positive logic count (Window)
–
O
O
O
O
O
11: Falling edge start
(Ex-trigger/Pulse/PPG)
Falling edge count (Event)
Negative logic count (Window)
–
O
O
O
O
O
Divider
SLOW,
SLEEP
mode
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
TC1CK
TC1 source clock select
[Hz]
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
00
fc/211
fs/23
DV9
fs/23
01
fc/27
fc/27
DV5
–
10
fc/23
fc/23
DV1
–
11
TC1M
TC1 operating mode
select
PPG
R/W
R/W
External clock (TC1 pin input)
00: Timer/external trigger timer/event counter mode
01: Window mode
10: Pulse width measurement mode
11: PPG (Programmable pulse generate) output mode
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz]
Note 2: The timer register consists of two shift registers. A value set in the timer register becomes valid at the rising edge of the
first source clock pulse that occurs after the upper byte (TC1DRAH and TC1DRBH) is written. Therefore, write the lower
byte and the upper byte in this order (it is recommended to write the register with a 16-bit access instruction). Writing only
the lower byte (TC1DRAL and TC1DRBL) does not enable the setting of the timer register.
Note 3: To set the mode, source clock, PPG output control and timer F/F control, write to TC1CR during TC1S=00. Set the timer F/
F1 control until the first timer start after setting the PPG mode.
Page 78
TMP86FS49AUG
Note 4: Auto-capture can be used only in the timer, event counter, and window modes.
Note 5: To set the timer registers, the following relationship must be satisfied.
TC1DRA > TC1DRB > 1 (PPG output mode), TC1DRA > 1 (other modes)
Note 6: Set TFF1 to “0” in the mode except PPG output mode.
Note 7: Set TC1DRB after setting TC1M to the PPG output mode.
Note 8: When the STOP mode is entered, the start control (TC1S) is cleared to “00” automatically, and the timer stops. After the
STOP mode is exited, set the TC1S to use the timer counter again.
Note 9: Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC1. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the
execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition.
Note 10:Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC1CR<ACAP1> to
"1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC1DRB for
the first time.
Page 79
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
8.3 Function
TimerCounter 1 has six types of operating modes: timer, external trigger timer, event counter, window, pulse width
measurement, programmable pulse generator output modes.
8.3.1
Timer mode
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer
register 1A (TC1DRA) value is detected, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being
cleared, the up-counter restarts counting. Setting TC1CR<ACAP1> to “1” captures the up-counter value into the timer register 1B (TC1DRB) with the auto-capture function. Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC1. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value
in a capture enabled condition. Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after
setting TC1CR<ACAP1> to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock
before reading TC1DRB for the first time.
Table 8-1 Internal Source Clock for TimerCounter 1 (Example: fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
TC1CK
SLOW, SLEEP mode
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
Resolution
[µs]
Maximum Time Setting
[s]
Resolution
[µs]
Maximum Time Setting
[s]
Resolution
[µs]
Maximum
Time Setting [s]
00
128
8.39
244.14
16.0
244.14
16.0
01
8.0
0.524
8.0
0.524
–
–
10
0.5
32.77 m
0.5
32.77 m
–
–
Example 1 :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/211 [Hz] and generating an interrupt 1 second later
(fc = 16 MHz, TBTCR<DV7CK> = “0”)
LDW
; Sets the timer register (1 s ÷ 211/fc = 1E84H)
(TC1DRA), 1E84H
DI
SET
; IMF= “0”
(EIRL). 5
; Enables INTTC1
EI
; IMF= “1”
LD
(TC1CR), 00000000B
; Selects the source clock and mode
LD
(TC1CR), 00010000B
; Starts TC1
LD
(TC1CR), 01010000B
; ACAP1 ← 1
:
:
LD
WA, (TC1DRB)
Example 2 :Auto-capture
; Reads the capture value
Note: Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC1CR<ACAP1> to "1".
Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC1DRB for the first
time.
Page 80
TMP86FS49AUG
Timer start
Source clock
Counter
0
TC1DRA
?
1
2
3
n−1
4
n
0
1
3
2
4
5
6
n
Match detect
INTTC1 interruput request
Counter clear
(a) Timer mode
Source clock
m−2
Counter
m−1
m
m+1
m+2
n−1
Capture
TC1DRB
?
m−1
m
n
n+1
Capture
m+1
m+2
ACAP1
(b) Auto-capture
Figure 8-2 Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 81
n−1
n
n+1
7
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
8.3.2
External Trigger Timer Mode
In the external trigger timer mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the TC1
pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. For the trigger edge used to start counting, either the rising
or falling edge is defined in TC1CR<TC1S>.
• When TC1CR<METT1> is set to “1” (trigger start and stop)
When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected after the timer starts, the
up-counter is cleared and halted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated.
If the edge opposite to trigger edge is detected before detecting a match between the up-counter
and the TC1DRA, the up-counter is cleared and halted without generating an interrupt request.
Therefore, this mode can be used to detect exceeding the specified pulse by interrupt.
After being halted, the up-counter restarts counting when the trigger edge is detected.
• When TC1CR<METT1> is set to “0” (trigger start)
When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected after the timer starts, the
up-counter is cleared and halted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated.
The edge opposite to the trigger edge has no effect in count up. The trigger edge for the next counting is ignored if detecting it before detecting a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA.
Since the TC1 pin input has the noise rejection, pulses of 4/fc [s] or less are rejected as noise. A pulse width
of 12/fc [s] or more is required to ensure edge detection. The rejection circuit is turned off in the SLOW1/2 or
SLEEP1/2 mode, but a pulse width of one machine cycle or more is required.
Example 1 :Generating an interrupt 1 ms after the rising edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin
(fc =16 MHz)
LDW
; 1ms ÷ 27/fc = 7DH
(TC1DRA), 007DH
DI
SET
; IMF= “0”
(EIRL). 5
; Enables INTTC1 interrupt
EI
; IMF= “1”
LD
(TC1CR), 00000100B
; Selects the source clock and mode
LD
(TC1CR), 00100100B
; Starts TC1 external trigger, METT1 = 0
Example 2 :Generating an interrupt when the low-level pulse with 4 ms or more width is input to the TC1 pin
(fc =16 MHz)
LDW
; 4 ms ÷ 27/fc = 1F4H
(TC1DRA), 01F4H
DI
SET
; IMF= “0”
(EIRL). 5
; Enables INTTC1 interrupt
EI
; IMF= “1”
LD
(TC1CR), 00000100B
; Selects the source clock and mode
LD
(TC1CR), 01110100B
; Starts TC1 external trigger, METT1 = 1
Page 82
TMP86FS49AUG
At the rising
edge (TC1S = 10)
Count start
Count start
TC1 pin input
Source clock
Up-counter
0
1
2
TC1DRA
3
n−1 n
4
n
Match detect
0
2
1
3
Count clear
INTTC1
interrupt request
(a) Trigger start (METT1 = 0)
Count clear
Count start
At the rising
edge (TC1S = 10)
Count start
TC1 pin input
Source clock
Up-counter
TC1DRA
0
1
2
m−1 m
3
0
1
2
n
n
3
Match detect
0
Count clear
INTTC1
interrupt request
Note: m < n
(b) Trigger start and stop (METT1 = 1)
Figure 8-3 External Trigger Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 83
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
8.3.3
Event Counter Mode
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin. Either the
rising or falling edge of the input pulse is selected as the count up edge in TC1CR<TC1S>.
When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated
and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at each edge of the input
pulse to the TC1 pin. Since a match between the up-counter and the value set to TC1DRA is detected at the
edge opposite to the selected edge, an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated after a match of the value at the
edge opposite to the selected edge.
Two or more machine cycles are required for the low-or high-level pulse input to the TC1 pin.
Setting TC1CR<ACAP1> to “1” captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB with the auto capture function.
Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC1. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read
after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting
TC1CR<ACAP1> to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source
clock before reading TC1DRB for the first time.
Timer start
TC1 pin Input
Up-counter
TC1DRA
0
?
1
n−1
2
n
0
1
n
Match detect
INTTC1
interrput request
Counter clear
Figure 8-4 Event Counter Mode Timing Chart
Table 8-2 Input Pulse Width to TC1 Pin
Minimum Pulse Width [s]
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode
High-going
23/fc
23/fs
Low-going
23/fc
23/fs
Page 84
2
At the
rising edge
(TC1S = 10)
TMP86FS49AUG
8.3.4
Window Mode
In the window mode, the up-counter counts up at the rising edge of the pulse that is logical ANDed product
of the input pulse to the TC1 pin (window pulse) and the internal source clock. Either the positive logic (count
up during high-going pulse) or negative logic (count up during low-going pulse) can be selected.
When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated
and the up-counter is cleared.
Define the window pulse to the frequency which is sufficiently lower than the internal source clock programmed with TC1CR<TC1CK>.
Count start
Count stop
Count start
Timer start
TC1 pin input
Internal clock
Counter
TC1DRA
0
?
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
7
Match detect
INTTC1
interrput request
Counter clear
(a) Positive logic (TC1S = 10)
Timer start
Count start
Count stop
Count start
TC1 pin input
Internal clock
0
Counter
TC1DRA
?
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 0
1
9
Match detect
INTTC1
interrput request
(b) Negative logic (TC1S = 11)
Figure 8-5 Window Mode Timing Chart
Page 85
Counter
clear
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
8.3.5
Pulse Width Measurement Mode
In the pulse width measurement mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the
TC1 pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. Either the rising or falling edge of the internal clock is
selected as the trigger edge in TC1CR<TC1S>. Either the single- or double-edge capture is selected as the trigger edge in TC1CR<MCAP1>.
• When TC1CR<MCAP1> is set to “1” (single-edge capture)
Either high- or low-level input pulse width can be measured. To measure the high-level input pulse
width, set the rising edge to TC1CR<TC1S>. To measure the low-level input pulse width, set the
falling edge to TC1CR<TC1S>.
When detecting the edge opposite to the trigger edge used to start counting after the timer starts,
the up-counter captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB and generates an INTTC1 interrupt
request. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then restarts counting when detecting the trigger
edge used to start counting.
• When TC1CR<MCAP1> is set to “0” (double-edge capture)
The cycle starting with either the high- or low-going input pulse can be measured. To measure the
cycle starting with the high-going pulse, set the rising edge to TC1CR<TC1S>. To measure the cycle
starting with the low-going pulse, set the falling edge to TC1CR<TC1S>.
When detecting the edge opposite to the trigger edge used to start counting after the timer starts,
the up-counter captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB and generates an INTTC1 interrupt
request. The up-counter continues counting up, and captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB and
generates an INTTC1 interrupt request when detecting the trigger edge used to start counting. The
up-counter is cleared at this time, and then continues counting.
Note 1: The captured value must be read from TC1DRB until the next trigger edge is detected. If not read, the captured value becomes a don’t care. It is recommended to use a 16-bit access instruction to read the captured
value from TC1DRB.
Note 2: For the single-edge capture, the counter after capturing the value stops at “1” until detecting the next edge.
Therefore, the second captured value is “1” larger than the captured value immediately after counting
starts.
Note 3: The first captured value after the timer starts may be read incorrectively, therefore, ignore the first captured
value.
Page 86
TMP86FS49AUG
Example :Duty measurement (resolution fc/27 [Hz])
CLR
(INTTC1SW). 0
; INTTC1 service switch initial setting
Address set to convert INTTC1SW at each INTTC1
LD
(TC1CR), 00000110B
; Sets the TC1 mode and source clock
DI
SET
; IMF= “0”
(EIRL). 5
; Enables INTTC1
EI
LD
; IMF= “1”
(TC1CR), 00100110B
; Starts TC1 with an external trigger at MCAP1 = 0
CPL
(INTTC1SW). 0
; INTTC1 interrupt, inverts and tests INTTC1 service switch
JRS
F, SINTTC1
LD
A, (TC1DRBL)
LD
W,(TC1DRBH)
LD
(HPULSE), WA
; Stores high-level pulse width in RAM
A, (TC1DRBL)
; Reads TC1DRB (Cycle)
:
PINTTC1:
; Reads TC1DRB (High-level pulse width)
RETI
SINTTC1:
LD
LD
W,(TC1DRBH)
LD
(WIDTH), WA
; Stores cycle in RAM
:
RETI
; Duty calculation
:
VINTTC1:
DW
PINTTC1
; INTTC1 Interrupt vector
WIDTH
HPULSE
TC1 pin
INTTC1 interrupt request
INTTC1SW
Page 87
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
Count start
TC1 pin input
Count start
Trigger
(TC1S = "10")
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
2
3
4
1
Capture
n
n-1 n 0
TC1DRB
INTTC1
interrupt request
2
3
[Application] High-or low-level pulse width measurement
(a) Single-edge capture (MCAP1 = "1")
Count start
Count start
TC1 pin input
(TC1S = "10")
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
2
3
4
n+1
TC1DRB
n
n+1 n+2 n+3
Capture
n
m-2 m-1 m 0 1
Capture
m
INTTC1
interrupt request
[Application] (1) Cycle/frequency measurement
(2) Duty measurement
(b) Double-edge capture (MCAP1 = "0")
Figure 8-6 Pulse Width Measurement Mode
Page 88
2
TMP86FS49AUG
8.3.6
Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode
In the programmable pulse generation (PPG) mode, an arbitrary duty pulse is generated by counting performed in the internal clock. To start the timer, TC1CR<TC1S> specifies either the edge of the input pulse to
the TC1 pin or the command start. TC1CR<MPPG1> specifies whether a duty pulse is produced continuously
or not (one-shot pulse).
• When TC1CR<MPPG1> is set to “0” (Continuous pulse generation)
When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRB value is detected after the timer starts, the
level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter continues counting. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, the level of
the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter is cleared at
this time, and then continues counting and pulse generation.
When TC1S is cleared to “00” during PPG output, the PPG pin retains the level immediately before
the counter stops.
• When TC1CR<MPPG1> is set to “1” (One-shot pulse generation)
When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRB value is detected after the timer starts, the
level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter continues counting. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, the level of
the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. TC1CR<TC1S> is cleared to
“00” automatically at this time, and the timer stops. The pulse generated by PPG retains the same
level as that when the timer stops.
Since the output level of the PPG pin can be set with TC1CR<TFF1> when the timer starts, a positive or negative pulse can be generated. Since the inverted level of the timer F/F1 output level is output to the PPG pin,
specify TC1CR<TFF1> to “0” to set the high level to the PPG pin, and “1” to set the low level to the PPG pin.
Upon reset, the timer F/F1 is initialized to “0”.
Note 1: To change TC1DRA or TC1DRB during a run of the timer, set a value sufficiently larger than the count value
of the counter. Setting a value smaller than the count value of the counter during a run of the timer may
generate a pulse different from that specified.
Note 2: Do not change TC1CR<TFF1> during a run of the timer. TC1CR<TFF1> can be set correctly only at initialization (after reset). When the timer stops during PPG, TC1CR<TFF1> can not be set correctly from this
point onward if the PPG output has the level which is inverted of the level when the timer starts. (Setting
TC1CR<TFF1> specifies the timer F/F1 to the level inverted of the programmed value.) Therefore, the
timer F/F1 needs to be initialized to ensure an arbitrary level of the PPG output. To initialize the timer F/F1,
change TC1CR<TC1M> to the timer mode (it is not required to start the timer mode), and then set the PPG
mode. Set TC1CR<TFF1> at this time.
Note 3: In the PPG mode, the following relationship must be satisfied.
TC1DRA > TC1DRB
Note 4: Set TC1DRB after changing the mode of TC1M to the PPG mode.
Page 89
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
Example :Generating a pulse which is high-going for 800 µs and low-going for 200 µs
(fc = 16 MHz)
Setting port
LD
(TC1CR), 10000111B
; Sets the PPG mode, selects the source clock
LDW
(TC1DRA), 007DH
; Sets the cycle (1 ms ÷ 27/fc ms = 007DH)
LDW
(TC1DRB), 0019H
; Sets the low-level pulse width (200 µs ÷ 27/fc = 0019H)
LD
(TC1CR), 10010111B
; Starts the timer
Example :After stopping PPG, setting the PPG pin to a high-level to restart PPG
(fc = 16 MHz)
Setting port
LD
(TC1CR), 10000111B
; Sets the PPG mode, selects the source clock
LDW
(TC1DRA), 007DH
; Sets the cycle (1 ms ÷ 27/fc µs = 007DH)
LDW
(TC1DRB), 0019H
; Sets the low-level pulse width (200 µs ÷ 27/fc = 0019H)
LD
(TC1CR), 10010111B
; Starts the timer
:
:
LD
(TC1CR), 10000111B
; Stops the timer
LD
(TC1CR), 10000100B
; Sets the timer mode
LD
(TC1CR), 00000111B
; Sets the PPG mode, TFF1 = 0
LD
(TC1CR), 00010111B
; Starts the timer
I/O port output latch
shared with PPG output
Data output
Port output
enable
Q
D
PPG pin
R
Function output
TC1CR<TFF1>
Set
Write to TC1CR
Internal reset
Clear
Match to TC1DRB
Match to TC1DRA
Q
Toggle
Timer F/F1
INTTC1 interrupt request
TC1CR<TC1S> clear
Figure 8-7 PPG Output
Page 90
TMP86FS49AUG
Timer start
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
TC1DRB
n
TC1DRA
m
2
n
n+1
m 0
1
2
n
n+1
m 0
1
2
Match detect
PPG pin output
INTTC1
interrupt request
Note: m > n
(a) Continuous pulse generation (TC1S = 01)
Count start
TC1 pin input
Trigger
Internal clock
Counter
0
TC1DRB
n
TC1DRA
m
1
n
n+1
m
0
PPG pin output
INTTC1
interrupt request
[Application] One-shot pulse output
(b) One-shot pulse generation (TC1S = 10)
Figure 8-8 PPG Mode Timing Chart
Page 91
Note: m > n
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
Page 92
TMP86FS49AUG
9. 16-Bit Timer/Counter2 (TC2)
9.1 Configuration
TC2 pin
Port
(Note)
TC2S
H
Window
23,
15
fc/2 fs/2
fc/213, fs/25
fc/28
fc/23
fc
fs
A
B
C
D
E
F
S
3
Clear
B
Timer/
event counter
16-bit up counter
Y
A
S
Source
clock
CMP
TC2M
Match
INTTC2
interrupt
TC2S
TC2CK
TC2CR
TC2DR
TC2 control register
16-bit timer register 2
Note: When control input/output is used, I/O port setting should be set correctly. For details, refer to the section "I/O ports".
Figure 9-1 Timer/Counter2 (TC2)
Page 93
9. 16-Bit Timer/Counter2 (TC2)
9.2 Control
TMP86FS49AUG
9.2 Control
The timer/counter 2 is controlled by a timer/counter 2 control register (TC2CR) and a 16-bit timer register 2
(TC2DR).
TC2DR
(0025H,
0024H)
TC2CR
(0023H)
TC2S
15
7
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
2
TC2DRH (0025H)
TC2DRL (0024H)
R/W
6
5
4
TC2S
TC2 start control
3
2
1
TC2 source clock select
Unit : [Hz]
TC2M
0
(Initial value: **00 00*0)
0:Stop and counter clear
1:Start
R/W
Divider
SLOW1/2
mode
SLEEP1/2
mode
fs/215
DV21
fs/215
fs/215
fc/213
fs/25
DV11
fs/25
fs/25
010
fc/28
fc/28
DV6
–
–
011
3
3
fc/2
DV1
–
–
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
000
fc/223
001
fc/2
100
–
–
–
fc (Note7)
–
101
fs
fs
–
–
–
R/W
Reserved
External clock (TC2 pin input)
111
TC2 operating mode
select
1
0
TC2CK
110
TC2M
3
(Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111)
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
TC2CK
4
0:Timer/event counter mode
1:Window mode
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care
Note 2: When writing to the Timer Register 2 (TC2DR), always write to the lower side (TC2DRL) and then the upper side
(TC2DRH) in that order. Writing to only the lower side (TC2DRL) or the upper side (TC2DRH) has no effect.
Note 3: The timer register 2 (TC2DR) uses the value previously set in it for coincidence detection until data is written to the upper
side (TC2DRH) after writing data to the lower side (TC2DRL).
Note 4: Set the mode and source clock when the TC2 stops (TC2S = 0).
Note 5: Values to be loaded to the timer register must satisfy the following condition.
TC2DR > 1 (TC2DR15 to TC2DR11 > 1 at warm up)
Note 6: If a read instruction is executed for TC2CR, read data of bit 7, 6 and 1 are unstable.
Note 7: The high-frequency clock (fc) canbe selected only when the time mode at SLOW2 mode is selected.
Note 8: On entering STOP mode, the TC2 start control (TC2S) is cleared to "0" automatically. So, the timer stops. Once the STOP
mode has been released, to start using the timer counter, set TC2S again.
Page 94
TMP86FS49AUG
9.3 Function
The timer/counter 2 has three operating modes: timer, event counter and window modes.
And if fc or fs is selected as the source clock in timer mode, when switching the timer mode from SLOW1 to
NORMAL2, the timer/counter2 can generate warm-up time until the oscillator is stable.
9.3.1
Timer mode
In this mode, the internal clock is used for counting up. The contents of TC2DR are compared with the contents of up counter. If a match is found, a timer/counter 2 interrupt (INTTC2) is generated, and the counter is
cleared. Counting up is resumed after the counter is cleared.
When fc is selected for source clock at SLOW2 mode, lower 11-bits of TC2DR are ignored and generated a
interrupt by matching upper 5-bits only. Though, in this situation, it is necessary to set TC2DRH only.
Table 9-1 Source Clock (Internal clock) for Timer/Counter2 (at fc = 16 MHz, DV7CK=0)
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
TC2C
K
SLOW1/2 mode
DV7CK = 0
SLEEP1/2 mode
DV7CK = 1
Resolution
Maximum Time Setting
Resolution
Maximum Time Setting
Resolution
Maximum
Time
Setting
Resolution
Maximum
Time
Setting
000
524.29 [ms]
9.54 [h]
1 [s]
18.2 [h]
1 [s]
18.2 [h]
1 [s]
18.2 [h]
001
512.0 [ms]
33.55 [s]
0.98 [ms]
1.07 [min]
0.98 [ms]
1.07
[min]
0.98 [ms]
1.07
[min]
010
16.0 [ms]
1.05 [s]
16.0 [ms]
1.05 [s]
–
–
–
–
011
0.5 [ms]
32.77 [ms]
0.5 [ms]
32.77 [ms]
–
–
–
–
100
–
–
–
–
62.5 [ns]
–
–
–
101
30.52 [ms]
2 [s]
30.52 [ms]
2 [s]
–
–
–
–
Note:When fc is selected as the source clock in timer mode, it is used at warm-up for switching from SLOW1 mode
to NORMAL2 mode.
Example :Sets the timer mode with source clock fc/23 [Hz] and generates an interrupt every 25 ms (at fc = 16 MHz )
LDW
; Sets TC2DR (25 ms ³ 28/fc = 061AH)
(TC2DR), 061AH
DI
SET
; IMF= “0”
(EIRE). 6
; Enables INTTC2 interrupt
EI
; IMF= “1”
LD
(TC2CR), 00001000B
; Source clock / mode select
LD
(TC2CR), 00101000B
; Starts Timer
Page 95
9. 16-Bit Timer/Counter2 (TC2)
9.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
Timer start
Source clock
Up-counter
0
1
2
3
4
n 0
Match detect
TC2DR
㫅
INTTC2 interrupt
Figure 9-2 Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 96
1
2
3
Counter clear
TMP86FS49AUG
9.3.2
Event counter mode
In this mode, events are counted on the rising edge of the TC2 pin input. The contents of TC2DR are compared with the contents of the up counter. If a match is found, an INTTC2 interrupt is generated, and the
counter is cleared. Counting up is resumed every the rising edge of the TC2 pin input after the up counter is
cleared.
Match detect is executed on the falling edge of the TC2 pin. Therefore, an INTTC2 interrupt is generated at
the falling edge after the match of TC2DR and up counter.
The minimum input pulse width of TC2 pin is shown in Table 9-2. Two or more machine cycles are required
for both the “H” and “L” levels of the pulse width.
Example :Sets the event counter mode and generates an INTTC2 interrupt 640 counts later.
LDW
(TC2DR), 640
; Sets TC2DR
DI
; IMF= “0”
SET
(EIRE). 6
;Enables INTTC2 interrupt
EI
; IMF= “1”
LD
(TC2CR), 00011100B
; TC2 source vclock / mode select
LD
(TC2CR), 00111100B
; Starts TC2
Table 9-2 Timer/Counter 2 External Input Clock Pulse Width
Minimum Input Pulse Width [s]
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode
“H” width
23/fc
23/fs
“L” width
23/fc
23/fs
Timer start
TC2 pin input
0
Counter
1
2
3
n
Match detect
TC2DR
0
1
2
3
Counter clear
n
INTTC2 interrupt
Figure 9-3 Event Counter Mode Timing Chart
9.3.3
Window mode
In this mode, counting up performed on the rising edge of an internal clock during TC2 external pin input
(Window pulse) is “H” level. The contents of TC2DR are compared with the contents of up counter. If a match
found, an INTTC2 interrupt is generated, and the up-counter is cleared.
The maximum applied frequency (TC2 input) must be considerably slower than the selected internal clock
by the TC2CR<TC2CK>.
Note:It is not available window mode in the SLOW/SLEEP mode. Therefore, at the window mode in NORMAL
mode, the timer should be halted by setting TC2CR<TC2S> to "0" before the SLOW/SLEEP mode is entered.
Page 97
9. 16-Bit Timer/Counter2 (TC2)
9.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
Example :Generates an interrupt, inputting “H” level pulse width of 120 ms or more. (at fc = 16 MHz, TBTCR<DV7CK> =
“0” )
LDW
; Sets TC2DR (120 ms ³ 213/fc = 00EAH)
(TC2DR), 00EAH
DI
; IMF= “0”
SET
(EIRE). 6
; Enables INTTC2 interrupt
LD
(TC2CR), 00000101B
; TC2sorce clock / mode select
LD
(TC2CR), 00100101B
; Starts TC2
EI
; IMF= “1”
Timer start
TC2 pin input
Internal clock
Counter
TC2DR
㪇
1
n
2
0
1
2
㫅
Match detect
INTTC2 interrupt
Figure 9-4 Window Mode Timing Chart
Page 98
Counter clear
3
TMP86FS49AUG
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1 Configuration
PWM mode
Overflow
fc/211 or fs/23
7
fc/2
5
fc/2
fc/23
fs
fc/2
fc
TC4 pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Y
A
B
INTTC4
interrupt request
Clear
Y
8-bit up-counter
TC4S
S
PDO, PPG mode
A
B
S
16-bit
mode
S
TC4M
TC4S
TFF4
Toggle
Q
Y
16-bit mode
S
TC4CK
PDO4/PWM4/
PPG4 pin
Set
Clear
Timer, Event
Counter mode
Timer F/F4
A
Y
TC4CR
B
TTREG4
PWREG4
PWM, PPG mode
DecodeEN
PDO, PWM,
PPG mode
TFF4
16-bit
mode
TC3S
PWM mode
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/27
5
fc/2
3
fc/2
fs
fc/2
fc
TC3 pin
Y
8-bit up-counter
Overflow
16-bit mode
PDO mode
16-bit mode
Timer,
Event Couter mode
S
TC3M
TC3S
TFF3
INTTC3
interrupt request
Clear
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Toggle
Q
Set
Clear
PDO3/PWM3/
pin
Timer F/F3
TC3CK
TC3CR
PWM mode
TTREG3
PWREG3
DecodeEN
TFF3
Figure 10-1 8-Bit TimerCounter 3, 4
Page 99
PDO, PWM mode
16-bit mode
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1 Configuration
TMP86FS49AUG
10.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 3 is controlled by the TimerCounter 3 control register (TC3CR) and two 8-bit timer registers
(TTREG3, PWREG3).
TimerCounter 3 Timer Register
TTREG3
(0014H)
R/W
7
PWREG3
(0018H)
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG3) setting while the timer is running.
Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG3) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while
the timer is running.
TimerCounter 3 Control Register
TC3CR
(0027H)
TFF3
7
TFF3
6
5
4
TC3CK
Time F/F3 control
3
2
TC3S
0:
1:
1
0
TC3M
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Clear
Set
R/W
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
TC3CK
Operating clock selection [Hz]
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2
SLEEP1/2
mode
000
fc/211
fs/23
fs/23
001
fc/27
fc/27
–
010
fc/25
fc/25
–
011
fc/23
fc/23
–
100
fs
fs
fs
101
fc/2
fc/2
–
110
fc
fc
fc (Note 8)
111
TC3S
TC3 start control
0:
1:
000:
001:
TC3M
TC3M operating mode select
010:
011:
1**:
R/W
TC3 pin input
Operation stop and counter clear
Operation start
R/W
8-bit timer/event counter mode
8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode
8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode
16-bit mode
(Each mode is selectable with TC4M.)
Reserved
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock[Hz]
Note 2: Do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings while the timer is running.
Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC3S= 1 → 0), do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings. To start the timer operation (TC3S= 0 → 1), TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 can be programmed.
Note 4: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, set the operating mode by programming TC4CR<TC4M>, where TC3M must
be fixed to 011.
Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CK. Set the timer start control
and timer F/F control by programming TC4CR<TC4S> and TC4CR<TFF4>, respectively.
Note 6: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table
10-1 and Table 10-2.
Page 100
TMP86FS49AUG
Note 7: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 103.
Note 8: The operating clock fc in the SLOW or SLEEP mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
Page 101
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1 Configuration
TMP86FS49AUG
The TimerCounter 4 is controlled by the TimerCounter 4 control register (TC4CR) and two 8-bit timer registers
(TTREG4 and PWREG4).
TimerCounter 4 Timer Register
TTREG4
(0015H)
R/W
7
PWREG4
(0019H)
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG4) setting while the timer is running.
Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG4) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while
the timer is running.
TimerCounter 4 Control Register
TC4CR
(0028H)
TFF4
7
TFF4
6
5
4
TC4CK
Timer F/F4 control
3
2
TC4S
0:
1:
1
0
TC4M
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Clear
Set
R/W
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
TC4CK
Operating clock selection [Hz]
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2
SLEEP1/2
mode
000
fc/211
fs/23
fs/23
001
fc/27
fc/27
–
010
fc/25
fc/25
–
011
fc/2
3
3
–
100
fs
fs
fs
101
fc/2
fc/2
–
110
fc
fc
–
111
TC4S
TC4 start control
0:
1:
000:
001:
010:
TC4M
TC4M operating mode select
011:
100:
101:
110:
111:
fc/2
R/W
TC4 pin input
Operation stop and counter clear
Operation start
R/W
8-bit timer/event counter mode
8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode
8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode
Reserved
16-bit timer/event counter mode
Warm-up counter mode
16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode
16-bit PPG mode
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz]
Note 2: Do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings while the timer is running.
Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC4S= 1 → 0), do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings.
To start the timer operation (TC4S= 0 → 1), TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 can be programmed.
Note 4: When TC4M= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the source clock becomes the TC3 overflow signal regardless of the
TC4CK setting.
Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming TC4M, where TC3CR<TC3M>
must be set to 011.
Page 102
TMP86FS49AUG
Note 6: To the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CR<TC3CK>. Set the timer start
control and timer F/F control by programming TC4S and TFF4, respectively.
Note 7: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table
10-1 and Table 10-2.
Note 8: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 103.
Table 10-1 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 Modes)
Operating mode
fc/211
or
fc/27
fc/25
fc/23
fs
fc/2
fc
TC3
pin input
TC4
pin input
fs/23
8-bit timer
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
8-bit event counter
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
Ο
8-bit PDO
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
8-bit PWM
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
–
16-bit timer
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
16-bit event counter
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
–
Warm-up counter
–
–
–
–
Ο
–
–
–
–
16-bit PWM
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
16-bit PPG
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
–
–
Ο
–
Note 1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on
lower bit (TC3CK).
Note 2: Ο : Available source clock
Table 10-2 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes)
Operating mode
fc/211
or
fc/27
fc/25
fc/23
fs
fc/2
fc
TC3
pin input
TC4
pin input
fs/23
8-bit timer
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
8-bit event counter
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
Ο
8-bit PDO
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
8-bit PWM
Ο
–
–
–
Ο
–
–
–
–
16-bit timer
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
16-bit event counter
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
–
Warm-up counter
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
–
–
16-bit PWM
Ο
–
–
–
Ο
–
–
Ο
–
16-bit PPG
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
–
Note1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on
lower bit (TC3CK).
Note2: Ο : Available source clock
Page 103
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1 Configuration
TMP86FS49AUG
Table 10-3 Constraints on Register Values Being Compared
Operating mode
Register Value
8-bit timer/event counter
1≤ (TTREGn) ≤255
8-bit PDO
1≤ (TTREGn) ≤255
8-bit PWM
2≤ (PWREGn) ≤254
16-bit timer/event counter
1≤ (TTREG4, 3) ≤65535
Warm-up counter
256≤ (TTREG4, 3) ≤65535
16-bit PWM
2≤ (PWREG4, 3) ≤65534
16-bit PPG
and
(PWREG4, 3) + 1 < (TTREG4, 3)
1≤ (PWREG4, 3) < (TTREG4, 3) ≤65535
Note: n = 3 to 4
Page 104
TMP86FS49AUG
10.3 Function
The TimerCounter 3 and 4 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit event counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO), 8bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 (TC3, 4) are cascadable to form a 16bit timer. The 16-bit timer has the operating modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter,
16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes.
10.3.1 8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter
and the timer register j (TTREGj) value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is
cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting.
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR<TFFj> to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses.
Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the
shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately
after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation
may not be obtained.
Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 10-4 Source Clock for TimerCounter 3, 4 (Internal Clock)
Source Clock
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
Resolution
Maximum Time Setting
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2,
SLEEP1/2
mode
fc/211 [Hz]
fs/23 [Hz]
fs/23 [Hz]
128 µs
244.14 µs
32.6 ms
62.3 ms
fc/27
fc/27
–
8 µs
–
2.0 ms
–
fc/25
fc/25
–
2 µs
–
510 µs
–
fc/23
fc/23
–
500 ns
–
127.5 µs
–
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz and generating an interrupt 80 µs later
(TimerCounter4, fc = 16.0 MHz)
(TTREG4), 0AH
: Sets the timer register (80 µs÷27/fc = 0AH).
(EIRH). 1
: Enables INTTC4 interrupt.
LD
(TC4CR), 00010000B
: Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit timer mode.
LD
(TC4CR), 00011000B
: Starts TC4.
LD
DI
SET
EI
Page 105
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1 Configuration
TMP86FS49AUG
TC4CR<TC4S>
Internal
Source Clock
1
Counter
TTREG4
?
2
3
n-1
n 0
1
2
n-1
n 0
1
2
0
n
Match detect
Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Counter clear
Match detect
Figure 10-2 8-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
10.3.2 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4)
In the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin.
When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and
the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input
pulse to the TCj pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TCj pin.
Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24
Hz in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR<TFFj> to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output
pulses.
Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is
not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in
effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an
expected operation may not be obtained.
Note 3: j = 3, 4
TC4CR<TC4S>
TC4 pin input
0
Counter
TTREG4
?
1
2
n-1
n 0
1
2
n-1
n 0
1
2
0
n
Match detect
INTTC4 interrupt request
Counter
clear
Match detect
Counter
clear
Figure 10-3 8-Bit Event Counter Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
10.3.3 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse with a 50% duty cycle from the PDOj pin.
In the PDO mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter
and the TTREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the PDOj pin is switched to the opposite state and
the up-counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at the time. The logic state opposite to the
timer F/Fj logic level is output from the PDOj pin. An arbitrary value can be set to the timer F/Fj by
TCjCR<TFFj>. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj value is initialized to 0.
To use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Page 106
TMP86FS49AUG
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse using TC4 (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting port
LD
(TTREG4), 3DH
: 1/1024÷27/fc÷2 = 3DH
LD
(TC4CR), 00010001B
: Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit PDO mode.
LD
(TC4CR), 00011001B
: Starts TC4.
Note 1: In the programmable divider output mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running.
Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the programmable divider output mode, the new
value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed
while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained.
Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PDO output, the PDOj pin holds the output status when the timer is
stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR<TFFj> after the timer is stopped. Do not change the
TCjCR<TFFj> setting upon stopping of the timer.
Example: Fixing the PDOj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer.
CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PDOj pin to the high level.
Note 3: j = 3, 4
Page 107
Page 108
?
INTTC4 interrupt request
PDO4 pin
Timer F/F4
TTREG4
Counter
Internal
source clock
TC4CR<TFF4>
TC4CR<TC4S>
0
n
1
Match detect
2
n 0
1
Match detect
2
n 0
1
Match detect
2
n 0
1
Match detect
2
n 0
1
2
3
Set F/F
Held at the level when the timer
is stopped
0
Write of "1"
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TMP86FS49AUG
Figure 10-4 8-Bit PDO Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
TMP86FS49AUG
10.3.4 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. The
up-counter counts up using the internal clock.
When a match between the up-counter and the PWREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the
timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the
timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The
INTTCj interrupt request is generated at this time.
Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR<TFFj>, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj is cleared to 0.
(The logic level output from the PWMj pin is the opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level.)
Since PWREGj in the PWM mode is serially connected to the shift register, the value set to PWREGj can be
changed while the timer is running. The value set to PWREGj during a run of the timer is shifted by the
INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREGj. While the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immediately after the programming of PWREGj. If executing the read instruction to PWREGj during PWM output,
the value in the shift register is read, but not the value set in PWREGj. Therefore, after writing to PWREGj, the
reading data of PWREGj is previous value until INTTCj is generated.
For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREGj immediately after the INTTCj interrupt request is
generated (normally in the INTTCj interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse
different from the programmed value until the next INTTCj interrupt request is generated.
Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWMj pin holds the output status when the timer is
stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR<TFFj> after the timer is stopped. Do not change the
TCjCR<TFFj> upon stopping of the timer.
Example: Fixing the PWMj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer.
CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PWMj pin to the high level.
Note 3: To enter the STOP mode during PWM output, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP
mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWMj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Note 4: j = 3, 4
Table 10-5 PWM Output Mode
Source Clock
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
Resolution
Repeated Cycle
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2,
SLEEP1/2
mode
fc/211 [Hz]
fs/23 [Hz]
fs/23 [Hz]
128 µs
244.14 µs
32.8 ms
62.5 ms
fc/2
7
–
8 µs
–
2.05 ms
–
fc/2
5
–
2 µs
–
512 µs
–
fc/2
7
fc/2
5
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc/23
fc/23
–
500 ns
–
128 µs
–
fs
fs
fs
30.5 µs
30.5 µs
7.81 ms
7.81 ms
fc/2
fc/2
–
125 ns
–
32 µs
–
fc
fc
–
62.5 ns
–
16 µs
–
Page 109
Page 110
?
Shift registar
0
Shift
INTTC4 interrupt request
PWM4 pin
Timer F/F4
?
PWREG4
Counter
Internal
source clock
TC4CR<TFF4>
TC4CR<TC4S>
n
n
n
Match detect
1
n
n+1
Shift
FF
0
n
n
n+1
m
One cycle period
Write to PWREG4
Match detect
1
Shift
FF
0
m
m
m+1
Write to PWREG4
p
Match detect
m
1
Shift
FF
0
p
p
Match detect
1
p
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TMP86FS49AUG
Figure 10-5 8-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
TMP86FS49AUG
10.3.5 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer.
When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after the
timer is started by setting TC4CR<TC4S> to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared.
After being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. Program the lower byte and upper byte in this order in
the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR<TFFj> to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj, and PPGj pins may output a pulse.
Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the
shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately
after programming of TTREGj. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected
operation may not be obtained.
Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 10-6 Source Clock for 16-Bit Timer Mode
Source Clock
Resolution
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
Maximum Time Setting
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2,
SLEEP1/2
mode
fc/211
fs/23
fs/23
128 µs
244.14 µs
8.39 s
16 s
fc/27
fc/27
–
8 µs
–
524.3 ms
–
fc/25
fc/25
–
2 µs
–
131.1 ms
–
fc/23
fc/23
–
500 ns
–
32.8 ms
–
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later
(fc = 16.0 MHz)
(TTREG3), 927CH
: Sets the timer register (300 ms÷27/fc = 927CH).
(EIRH). 1
: Enables INTTC4 interrupt.
LD
(TC3CR), 13H
:Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 16-bit timer mode
(lower byte).
LD
(TC4CR), 04H
: Sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte).
LD
(TC4CR), 0CH
: Starts the timer.
LDW
DI
SET
EI
TC4CR<TC4S>
Internal
source clock
0
Counter
TTREG3
(Lower byte)
TTREG4
(Upper byte)
?
?
INTTC4 interrupt request
1
2
3
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
mn-1 mn 0
1
n
m
Match
detect
Counter
clear
Match
detect
Counter
clear
Figure 10-6 16-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 111
2
0
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1 Configuration
TMP86FS49AUG
10.3.6 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the TC3 pin. The TimerCounter 3
and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit event counter.
When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after
the timer is started by setting TC4CR<TC4S> to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is
cleared.
After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TC3 pin.
Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TC3 pin.
Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/
2 in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Program the lower byte (TTREG3), and upper byte (TTREG4) in this
order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
4
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR<TFFj> to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses.
Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in
the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation
may not be obtained.
Note 3: j = 3, 4
10.3.7 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. The
TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form the 16-bit PWM signal generator.
The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock.
When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the
logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The
logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the
counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time.
Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/2
or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR<TFF4>, positive and negative pulses can be
generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0.
(The logic level output from the PWM4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4 logic level.)
Since PWREG4 and 3 in the PWM mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to
PWREG4 and 3 can be changed while the timer is running. The values set to PWREG4 and 3 during a run of
the timer are shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREG4 and 3. While the timer is
stopped, the values are shifted immediately after the programming of PWREG4 and 3. Set the lower byte
(PWREG3) and upper byte (PWREG4) in this order to program PWREG4 and 3. (Programming only the lower
or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.)
If executing the read instruction to PWREG4 and 3 during PWM output, the values set in the shift register is
read, but not the values set in PWREG4 and 3. Therefore, after writing to the PWREG4 and 3, reading data of
PWREG4 and 3 is previous value until INTTC4 is generated.
For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREG4 and 3 immediately after the INTTC4 interrupt
request is generated (normally in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and
the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of
pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC4 interrupt request is generated.
Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWM4 pin holds the output status when the timer is
stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR<TFF4> after the timer is stopped. Do not program
TC4CR<TFF4> upon stopping of the timer.
Example: Fixing the PWM4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
Page 112
TMP86FS49AUG
CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer.
CLR (TC4CR).7 : Sets the PWM4 pin to the high level.
Note 3: To enter the STOP mode, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWM4
pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Table 10-7 16-Bit PWM Output Mode
Source Clock
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
Resolution
Repeated Cycle
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2,
SLEEP1/2
mode
fc/211
fs/23 [Hz]
fs/23 [Hz]
128 µs
244.14 µs
8.39 s
16 s
fc/27
fc/27
–
8 µs
–
524.3 ms
–
fc/25
fc/25
–
2 µs
–
131.1 ms
–
fc/23
fc/23
–
500 ns
–
32.8 ms
–
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fs
fs
fs
30.5 µs
30.5 µs
2s
2s
fc/2
fc/2
–
125 ns
–
8.2 ms
–
fc
fc
–
62.5 ns
–
4.1 ms
–
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports
LDW
(PWREG3), 07D0H
: Sets the pulse width.
LD
(TC3CR), 33H
: Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and 16-bit PWM output
mode (lower byte).
LD
(TC4CR), 056H
: Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PWM signal
generation mode (upper byte).
LD
(TC4CR), 05EH
: Starts the timer.
Page 113
Page 114
?
?
PWREG4
(Upper byte)
16-bit
shift register
0
a
Shift
INTTC4 interrupt request
PWM4 pin
Timer F/F4
?
PWREG3
(Lower byte)
Counter
Internal
source clock
TC4CR<TFF4>
TC4CR<TC4S>
an
n
an
Match detect
1
an
an+1
Shift
FFFF
0
an
an
an+1
m
b
One cycle period
Write to PWREG4
Write to PWREG3
Match detect
1
Shift
FFFF
0
bm
bm bm+1
p
c
Write to PWREG4
Write to PWREG3
Match detect
bm
1
Shift
FFFF
0
cp
Match detect
cp
1
cp
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TMP86FS49AUG
Figure 10-7 16-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
TMP86FS49AUG
10.3.8 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16-bits of resolution. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to enter the 16-bit PPG mode.
The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and
the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F4 is
switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F4 is
switched to the opposite state again when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3,
TTREG4) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time.
Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/
2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR<TFF4>, positive and negative pulses can be
generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0.
(The logic level output from the PPG4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4.)
Set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (TTREG3 → TTREG4,
PWREG3 → PWREG4) (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
For PPG output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports
LDW
(PWREG3), 07D0H
: Sets the pulse width.
LDW
(TTREG3), 8002H
: Sets the cycle period.
LD
(TC3CR), 33H
: Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and16-bit PPG mode
(lower byte).
LD
(TC4CR), 057H
: Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit
PPG mode (upper byte).
LD
(TC4CR), 05FH
: Starts the timer.
Note 1: In the PPG mode, do not change the PWREGi and TTREGi settings while the timer is running. Since
PWREGi and TTREGi are not in the shift register configuration in the PPG mode, the new values programmed in PWREGi and TTREGi are in effect immediately after programming PWREGi and TTREGi.
Therefore, if PWREGi and TTREGi are changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not
be obtained.
Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PPG output, the PPG4 pin holds the output status when the timer is
stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR<TFF4> after the timer is stopped. Do not change
TC4CR<TFF4> upon stopping of the timer.
Example: Fixing the PPG4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer
CLR (TC4CR).7: Sets the PPG4 pin to the high level
Note 3: i = 3, 4
Page 115
Page 116
?
TTREG4
(Upper byte)
INTTC4 interrupt request
PPG4 pin
Timer F/F4
?
?
TTREG3
(Lower byte)
PWREG4
(Upper byte)
n
PWREG3
(Lower byte)
?
0
Counter
Internal
source clock
TC4CR<TFF4>
TC4CR<TC4S>
m
r
q
mn
Match detect
1
mn mn+1
Match detect
qr-1 qr 0
mn
Match detect
1
mn mn+1
Match detect
qr-1 qr 0
mn
Match detect
1
F/F clear
0
Held at the level when the timer
stops
mn mn+1
Write of "0"
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TMP86FS49AUG
Figure 10-8 16-Bit PPG Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
TMP86FS49AUG
10.3.9 Warm-Up Counter Mode
In this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is
switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a
16-bit TimerCounter. The warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to
low-frequency, and vice-versa.
Note 1: In the warm-up counter mode, fix TCiCR<TFFi> to 0. If not fixed, the PDOi, PWMi and PPGi pins may output
pulses.
Note 2: In the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register TTREG4 and 3 are used for match
detection and lower 8 bits are not used.
Note 3: i = 3, 4
10.3.9.1 Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode
(NORMAL1 → NORMAL2 → SLOW2 → SLOW1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability
is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2<XTEN> to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock.
When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer
is started by setting TC4CR<TC4S> to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt
request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, set SYSCR2<SYSCK> to 1 to
switch the system clock from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and then clear of SYSCR2<XEN> to
0 to stop the high-frequency clock.
Table 10-8 Setting Time of Low-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (fs = 32.768 kHz)
Minimum Time Setting
(TTREG4, 3 = 0100H)
Maximum Time Setting
(TTREG4, 3 = FF00H)
7.81 ms
1.99 s
Example :After checking low-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the SLOW1 mode
SET
(SYSCR2).6
: SYSCR2<XTEN> ← 1
LD
(TC3CR), 43H
: Sets TFF3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode.
LD
(TC4CR), 05H
: Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode.
LD
(TTREG3), 8000H
: Sets the warm-up time.
(The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.)
: IMF ← 0
DI
SET
(EIRH). 1
: IMF ← 1
EI
SET
:
PINTTC4:
: Enables the INTTC4.
(TC4CR).3
: Starts TC4 and 3.
:
CLR
(TC4CR).3
: Stops TC4 and 3.
SET
(SYSCR2).5
: SYSCR2<SYSCK> ← 1
(Switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.)
CLR
(SYSCR2).7
: SYSCR2<XEN> ← 0 (Stops the high-frequency clock.)
RETI
:
VINTTC4:
DW
:
PINTTC4
: INTTC4 vector table
Page 117
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
10.1 Configuration
TMP86FS49AUG
10.3.9.2 High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
(SLOW1 → SLOW2 → NORMAL2 → NORMAL1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2<XEN> to 1 to oscillate the high-frequency clock.
When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer
is started by setting TC4CR<TC4S> to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt
request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, clear SYSCR2<SYSCK> to 0 to
switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then SYSCR2<XTEN> to 0 to
stop the low-frequency clock.
Table 10-9 Setting Time in High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
Minimum time Setting
(TTREG4, 3 = 0100H)
Maximum time Setting
(TTREG4, 3 = FF00H)
16 µs
4.08 ms
Example :After checking high-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the NORMAL1 mode
SET
(SYSCR2).7
: SYSCR2<XEN> ← 1
LD
(TC3CR), 63H
: Sets TFF3=0, source clock fc, and 16-bit mode.
LD
(TC4CR), 05H
: Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode.
LD
(TTREG3), 0F800H
: Sets the warm-up time.
(The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.)
: IMF ← 0
DI
SET
(EIRH). 1
: IMF ← 1
EI
SET
:
PINTTC4:
: Enables the INTTC4.
(TC4CR).3
: Starts the TC4 and 3.
:
CLR
(TC4CR).3
: Stops the TC4 and 3.
CLR
(SYSCR2).5
: SYSCR2<SYSCK> ← 0
(Switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.)
CLR
(SYSCR2).6
: SYSCR2<XTEN> ← 0
(Stops the low-frequency clock.)
RETI
VINTTC4:
:
:
DW
PINTTC4
: INTTC4 vector table
Page 118
TMP86FS49AUG
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1 Configuration
PWM mode
Overflow
fc/211 or fs/23
7
fc/2
5
fc/2
fc/23
fs
fc/2
fc
TC6 pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Y
A
B
INTTC6
interrupt request
Clear
Y
8-bit up-counter
TC6S
S
PDO, PPG mode
A
B
S
16-bit
mode
S
TC6M
TC6S
TFF6
Toggle
Q
Y
16-bit mode
S
TC6CK
PDO6/PWM6/
PPG6 pin
Set
Clear
Timer, Event
Counter mode
Timer F/F6
A
Y
TC6CR
B
TTREG6
PWREG6
PWM, PPG mode
DecodeEN
PDO, PWM,
PPG mode
TFF6
16-bit
mode
TC5S
PWM mode
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/27
5
fc/2
3
fc/2
fs
fc/2
fc
TC5 pin
Y
8-bit up-counter
Overflow
16-bit mode
PDO mode
16-bit mode
Timer,
Event Couter mode
S
TC5M
TC5S
TFF5
INTTC5
interrupt request
Clear
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Toggle
Q
Set
Clear
PDO5/PWM5/
pin
Timer F/F5
TC5CK
TC5CR
PWM mode
TTREG5
PWREG5
DecodeEN
TFF5
Figure 11-1 8-Bit TimerCounter 5, 6
Page 119
PDO, PWM mode
16-bit mode
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1 Configuration
TMP86FS49AUG
11.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 5 is controlled by the TimerCounter 5 control register (TC5CR) and two 8-bit timer registers
(TTREG5, PWREG5).
TimerCounter 5 Timer Register
TTREG5
(0016H)
R/W
7
PWREG5
(001AH)
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG5) setting while the timer is running.
Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG5) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while
the timer is running.
TimerCounter 5 Control Register
TC5CR
(0029H)
TFF5
7
TFF5
6
5
4
TC5CK
Time F/F5 control
3
2
TC5S
0:
1:
1
0
TC5M
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Clear
Set
R/W
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
TC5CK
Operating clock selection [Hz]
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2
SLEEP1/2
mode
000
fc/211
fs/23
fs/23
001
fc/27
fc/27
–
010
fc/25
fc/25
–
011
fc/23
fc/23
–
100
fs
fs
fs
101
fc/2
fc/2
–
110
fc
fc
fc (Note 8)
111
TC5S
TC5 start control
0:
1:
000:
001:
TC5M
TC5M operating mode select
010:
011:
1**:
R/W
TC5 pin input
Operation stop and counter clear
Operation start
R/W
8-bit timer/event counter mode
8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode
8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode
16-bit mode
(Each mode is selectable with TC6M.)
Reserved
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock[Hz]
Note 2: Do not change the TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 settings while the timer is running.
Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC5S= 1 → 0), do not change the TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 settings. To start the timer operation (TC5S= 0 → 1), TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 can be programmed.
Note 4: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, set the operating mode by programming TC6CR<TC6M>, where TC5M must
be fixed to 011.
Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC5CK. Set the timer start control
and timer F/F control by programming TC6CR<TC6S> and TC6CR<TFF6>, respectively.
Note 6: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table
11-1 and Table 11-2.
Page 120
TMP86FS49AUG
Note 7: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 113.
Note 8: The operating clock fc in the SLOW or SLEEP mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
Page 121
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1 Configuration
TMP86FS49AUG
The TimerCounter 6 is controlled by the TimerCounter 6 control register (TC6CR) and two 8-bit timer registers
(TTREG6 and PWREG6).
TimerCounter 6 Timer Register
TTREG6
(0017H)
R/W
7
PWREG6
(001BH)
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG6) setting while the timer is running.
Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG6) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while
the timer is running.
TimerCounter 6 Control Register
TC6CR
(002AH)
TFF6
7
TFF6
6
5
4
TC6CK
Timer F/F6 control
3
2
TC6S
0:
1:
1
0
TC6M
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Clear
Set
R/W
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
TC6CK
Operating clock selection [Hz]
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2
SLEEP1/2
mode
000
fc/211
fs/23
fs/23
001
fc/27
fc/27
–
010
fc/25
fc/25
–
011
fc/2
3
3
–
100
fs
fs
fs
101
fc/2
fc/2
–
110
fc
fc
–
111
TC6S
TC6 start control
0:
1:
000:
001:
010:
TC6M
TC6M operating mode select
011:
100:
101:
110:
111:
fc/2
R/W
TC6 pin input
Operation stop and counter clear
Operation start
R/W
8-bit timer/event counter mode
8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode
8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode
Reserved
16-bit timer/event counter mode
Warm-up counter mode
16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode
16-bit PPG mode
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz]
Note 2: Do not change the TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 settings while the timer is running.
Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC6S= 1 → 0), do not change the TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 settings.
To start the timer operation (TC6S= 0 → 1), TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 can be programmed.
Note 4: When TC6M= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the source clock becomes the TC5 overflow signal regardless of the
TC6CK setting.
Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming TC6M, where TC5CR<TC5M>
must be set to 011.
Page 122
TMP86FS49AUG
Note 6: To the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC5CR<TC5CK>. Set the timer start
control and timer F/F control by programming TC6S and TFF6, respectively.
Note 7: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table
11-1 and Table 11-2.
Note 8: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 113.
Table 11-1 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 Modes)
Operating mode
fc/211
or
fc/27
fc/25
fc/23
fs
fc/2
fc
TC5
pin input
TC6
pin input
fs/23
8-bit timer
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
8-bit event counter
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
Ο
8-bit PDO
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
8-bit PWM
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
–
16-bit timer
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
16-bit event counter
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
–
Warm-up counter
–
–
–
–
Ο
–
–
–
–
16-bit PWM
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
16-bit PPG
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
–
–
–
Ο
–
Note 1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on
lower bit (TC5CK).
Note 2: Ο : Available source clock
Table 11-2 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes)
Operating mode
fc/211
or
fc/27
fc/25
fc/23
fs
fc/2
fc
TC5
pin input
TC6
pin input
fs/23
8-bit timer
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
8-bit event counter
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
Ο
8-bit PDO
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
8-bit PWM
Ο
–
–
–
Ο
–
–
–
–
16-bit timer
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
16-bit event counter
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
–
Warm-up counter
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
–
–
16-bit PWM
Ο
–
–
–
Ο
–
–
Ο
–
16-bit PPG
Ο
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ο
–
Note1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on
lower bit (TC5CK).
Note2: Ο : Available source clock
Page 123
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1 Configuration
TMP86FS49AUG
Table 11-3 Constraints on Register Values Being Compared
Operating mode
Register Value
8-bit timer/event counter
1≤ (TTREGn) ≤255
8-bit PDO
1≤ (TTREGn) ≤255
8-bit PWM
2≤ (PWREGn) ≤254
16-bit timer/event counter
1≤ (TTREG6, 5) ≤65535
Warm-up counter
256≤ (TTREG6, 5) ≤65535
16-bit PWM
2≤ (PWREG6, 5) ≤65534
16-bit PPG
and
(PWREG6, 5) + 1 < (TTREG6, 5)
1≤ (PWREG6, 5) < (TTREG6, 5) ≤65535
Note: n = 5 to 6
Page 124
TMP86FS49AUG
11.3 Function
The TimerCounter 5 and 6 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit event counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO), 8bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 (TC5, 6) are cascadable to form a 16bit timer. The 16-bit timer has the operating modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter,
16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes.
11.3.1 8-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter
and the timer register j (TTREGj) value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is
cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting.
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR<TFFj> to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses.
Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the
shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately
after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation
may not be obtained.
Note 3: j = 5, 6
Table 11-4 Source Clock for TimerCounter 5, 6 (Internal Clock)
Source Clock
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
Resolution
Maximum Time Setting
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2,
SLEEP1/2
mode
fc/211 [Hz]
fs/23 [Hz]
fs/23 [Hz]
128 µs
244.14 µs
32.6 ms
62.3 ms
fc/27
fc/27
–
8 µs
–
2.0 ms
–
fc/25
fc/25
–
2 µs
–
510 µs
–
fc/23
fc/23
–
500 ns
–
127.5 µs
–
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz and generating an interrupt 80 µs later
(TimerCounter6, fc = 16.0 MHz)
(TTREG6), 0AH
: Sets the timer register (80 µs÷27/fc = 0AH).
(EIRE). 2
: Enables INTTC6 interrupt.
LD
(TC6CR), 00010000B
: Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit timer mode.
LD
(TC6CR), 00011000B
: Starts TC6.
LD
DI
SET
EI
Page 125
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1 Configuration
TMP86FS49AUG
TC6CR<TC6S>
Internal
Source Clock
1
Counter
TTREG6
?
2
3
n-1
n 0
1
2
n-1
n 0
1
2
0
n
Match detect
Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Counter clear
Match detect
Figure 11-2 8-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
11.3.2 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5, 6)
In the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin.
When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and
the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input
pulse to the TCj pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TCj pin.
Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24
Hz in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR<TFFj> to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output
pulses.
Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is
not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in
effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an
expected operation may not be obtained.
Note 3: j = 5, 6
TC6CR<TC6S>
TC6 pin input
0
Counter
TTREG6
?
1
2
n-1
n 0
1
2
n-1
n 0
1
2
0
n
Match detect
INTTC6 interrupt request
Counter
clear
Match detect
Counter
clear
Figure 11-3 8-Bit Event Counter Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
11.3.3 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC5, 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse with a 50% duty cycle from the PDOj pin.
In the PDO mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter
and the TTREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the PDOj pin is switched to the opposite state and
the up-counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at the time. The logic state opposite to the
timer F/Fj logic level is output from the PDOj pin. An arbitrary value can be set to the timer F/Fj by
TCjCR<TFFj>. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj value is initialized to 0.
To use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Page 126
TMP86FS49AUG
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse using TC6 (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting port
LD
(TTREG6), 3DH
: 1/1024÷27/fc÷2 = 3DH
LD
(TC6CR), 00010001B
: Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit PDO mode.
LD
(TC6CR), 00011001B
: Starts TC6.
Note 1: In the programmable divider output mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running.
Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the programmable divider output mode, the new
value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed
while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained.
Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PDO output, the PDOj pin holds the output status when the timer is
stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR<TFFj> after the timer is stopped. Do not change the
TCjCR<TFFj> setting upon stopping of the timer.
Example: Fixing the PDOj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer.
CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PDOj pin to the high level.
Note 3: j = 5, 6
Page 127
Page 128
?
INTTC6 interrupt request
PDO6 pin
Timer F/F6
TTREG6
Counter
Internal
source clock
TC6CR<TFF6>
TC6CR<TC6S>
0
n
1
Match detect
2
n 0
1
Match detect
2
n 0
1
Match detect
2
n 0
1
Match detect
2
n 0
1
2
3
Set F/F
Held at the level when the timer
is stopped
0
Write of "1"
11.1 Configuration
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TMP86FS49AUG
Figure 11-4 8-Bit PDO Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
TMP86FS49AUG
11.3.4 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5, 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. The
up-counter counts up using the internal clock.
When a match between the up-counter and the PWREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the
timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the
timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The
INTTCj interrupt request is generated at this time.
Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR<TFFj>, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj is cleared to 0.
(The logic level output from the PWMj pin is the opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level.)
Since PWREGj in the PWM mode is serially connected to the shift register, the value set to PWREGj can be
changed while the timer is running. The value set to PWREGj during a run of the timer is shifted by the
INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREGj. While the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immediately after the programming of PWREGj. If executing the read instruction to PWREGj during PWM output,
the value in the shift register is read, but not the value set in PWREGj. Therefore, after writing to PWREGj, the
reading data of PWREGj is previous value until INTTCj is generated.
For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREGj immediately after the INTTCj interrupt request is
generated (normally in the INTTCj interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse
different from the programmed value until the next INTTCj interrupt request is generated.
Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWMj pin holds the output status when the timer is
stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR<TFFj> after the timer is stopped. Do not change the
TCjCR<TFFj> upon stopping of the timer.
Example: Fixing the PWMj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer.
CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PWMj pin to the high level.
Note 3: To enter the STOP mode during PWM output, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP
mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWMj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Note 4: j = 5, 6
Table 11-5 PWM Output Mode
Source Clock
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
Resolution
Repeated Cycle
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2,
SLEEP1/2
mode
fc/211 [Hz]
fs/23 [Hz]
fs/23 [Hz]
128 µs
244.14 µs
32.8 ms
62.5 ms
fc/2
7
–
8 µs
–
2.05 ms
–
fc/2
5
–
2 µs
–
512 µs
–
fc/2
7
fc/2
5
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc/23
fc/23
–
500 ns
–
128 µs
–
fs
fs
fs
30.5 µs
30.5 µs
7.81 ms
7.81 ms
fc/2
fc/2
–
125 ns
–
32 µs
–
fc
fc
–
62.5 ns
–
16 µs
–
Page 129
Page 130
?
Shift registar
0
Shift
INTTC6 interrupt request
PWM6 pin
Timer F/F6
?
PWREG6
Counter
Internal
source clock
TC6CR<TFF6>
TC6CR<TC6S>
n
n
n
Match detect
1
n
n+1
Shift
FF
0
n
n
n+1
m
One cycle period
Write to PWREG6
Match detect
1
Shift
FF
0
m
m
m+1
Write to PWREG6
p
Match detect
m
1
Shift
FF
0
p
p
Match detect
1
p
11.1 Configuration
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TMP86FS49AUG
Figure 11-5 8-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
TMP86FS49AUG
11.3.5 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer.
When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected after the
timer is started by setting TC6CR<TC6S> to 1, an INTTC6 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared.
After being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. Program the lower byte and upper byte in this order in
the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR<TFFj> to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj, and PPGj pins may output a pulse.
Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the
shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately
after programming of TTREGj. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected
operation may not be obtained.
Note 3: j = 5, 6
Table 11-6 Source Clock for 16-Bit Timer Mode
Source Clock
Resolution
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
Maximum Time Setting
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2,
SLEEP1/2
mode
fc/211
fs/23
fs/23
128 µs
244.14 µs
8.39 s
16 s
fc/27
fc/27
–
8 µs
–
524.3 ms
–
fc/25
fc/25
–
2 µs
–
131.1 ms
–
fc/23
fc/23
–
500 ns
–
32.8 ms
–
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later
(fc = 16.0 MHz)
(TTREG5), 927CH
: Sets the timer register (300 ms÷27/fc = 927CH).
(EIRE). 2
: Enables INTTC6 interrupt.
LD
(TC5CR), 13H
:Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 16-bit timer mode
(lower byte).
LD
(TC6CR), 04H
: Sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte).
LD
(TC6CR), 0CH
: Starts the timer.
LDW
DI
SET
EI
TC6CR<TC6S>
Internal
source clock
0
Counter
TTREG5
(Lower byte)
TTREG6
(Upper byte)
?
?
INTTC6 interrupt request
1
2
3
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
mn-1 mn 0
1
n
m
Match
detect
Counter
clear
Match
detect
Counter
clear
Figure 11-6 16-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 131
2
0
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1 Configuration
TMP86FS49AUG
11.3.6 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the TC5 pin. The TimerCounter 5
and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit event counter.
When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected after
the timer is started by setting TC6CR<TC6S> to 1, an INTTC6 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is
cleared.
After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TC5 pin.
Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TC5 pin.
Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/
2 in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Program the lower byte (TTREG5), and upper byte (TTREG6) in this
order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
4
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR<TFFj> to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses.
Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in
the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation
may not be obtained.
Note 3: j = 5, 6
11.3.7 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. The
TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form the 16-bit PWM signal generator.
The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock.
When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG5, PWREG6) value is detected, the
logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The
logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the
counter is cleared. The INTTC6 interrupt is generated at this time.
Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC5 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/2
or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F6 by TC6CR<TFF6>, positive and negative pulses can be
generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F6 is cleared to 0.
(The logic level output from the PWM6 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F6 logic level.)
Since PWREG6 and 5 in the PWM mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to
PWREG6 and 5 can be changed while the timer is running. The values set to PWREG6 and 5 during a run of
the timer are shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREG6 and 5. While the timer is
stopped, the values are shifted immediately after the programming of PWREG6 and 5. Set the lower byte
(PWREG5) and upper byte (PWREG6) in this order to program PWREG6 and 5. (Programming only the lower
or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.)
If executing the read instruction to PWREG6 and 5 during PWM output, the values set in the shift register is
read, but not the values set in PWREG6 and 5. Therefore, after writing to the PWREG6 and 5, reading data of
PWREG6 and 5 is previous value until INTTC6 is generated.
For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREG6 and 5 immediately after the INTTC6 interrupt
request is generated (normally in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and
the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of
pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC6 interrupt request is generated.
Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWM6 pin holds the output status when the timer is
stopped. To change the output status, program TC6CR<TFF6> after the timer is stopped. Do not program
TC6CR<TFF6> upon stopping of the timer.
Example: Fixing the PWM6 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
Page 132
TMP86FS49AUG
CLR (TC6CR).3: Stops the timer.
CLR (TC6CR).7 : Sets the PWM6 pin to the high level.
Note 3: To enter the STOP mode, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWM6
pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Table 11-7 16-Bit PWM Output Mode
Source Clock
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode
Resolution
Repeated Cycle
DV7CK = 0
DV7CK = 1
SLOW1/2,
SLEEP1/2
mode
fc/211
fs/23 [Hz]
fs/23 [Hz]
128 µs
244.14 µs
8.39 s
16 s
fc/27
fc/27
–
8 µs
–
524.3 ms
–
fc/25
fc/25
–
2 µs
–
131.1 ms
–
fc/23
fc/23
–
500 ns
–
32.8 ms
–
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fs
fs
fs
30.5 µs
30.5 µs
2s
2s
fc/2
fc/2
–
125 ns
–
8.2 ms
–
fc
fc
–
62.5 ns
–
4.1 ms
–
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports
LDW
(PWREG5), 07D0H
: Sets the pulse width.
LD
(TC5CR), 33H
: Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and 16-bit PWM output
mode (lower byte).
LD
(TC6CR), 056H
: Sets TFF6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PWM signal
generation mode (upper byte).
LD
(TC6CR), 05EH
: Starts the timer.
Page 133
Page 134
?
?
PWREG6
(Upper byte)
16-bit
shift register
0
a
Shift
INTTC6 interrupt request
PWM6 pin
Timer F/F6
?
PWREG5
(Lower byte)
Counter
Internal
source clock
TC6CR<TFF6>
TC6CR<TC6S>
an
n
an
Match detect
1
an
an+1
Shift
FFFF
0
an
an
an+1
m
b
One cycle period
Write to PWREG6
Write to PWREG5
Match detect
1
Shift
FFFF
0
bm
bm bm+1
p
c
Write to PWREG6
Write to PWREG5
Match detect
bm
1
Shift
FFFF
0
cp
Match detect
cp
1
cp
11.1 Configuration
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TMP86FS49AUG
Figure 11-7 16-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
TMP86FS49AUG
11.3.8 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)
This mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16-bits of resolution. The timer counter 5 and 6 are cascadable to enter the 16-bit PPG mode.
The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and
the timer register (PWREG5, PWREG6) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F6 is
switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F6 is
switched to the opposite state again when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5,
TTREG6) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC6 interrupt is generated at this time.
Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC5 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/
2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F6 by TC6CR<TFF6>, positive and negative pulses can be
generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F6 is cleared to 0.
(The logic level output from the PPG6 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F6.)
Set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (TTREG5 → TTREG6,
PWREG5 → PWREG6) (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
For PPG output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports
LDW
(PWREG5), 07D0H
: Sets the pulse width.
LDW
(TTREG5), 8002H
: Sets the cycle period.
LD
(TC5CR), 33H
: Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and16-bit PPG mode
(lower byte).
LD
(TC6CR), 057H
: Sets TFF6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit
PPG mode (upper byte).
LD
(TC6CR), 05FH
: Starts the timer.
Note 1: In the PPG mode, do not change the PWREGi and TTREGi settings while the timer is running. Since
PWREGi and TTREGi are not in the shift register configuration in the PPG mode, the new values programmed in PWREGi and TTREGi are in effect immediately after programming PWREGi and TTREGi.
Therefore, if PWREGi and TTREGi are changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not
be obtained.
Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PPG output, the PPG6 pin holds the output status when the timer is
stopped. To change the output status, program TC6CR<TFF6> after the timer is stopped. Do not change
TC6CR<TFF6> upon stopping of the timer.
Example: Fixing the PPG6 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
CLR (TC6CR).3: Stops the timer
CLR (TC6CR).7: Sets the PPG6 pin to the high level
Note 3: i = 5, 6
Page 135
Page 136
?
TTREG6
(Upper byte)
INTTC6 interrupt request
PPG6 pin
Timer F/F6
?
?
TTREG5
(Lower byte)
PWREG6
(Upper byte)
n
PWREG5
(Lower byte)
?
0
Counter
Internal
source clock
TC6CR<TFF6>
TC6CR<TC6S>
m
r
q
mn
Match detect
1
mn mn+1
Match detect
qr-1 qr 0
mn
Match detect
1
mn mn+1
Match detect
qr-1 qr 0
mn
Match detect
1
F/F clear
0
Held at the level when the timer
stops
mn mn+1
Write of "0"
11.1 Configuration
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TMP86FS49AUG
Figure 11-8 16-Bit PPG Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
TMP86FS49AUG
11.3.9 Warm-Up Counter Mode
In this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is
switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. The timer counter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a
16-bit TimerCounter. The warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to
low-frequency, and vice-versa.
Note 1: In the warm-up counter mode, fix TCiCR<TFFi> to 0. If not fixed, the PDOi, PWMi and PPGi pins may output
pulses.
Note 2: In the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register TTREG6 and 5 are used for match
detection and lower 8 bits are not used.
Note 3: i = 5, 6
11.3.9.1 Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode
(NORMAL1 → NORMAL2 → SLOW2 → SLOW1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability
is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2<XTEN> to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock.
When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG6, 5) value is detected after the timer
is started by setting TC6CR<TC6S> to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC6 interrupt
request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine, set SYSCR2<SYSCK> to 1 to
switch the system clock from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and then clear of SYSCR2<XEN> to
0 to stop the high-frequency clock.
Table 11-8 Setting Time of Low-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (fs = 32.768 kHz)
Minimum Time Setting
(TTREG6, 5 = 0100H)
Maximum Time Setting
(TTREG6, 5 = FF00H)
7.81 ms
1.99 s
Example :After checking low-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC6 and 5, switching to the SLOW1 mode
SET
(SYSCR2).6
: SYSCR2<XTEN> ← 1
LD
(TC5CR), 43H
: Sets TFF5=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode.
LD
(TC6CR), 05H
: Sets TFF6=0, and warm-up counter mode.
LD
(TTREG5), 8000H
: Sets the warm-up time.
(The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.)
: IMF ← 0
DI
SET
(EIRE). 2
: IMF ← 1
EI
SET
:
PINTTC6:
: Enables the INTTC6.
(TC6CR).3
: Starts TC6 and 5.
:
CLR
(TC6CR).3
: Stops TC6 and 5.
SET
(SYSCR2).5
: SYSCR2<SYSCK> ← 1
(Switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.)
CLR
(SYSCR2).7
: SYSCR2<XEN> ← 0 (Stops the high-frequency clock.)
RETI
:
VINTTC6:
DW
:
PINTTC6
: INTTC6 vector table
Page 137
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
11.1 Configuration
TMP86FS49AUG
11.3.9.2 High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
(SLOW1 → SLOW2 → NORMAL2 → NORMAL1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2<XEN> to 1 to oscillate the high-frequency clock.
When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG6, 5) value is detected after the timer
is started by setting TC6CR<TC6S> to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC6 interrupt
request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine, clear SYSCR2<SYSCK> to 0 to
switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then SYSCR2<XTEN> to 0 to
stop the low-frequency clock.
Table 11-9 Setting Time in High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
Minimum time Setting
(TTREG6, 5 = 0100H)
Maximum time Setting
(TTREG6, 5 = FF00H)
16 µs
4.08 ms
Example :After checking high-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC6 and 5, switching to the NORMAL1 mode
SET
(SYSCR2).7
: SYSCR2<XEN> ← 1
LD
(TC5CR), 63H
: Sets TFF5=0, source clock fc, and 16-bit mode.
LD
(TC6CR), 05H
: Sets TFF6=0, and warm-up counter mode.
LD
(TTREG5), 0F800H
: Sets the warm-up time.
(The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.)
: IMF ← 0
DI
SET
(EIRE). 2
: IMF ← 1
EI
SET
:
PINTTC6:
: Enables the INTTC6.
(TC6CR).3
: Starts the TC6 and 5.
:
CLR
(TC6CR).3
: Stops the TC6 and 5.
CLR
(SYSCR2).5
: SYSCR2<SYSCK> ← 0
(Switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.)
CLR
(SYSCR2).6
: SYSCR2<XTEN> ← 0
(Stops the low-frequency clock.)
RETI
VINTTC6:
:
:
DW
PINTTC6
: INTTC6 vector table
Page 138
TMP86FS49AUG
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.1 Configuration
UART control register 1
Transmit data buffer
UART1CR1
TD1BUF
3
Receive data buffer
RD1BUF
2
INTTXD1
Receive control circuit
Transmit control circuit
2
Shift register
Shift register
Parity bit
Stop bit
Noise rejection
circuit
RXD1
TXD1
INTRXD1
Transmit/receive clock
Y
M
P
X
S
fc/13
fc/26
fc/52
fc/104
fc/208
fc/416
INTTC3
fc/96
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
6
fc/2
fc/27
8
fc/2
S
2
Y
4
2
Counter
UART1SR
UART1CR2
UART status register
UART control register 2
MPX: Multiplexer
Baud rate generator
Figure 12-1 UART1 (Asynchronous Serial Interface)
Page 139
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.2 Control
TMP86FS49AUG
12.2 Control
UART1 is controlled by the UART1 Control Registers (UART1CR1, UART1CR2). The operating status can be
monitored using the UART status register (UART1SR).
UART1 Control Register1
UART1CR1
(0F95H)
7
6
5
4
3
TXE
RXE
STBT
EVEN
PE
2
1
0
BRG
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
TXE
Transfer operation
0:
1:
Disable
Enable
RXE
Receive operation
0:
1:
Disable
Enable
STBT
Transmit stop bit length
0:
1:
1 bit
2 bits
EVEN
Even-numbered parity
0:
1:
Odd-numbered parity
Even-numbered parity
Parity addition
0:
1:
No parity
Parity
PE
BRG
000:
001:
010:
011:
100:
101:
110:
111:
Transmit clock select
Write
only
fc/13 [Hz]
fc/26
fc/52
fc/104
fc/208
fc/416
TC3 ( Input INTTC3)
fc/96
Note 1: When operations are disabled by setting TXE and RXE bit to “0”, the setting becomes valid when data transmit or receive
complete. When the transmit data is stored in the transmit data buffer, the data are not transmitted. Even if data transmit is
enabled, until new data are written to the transmit data buffer, the current data are not transmitted.
Note 2: The transmit clock and the parity are common to transmit and receive.
Note 3: UART1CR1<RXE> and UART1CR1<TXE> should be set to “0” before UART1CR1<BRG> is changed.
UART1 Control Register2
UART1CR2
(0F96H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RXDNC
RXDNC
Selection of RXD input noise
rejection time
STOPBR
Receive stop bit length
00:
01:
10:
11:
0:
1:
STOPBR
(Initial value: **** *000)
No noise rejection (Hysteresis input)
Rejects pulses shorter than 31/fc [s] as noise
Rejects pulses shorter than 63/fc [s] as noise
Rejects pulses shorter than 127/fc [s] as noise
Write
only
1 bit
2 bits
Note: When UART1CR2<RXDNC> = “01”, pulses longer than 96/fc [s] are always regarded as signals; when
UART1CR2<RXDNC> = “10”, longer than 192/fc [s]; and when UART1CR2<RXDNC> = “11”, longer than 384/fc [s].
Page 140
TMP86FS49AUG
UART1 Status Register
UART1SR
(0F95H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PERR
FERR
OERR
RBFL
TEND
TBEP
0
(Initial value: 0000 11**)
PERR
Parity error flag
0:
1:
No parity error
Parity error
FERR
Framing error flag
0:
1:
No framing error
Framing error
OERR
Overrun error flag
0:
1:
No overrun error
Overrun error
RBFL
Receive data buffer full flag
0:
1:
Receive data buffer empty
Receive data buffer full
TEND
Transmit end flag
0:
1:
On transmitting
Transmit end
TBEP
Transmit data buffer empty flag
0:
1:
Transmit data buffer full (Transmit data writing is finished)
Transmit data buffer empty
Note: When an INTTXD is generated, TBEP flag is set to "1" automatically.
UART1 Receive Data Buffer
RD1BUF
(0F97H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read only
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
UART1 Transmit Data Buffer
TD1BUF
(0F97H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Write only
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Page 141
Read
only
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.3 Transfer Data Format
TMP86FS49AUG
12.3 Transfer Data Format
In UART1, an one-bit start bit (Low level), stop bit (Bit length selectable at high level, by UART1CR1<STBT>),
and parity (Select parity in UART1CR1<PE>; even- or odd-numbered parity by UART1CR1<EVEN>) are added to
the transfer data. The transfer data formats are shown as follows.
PE
STBT
0
Frame Length
8
1
2
3
9
10
0
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
0
1
Start
Bit 0
1
0
Start
1
1
Start
11
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Stop 2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
12
Stop 2
Figure 12-2 Transfer Data Format
Without parity / 1 STOP bit
With parity / 1 STOP bit
Without parity / 2 STOP bit
With parity / 2 STOP bit
Figure 12-3 Caution on Changing Transfer Data Format
Note: In order to switch the transfer data format, perform transmit operations in the above Figure 12-3 sequence except
for the initial setting.
Page 142
TMP86FS49AUG
12.4 Transfer Rate
The baud rate of UART1 is set of UART1CR1<BRG>. The example of the baud rate are shown as follows.
Table 12-1 Transfer Rate (Example)
Source Clock
BRG
16 MHz
8 MHz
4 MHz
000
76800 [baud]
38400 [baud]
19200 [baud]
001
38400
19200
9600
010
19200
9600
4800
011
9600
4800
2400
100
4800
2400
1200
101
2400
1200
600
When TC3 is used as the UART1 transfer rate (when UART1CR1<BRG> = “110”), the transfer clock and transfer
rate are determined as follows:
Transfer clock [Hz] = TC3 source clock [Hz] / TTREG3 setting value
Transfer Rate [baud] = Transfer clock [Hz] / 16
12.5 Data Sampling Method
The UART1 receiver keeps sampling input using the clock selected by UART1CR1<BRG> until a start bit is
detected in RXD1 pin input. RT clock starts detecting “L” level of the RXD1 pin. Once a start bit is detected, the
start bit, data bits, stop bit(s), and parity bit are sampled at three times of RT7, RT8, and RT9 during one receiver
clock interval (RT clock). (RT0 is the position where the bit supposedly starts.) Bit is determined according to majority rule (The data are the same twice or more out of three samplings).
RXD1 pin
Start bit
RT0
1
2
3
Bit 0
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
RT clock
Start bit
Internal receive data
Bit 0
(a) Without noise rejection circuit
RXD1 pin
Start bit
RT0
1
2
3
Bit 0
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
1
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit
Bit 0
(b) With noise rejection circuit
Figure 12-4 Data Sampling Method
Page 143
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.6 STOP Bit Length
TMP86FS49AUG
12.6 STOP Bit Length
Select a transmit stop bit length (1 bit or 2 bits) by UART1CR1<STBT>.
12.7 Parity
Set parity / no parity by UART1CR1<PE> and set parity type (Odd- or Even-numbered) by
UART1CR1<EVEN>.
12.8 Transmit/Receive Operation
12.8.1 Data Transmit Operation
Set UART1CR1<TXE> to “1”. Read UART1SR to check UART1SR<TBEP> = “1”, then write data in
TD1BUF (Transmit data buffer). Writing data in TD1BUF zero-clears UART1SR<TBEP>, transfers the data
to the transmit shift register and the data are sequentially output from the TXD1 pin. The data output include a
one-bit start bit, stop bits whose number is specified in UART1CR1<STBT> and a parity bit if parity addition
is specified. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART1CR1<BRG>. When data transmit starts, transmit
buffer empty flag UART1SR<TBEP> is set to “1” and an INTTXD1 interrupt is generated.
While UART1CR1<TXE> = “0” and from when “1” is written to UART1CR1<TXE> to when send data are
written to TD1BUF, the TXD1 pin is fixed at high level.
When transmitting data, first read UART1SR, then write data in TD1BUF. Otherwise, UART1SR<TBEP> is
not zero-cleared and transmit does not start.
12.8.2 Data Receive Operation
Set UART1CR1<RXE> to “1”. When data are received via the RXD1 pin, the receive data are transferred to
RD1BUF (Receive data buffer). At this time, the data transmitted includes a start bit and stop bit(s) and a parity
bit if parity addition is specified. When stop bit(s) are received, data only are extracted and transferred to
RD1BUF (Receive data buffer). Then the receive buffer full flag UART1SR<RBFL> is set and an INTRXD1
interrupt is generated. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART1CR1<BRG>.
If an overrun error (OERR) occurs when data are received, the data are not transferred to RD1BUF (Receive
data buffer) but discarded; data in the RD1BUF are not affected.
Note:When a receive operation is disabled by setting UART1CR1<RXE> bit to “0”, the setting becomes valid when
data receive is completed. However, if a framing error occurs in data receive, the receive-disabling setting
may not become valid. If a framing error occurs, be sure to perform a re-receive operation.
Page 144
TMP86FS49AUG
12.9 Status Flag
12.9.1 Parity Error
When parity determined using the receive data bits differs from the received parity bit, the parity error flag
UART1SR<PERR> is set to “1”. The UART1SR<PERR> is cleared to “0” when the RD1BUF is read after
reading the UART1SR.
RXD1 pin
Shift register
Parity
Stop
pxxxx0*
xxxx0**
1pxxxx0
UART1SR<PERR>
After reading UART1SR then
RD1BUF clears PERR.
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-5 Generation of Parity Error
12.9.2 Framing Error
When “0” is sampled as the stop bit in the receive data, framing error flag UART1SR<FERR> is set to “1”.
The UART1SR<FERR> is cleared to “0” when the RD1BUF is read after reading the UART1SR.
RXD1 pin
Shift register
Stop
Final bit
xxxx0*
xxx0**
0xxxx0
After reading UART1SR then
RD1BUF clears FERR.
UART1SR<FERR>
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-6 Generation of Framing Error
12.9.3 Overrun Error
When all bits in the next data are received while unread data are still in RD1BUF, overrun error flag
UART1SR<OERR> is set to “1”. In this case, the receive data is discarded; data in RD1BUF are not affected.
The UART1SR<OERR> is cleared to “0” when the RD1BUF is read after reading the UART1SR.
Page 145
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.9 Status Flag
TMP86FS49AUG
UART1SR<RBFL>
RXD1 pin
Stop
Final bit
Shift register
xxx0**
RD1BUF
yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
UART1SR<OERR>
After reading UART1SR then
RD1BUF clears OERR.
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-7 Generation of Overrun Error
Note:Receive operations are disabled until the overrun error flag UART1SR<OERR> is cleared.
12.9.4 Receive Data Buffer Full
Loading the received data in RD1BUF sets receive data buffer full flag UART1SR<RBFL> to "1". The
UART1SR<RBFL> is cleared to “0” when the RD1BUF is read after reading the UART1SR.
RXD1 pin
Stop
Final bit
Shift register
xxx0**
RD1BUF
yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
xxxx
After reading UART1SR then
RD1BUF clears RBFL.
UART1SR<RBFL>
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-8 Generation of Receive Data Buffer Full
Note:If the overrun error flag UART1SR<OERR> is set during the period between reading the UART1SR and reading the RD1BUF, it cannot be cleared by only reading the RD1BUF. Therefore, after reading the RD1BUF,
read the UART1SR again to check whether or not the overrun error flag which should have been cleared still
remains set.
12.9.5 Transmit Data Buffer Empty
When no data is in the transmit buffer TD1BUF, that is, when data in TD1BUF are transferred to the transmit
shift register and data transmit starts, transmit data buffer empty flag UART1SR<TBEP> is set to “1”. The
UART1SR<TBEP> is cleared to “0” when the TD1BUF is written after reading the UART1SR.
Page 146
TMP86FS49AUG
Data write
TD1BUF
xxxx
*****1
Shift register
TXD1 pin
Data write
zzzz
yyyy
1xxxx0
*1xxxx
****1x
*****1
Start
Bit 0
Final bit
Stop
1yyyy0
UART1SR<TBEP>
After reading UART1SR writing
TD1BUF clears TBEP.
INTTXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-9 Generation of Transmit Data Buffer Empty
12.9.6 Transmit End Flag
When data are transmitted and no data is in TD1BUF (UART1SR<TBEP> = “1”), transmit end flag
UART1SR<TEND> is set to “1”. The UART1SR<TEND> is cleared to “0” when the data transmit is started
after writing the TD1BUF.
Shift register
TXD1 pin
***1xx
****1x
*****1
1yyyy0
Stop
Start
*1yyyy
Bit 0
Data write for TD1BUF
UART1SR<TBEP>
UART1SR<TEND>
INTTXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-10 Generation of Transmit End Flag and Transmit Data Buffer Empty
Page 147
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.9 Status Flag
TMP86FS49AUG
Page 148
TMP86FS49AUG
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART2 )
13.1 Configuration
UART control register 1
Transmit data buffer
UART2CR1
TD2BUF
3
Receive data buffer
RD2BUF
2
INTTXD2
Receive control circuit
Transmit control circuit
2
Shift register
Shift register
Parity bit
Stop bit
Noise rejection
circuit
RXD2
TXD2
INTRXD2
Transmit/receive clock
Y
M
P
X
S
fc/13
fc/26
fc/52
fc/104
fc/208
fc/416
INTTC5
fc/96
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
6
fc/2
fc/27
8
fc/2
S
2
Y
4
2
Counter
UART2SR
UART2CR2
UART status register
UART control register 2
MPX: Multiplexer
Baud rate generator
Figure 13-1 UART2 (Asynchronous Serial Interface)
Page 149
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART2 )
13.2 Control
TMP86FS49AUG
13.2 Control
UART2 is controlled by the UART2 Control Registers (UART2CR1, UART2CR2). The operating status can be
monitored using the UART status register (UART2SR).
UART2 Control Register1
UART2CR1
(0F98H)
7
6
5
4
3
TXE
RXE
STBT
EVEN
PE
2
1
0
BRG
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
TXE
Transfer operation
0:
1:
Disable
Enable
RXE
Receive operation
0:
1:
Disable
Enable
STBT
Transmit stop bit length
0:
1:
1 bit
2 bits
EVEN
Even-numbered parity
0:
1:
Odd-numbered parity
Even-numbered parity
Parity addition
0:
1:
No parity
Parity
PE
BRG
000:
001:
010:
011:
100:
101:
110:
111:
Transmit clock select
Write
only
fc/13 [Hz]
fc/26
fc/52
fc/104
fc/208
fc/416
TC5 ( Input INTTC5)
fc/96
Note 1: When operations are disabled by setting TXE and RXE bit to “0”, the setting becomes valid when data transmit or receive
complete. When the transmit data is stored in the transmit data buffer, the data are not transmitted. Even if data transmit is
enabled, until new data are written to the transmit data buffer, the current data are not transmitted.
Note 2: The transmit clock and the parity are common to transmit and receive.
Note 3: UART2CR1<RXE> and UART2CR1<TXE> should be set to “0” before UART2CR1<BRG> is changed.
UART2 Control Register2
UART2CR2
(0F99H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RXDNC
RXDNC
Selection of RXD input noise
rejection time
STOPBR
Receive stop bit length
00:
01:
10:
11:
0:
1:
STOPBR
(Initial value: **** *000)
No noise rejection (Hysteresis input)
Rejects pulses shorter than 31/fc [s] as noise
Rejects pulses shorter than 63/fc [s] as noise
Rejects pulses shorter than 127/fc [s] as noise
Write
only
1 bit
2 bits
Note: When UART2CR2<RXDNC> = “01”, pulses longer than 96/fc [s] are always regarded as signals; when
UART2CR2<RXDNC> = “10”, longer than 192/fc [s]; and when UART2CR2<RXDNC> = “11”, longer than 384/fc [s].
Page 150
TMP86FS49AUG
UART2 Status Register
UART2SR
(0F98H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PERR
FERR
OERR
RBFL
TEND
TBEP
0
(Initial value: 0000 11**)
PERR
Parity error flag
0:
1:
No parity error
Parity error
FERR
Framing error flag
0:
1:
No framing error
Framing error
OERR
Overrun error flag
0:
1:
No overrun error
Overrun error
RBFL
Receive data buffer full flag
0:
1:
Receive data buffer empty
Receive data buffer full
TEND
Transmit end flag
0:
1:
On transmitting
Transmit end
TBEP
Transmit data buffer empty flag
0:
1:
Transmit data buffer full (Transmit data writing is finished)
Transmit data buffer empty
Note: When an INTTXD is generated, TBEP flag is set to "1" automatically.
UART2 Receive Data Buffer
RD2BUF
(0F9AH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read only
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
UART2 Transmit Data Buffer
TD2BUF
(0F9AH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Write only
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Page 151
Read
only
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART2 )
13.3 Transfer Data Format
TMP86FS49AUG
13.3 Transfer Data Format
In UART2, an one-bit start bit (Low level), stop bit (Bit length selectable at high level, by UART2CR1<STBT>),
and parity (Select parity in UART2CR1<PE>; even- or odd-numbered parity by UART2CR1<EVEN>) are added to
the transfer data. The transfer data formats are shown as follows.
PE
STBT
0
Frame Length
8
1
2
3
9
10
0
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
0
1
Start
Bit 0
1
0
Start
1
1
Start
11
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Stop 2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
12
Stop 2
Figure 13-2 Transfer Data Format
Without parity / 1 STOP bit
With parity / 1 STOP bit
Without parity / 2 STOP bit
With parity / 2 STOP bit
Figure 13-3 Caution on Changing Transfer Data Format
Note: In order to switch the transfer data format, perform transmit operations in the above Figure 13-3 sequence except
for the initial setting.
Page 152
TMP86FS49AUG
13.4 Transfer Rate
The baud rate of UART2 is set of UART2CR1<BRG>. The example of the baud rate are shown as follows.
Table 13-1 Transfer Rate (Example)
Source Clock
BRG
16 MHz
8 MHz
4 MHz
000
76800 [baud]
38400 [baud]
19200 [baud]
001
38400
19200
9600
010
19200
9600
4800
011
9600
4800
2400
100
4800
2400
1200
101
2400
1200
600
When TC5 is used as the UART2 transfer rate (when UART2CR1<BRG> = “110”), the transfer clock and transfer
rate are determined as follows:
Transfer clock [Hz] = TC5 source clock [Hz] / TTREG5 setting value
Transfer Rate [baud] = Transfer clock [Hz] / 16
13.5 Data Sampling Method
The UART2 receiver keeps sampling input using the clock selected by UART2CR1<BRG> until a start bit is
detected in RXD2 pin input. RT clock starts detecting “L” level of the RXD2 pin. Once a start bit is detected, the
start bit, data bits, stop bit(s), and parity bit are sampled at three times of RT7, RT8, and RT9 during one receiver
clock interval (RT clock). (RT0 is the position where the bit supposedly starts.) Bit is determined according to majority rule (The data are the same twice or more out of three samplings).
RXD2 pin
Start bit
RT0
1
2
3
Bit 0
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
RT clock
Start bit
Internal receive data
Bit 0
(a) Without noise rejection circuit
RXD2 pin
Start bit
RT0
1
2
3
Bit 0
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
1
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit
Bit 0
(b) With noise rejection circuit
Figure 13-4 Data Sampling Method
Page 153
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART2 )
13.6 STOP Bit Length
TMP86FS49AUG
13.6 STOP Bit Length
Select a transmit stop bit length (1 bit or 2 bits) by UART2CR1<STBT>.
13.7 Parity
Set parity / no parity by UART2CR1<PE> and set parity type (Odd- or Even-numbered) by
UART2CR1<EVEN>.
13.8 Transmit/Receive Operation
13.8.1 Data Transmit Operation
Set UART2CR1<TXE> to “1”. Read UART2SR to check UART2SR<TBEP> = “1”, then write data in
TD2BUF (Transmit data buffer). Writing data in TD2BUF zero-clears UART2SR<TBEP>, transfers the data
to the transmit shift register and the data are sequentially output from the TXD2 pin. The data output include a
one-bit start bit, stop bits whose number is specified in UART2CR1<STBT> and a parity bit if parity addition
is specified. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART2CR1<BRG>. When data transmit starts, transmit
buffer empty flag UART2SR<TBEP> is set to “1” and an INTTXD2 interrupt is generated.
While UART2CR1<TXE> = “0” and from when “1” is written to UART2CR1<TXE> to when send data are
written to TD2BUF, the TXD2 pin is fixed at high level.
When transmitting data, first read UART2SR, then write data in TD2BUF. Otherwise, UART2SR<TBEP> is
not zero-cleared and transmit does not start.
13.8.2 Data Receive Operation
Set UART2CR1<RXE> to “1”. When data are received via the RXD2 pin, the receive data are transferred to
RD2BUF (Receive data buffer). At this time, the data transmitted includes a start bit and stop bit(s) and a parity
bit if parity addition is specified. When stop bit(s) are received, data only are extracted and transferred to
RD2BUF (Receive data buffer). Then the receive buffer full flag UART2SR<RBFL> is set and an INTRXD2
interrupt is generated. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART2CR1<BRG>.
If an overrun error (OERR) occurs when data are received, the data are not transferred to RD2BUF (Receive
data buffer) but discarded; data in the RD2BUF are not affected.
Note:When a receive operation is disabled by setting UART2CR1<RXE> bit to “0”, the setting becomes valid when
data receive is completed. However, if a framing error occurs in data receive, the receive-disabling setting
may not become valid. If a framing error occurs, be sure to perform a re-receive operation.
Page 154
TMP86FS49AUG
13.9 Status Flag
13.9.1 Parity Error
When parity determined using the receive data bits differs from the received parity bit, the parity error flag
UART2SR<PERR> is set to “1”. The UART2SR<PERR> is cleared to “0” when the RD2BUF is read after
reading the UART2SR.
RXD2 pin
Shift register
Parity
Stop
pxxxx0*
xxxx0**
1pxxxx0
UART2SR<PERR>
After reading UART2SR then
RD2BUF clears PERR.
INTRXD2 interrupt
Figure 13-5 Generation of Parity Error
13.9.2 Framing Error
When “0” is sampled as the stop bit in the receive data, framing error flag UART2SR<FERR> is set to “1”.
The UART2SR<FERR> is cleared to “0” when the RD2BUF is read after reading the UART2SR.
RXD2 pin
Shift register
Stop
Final bit
xxxx0*
xxx0**
0xxxx0
After reading UART2SR then
RD2BUF clears FERR.
UART2SR<FERR>
INTRXD2 interrupt
Figure 13-6 Generation of Framing Error
13.9.3 Overrun Error
When all bits in the next data are received while unread data are still in RD2BUF, overrun error flag
UART2SR<OERR> is set to “1”. In this case, the receive data is discarded; data in RD2BUF are not affected.
The UART2SR<OERR> is cleared to “0” when the RD2BUF is read after reading the UART2SR.
Page 155
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART2 )
13.9 Status Flag
TMP86FS49AUG
UART2SR<RBFL>
RXD2 pin
Stop
Final bit
Shift register
xxx0**
RD2BUF
yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
UART2SR<OERR>
After reading UART2SR then
RD2BUF clears OERR.
INTRXD2 interrupt
Figure 13-7 Generation of Overrun Error
Note:Receive operations are disabled until the overrun error flag UART2SR<OERR> is cleared.
13.9.4 Receive Data Buffer Full
Loading the received data in RD2BUF sets receive data buffer full flag UART2SR<RBFL> to "1". The
UART2SR<RBFL> is cleared to “0” when the RD2BUF is read after reading the UART2SR.
RXD2 pin
Stop
Final bit
Shift register
xxx0**
RD2BUF
yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
xxxx
After reading UART2SR then
RD2BUF clears RBFL.
UART2SR<RBFL>
INTRXD2 interrupt
Figure 13-8 Generation of Receive Data Buffer Full
Note:If the overrun error flag UART2SR<OERR> is set during the period between reading the UART2SR and reading the RD2BUF, it cannot be cleared by only reading the RD2BUF. Therefore, after reading the RD2BUF,
read the UART2SR again to check whether or not the overrun error flag which should have been cleared still
remains set.
13.9.5 Transmit Data Buffer Empty
When no data is in the transmit buffer TD2BUF, that is, when data in TD2BUF are transferred to the transmit
shift register and data transmit starts, transmit data buffer empty flag UART2SR<TBEP> is set to “1”. The
UART2SR<TBEP> is cleared to “0” when the TD2BUF is written after reading the UART2SR.
Page 156
TMP86FS49AUG
Data write
TD2BUF
xxxx
*****1
Shift register
TXD2 pin
Data write
zzzz
yyyy
1xxxx0
*1xxxx
****1x
*****1
Start
Bit 0
Final bit
Stop
1yyyy0
UART2SR<TBEP>
After reading UART2SR writing
TD2BUF clears TBEP.
INTTXD2 interrupt
Figure 13-9 Generation of Transmit Data Buffer Empty
13.9.6 Transmit End Flag
When data are transmitted and no data is in TD2BUF (UART2SR<TBEP> = “1”), transmit end flag
UART2SR<TEND> is set to “1”. The UART2SR<TEND> is cleared to “0” when the data transmit is started
after writing the TD2BUF.
Shift register
TXD2 pin
***1xx
****1x
*****1
1yyyy0
Stop
Start
*1yyyy
Bit 0
Data write for TD2BUF
UART2SR<TBEP>
UART2SR<TEND>
INTTXD2 interrupt
Figure 13-10 Generation of Transmit End Flag and Transmit Data Buffer Empty
Page 157
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART2 )
13.9 Status Flag
TMP86FS49AUG
Page 158
TMP86FS49AUG
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
The serial interfaces connect to an external device via SI1, SO1, and SCK1 pins.
When these pins are used as serial interface, the output latches for each port should be set to "1".
14.1 Configuration
Internal data bus
SIO1CR
SIO1SR
SIO1TDB
Shift register on transmitter
Shift clock
Port
(Note)
Control circuit
SO1 pin
(Serial data output)
MSB/LSB
selection
Port
(Note)
Shift register on receiver
SI1 pin
(Serial data input)
SIO1RDB
To BUS
Port
(Note)
INTSIO1
interrupt
SCK1 pin
(Serial data output)
Internal clock
input
Note: Set the register of port correctly for the port assigned as serial interface pins.
For details, see the description of the input/output port control register.
Figure 14-1 Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
Page 159
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.2 Control
TMP86FS49AUG
14.2 Control
The SIO is controlled using the serial interface control register (SIO1CR). The operating status of the serial interface can be inspected by reading the status register (SIO1CR).
Serial Interface Control Register
SIO1CR
(0020H)
7
6
SIOS
SIOINH
SIOS
SIOINH
SIOM
SIODIR
5
4
SIOM
3
2
SIODIR
1
0
SCK
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Specify start/stop of transfer
0: Stop
1: Start
Forcibly stops transfer (Note 1)
0: –
1: Forcibly stop (Automatically cleared to "0" after stopping)
Selects transfer mode
00: Transmit mode
01: Receive mode
10: Transmit/receive mode
11: Reserved
Selects direction of transfer
0: MSB (Transfer beginning with bit7)
1: LSB (Transfer beginning with bit0)
NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 modes
SCK
Selects serial clock
SLOW/SLEEP
mode
TBTCR
<DV7CK> = "0"
TBTCR
<DV7CK> = "1"
000
fc/212
fs/24
fs/24
001
fc/28
fc/28
Reserved
010
fc/27
fc/27
Reserved
011
fc/26
fc/26
Reserved
100
fc/25
fc/25
Reserved
101
fc/24
fc/24
Reserved
110
fc/23
fc/23
Reserved
111
R/W
External clock (Input from SCK1 pin)
Note 1: When SIO1CR<SIOINH> is set to “1”, SIO1CR<SIOS>, SIO1SR register, SIO1RDB register and SIO1TDB register are
initialized.
Note 2: Transfer mode, direction of transfer and serial clock must be select during the transfer is stopping (when SIO1SR<SIOF>
"0").
Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don’t care
Page 160
TMP86FS49AUG
Serial Interface Status Register
SIO1SR
(0021H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
SIOF
SEF
TXF
RXF
TXERR
RXERR
1
0
(Initial value: 0010 00**)
SIOF
Serial transfer operation status
monitor
0: Transfer finished
1: Transfer in progress
SEF
Number of clocks monitor
0: 8 clocks
1: 1 to 7 clocks
TXF
Transmit buffer empty flag
0: Data exists in transmit buffer
1: No data exists in transmit buffer
RXF
Receive buffer full flag
0: No data exists in receive buffer
1: Data exists in receive buffer
Transfer operation error flag
Read
0: – (No error exist)
1: Transmit buffer under run occurs in an external clock mode
Write
0: Clear the flag
1: – (A write of "1" to this bit is ignored)
Receive operation error flag
Read
0: – (No error exist)
1: Receive buffer over run occurs in an external clock mode
Write
0: Clear the flag
1: – (A write of "1" to this bit is ignored)
TXERR
RXERR
Read
only
R/W
Note 1: The operation error flag (TXERR and RXERR) are not automatically cleared by stopping transfer with SIO1CR<SIOS>
"0". Therefore, set these bits to "0" for clearing these error flag. Or set SIO1CR<SIOINH> to "1".
Note 2: *: Don't care
Receive buffer register
SIO1RDB
(0022H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read only
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Transmit buffer register
SIO1TDB
(0022H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Write only
(Initial value: **** ****)
Note 1: SIO1TDB is write only register. A bit manipulation should not be performed on the transmit buffer register using a readmodify-write instruction.
Note 2: The SIO1TDB should be written after checking SIO1SR<TXF> "1". When SIO1SR<TXF> is "0", the writing data can't be
transferred to SIO1TDB even if write instruction is executed to SIO1TDB
Note 3: *: Don't care
Page 161
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
14.3 Function
14.3.1 Serial clock
14.3.1.1 Clock source
The serial clock can be selected by using SIO1CR<SCK>. When the serial clock is changed, the writing
instruction to SIO1CR<SCK> should be executed while the transfer is stopped (when SIO1SR<SIOF>
“0”)
(1)
Internal clock
Setting the SIO1CR<SCK> to other than “111B” outputs the clock (shown in " Table 14-1 Serial
Clock Rate (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768kHz) ") as serial clock outputs from SCK1 pin. At the before
beginning or finishing of a transfer, SCK1 pin is kept in high level.
When writing (in the transmit mode) or reading (in the receive mode) data can not follow the serial
clock rate, an automatic-wait function is executed to stop the serial clock automatically and hold the
next shift operation until reading or writing is completed (shown in " Figure 14-2 Automatic-wait
Function (Example of transmit mode) "). The maximum time from releasing the automatic-wait
function by reading or writing a data is 1 cycle of the selected serial clock until the serial clock comes
out from SCK1 pin.
SIO1CR<SIOS>
Automatically wait
SCK1 pin output
SO1 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
SIO1TDB
A0
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
A
B
Automatic wait is released by writing SIO1TDB
Figure 14-2 Automatic-wait Function (Example of transmit mode)
Table 14-1 Serial Clock Rate (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768kHz)
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode
TBTCR<DV7CK> = "0"
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode
TBTCR<DV7CK> = "1"
Serial Clock
Baud Rate
2048 bps
fs/24
2048 bps
fc/28
62.5 kbps
Reserved
–
125 kbps
fc/27
125 kbps
Reserved
–
fc/26
250 kbps
fc/26
250 kbps
Reserved
–
100
fc/25
500 kbps
fc/25
500 kbps
Reserved
–
101
fc/24
1.00 Mbps
fc/24
1.00 Mbps
Reserved
–
110
fc/23
2.00 Mbps
fc/23
2.00 Mbps
Reserved
SCK
Serial Clock
Baud Rate
Serial Clock
Baud Rate
000
fc/212
3.906 kbps
fs/24
001
fc/28
62.5 kbps
010
fc/27
011
Page 162
TMP86FS49AUG
(2)
External clock
When an external clock is selected by setting SIO1CR<SCK> to “111B”, the clock via the SCK1
pin from an external source is used as the serial clock.
To ensure shift operation, the serial clock pulse width must be 4/fc or more for both “H” and “L”
levels.
SCK1 pin
tSCKL
tSCKH
tSCKL, tSCKH > 4/fc
Figure 14-3 External Clock
14.3.1.2 Shift edge
The leading edge is used to transmit data, and the trailing edge is used to receive data.
(1)
Leading edge shift
Data is shifted on the leading edge of the serial clock (falling edge of the SCK1 pin input/output).
(2)
Trailing edge shift
Data is shifted on the trailing edge of the serial clock (rising edge of the SCK1 pin input/output).
SIO1CR<SIOS>
SCK1 pin
Shift register
01234567
*0123456
**012345
***01234
****0123
*****012
******01
*******0
********
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit1
Bit0
Shift out
SO1 pin
Bit7
(a) Leading edge shift (Example of MSB transfer)
SIO1CR<SIOS>
SCK1 pin
SI1 pin
Shift register
Bit7
********
Bit6
7*******
Bit5
67******
Bit4
567*****
Bit3
4567****
Bit2
34567***
234567**
(b) Trailing edge shift (Example of MSB transfer)
Figure 14-4 Shift Edge
Page 163
1234567*
01234567
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
14.3.2 Transfer bit direction
Transfer data direction can be selected by using SIO1CR<SIODIR>. The transfer data direction can't be set
individually for transmit and receive operations.
When the data direction is changed, the writing instruction to SIO1CR<SIODIR> should be executed while
the transfer is stopped (when SIO1CR<SIOF>= “0”)
SIOCR<SIOS>
SCK1 pin
SIO1TDB
A
Shift out
SO1 pin
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
A4
A5
A6
A7
(a) MSB transfer
SIO1CR<SIOS>
SCK1 pin
SIO1TDB
A
Shift out
SO1 pin
A0
A1
A2
A3
(b) LSB transfer
Figure 14-5 Transfer Bit Direction (Example of transmit mode)
14.3.2.1 Transmit mode
(1)
MSB transmit mode
MSB transmit mode is selected by setting SIO1CR<SIODIR> to “0”, in which case the data is
transferred sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (Bit7).
(2)
LSB transmit mode
LSB transmit mode is selected by setting SIO1CR<SIODIR> to “1”, in which case the data is
transferred sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (Bit0).
14.3.2.2 Receive mode
(1)
MSB receive mode
MSB receive mode is selected by setting SIO1CR<SIODIR> to “0”, in which case the data is
received sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (Bit7).
Page 164
TMP86FS49AUG
(2)
LSB receive mode
LSB receive mode is selected by setting SIO1CR<SIODIR> to “1”, in which case the data is
received sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (Bit0).
14.3.2.3 Transmit/receive mode
(1)
MSB transmit/receive mode
MSB transmit/receive mode are selected by setting SIO1CR<SIODIR> to “0” in which case the
data is transferred sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (Bit7) and the data is received
sequentially beginning with the most significant (Bit7).
(2)
LSB transmit/receive mode
LSB transmit/receive mode are selected by setting SIO1CR<SIODIR> to “1”, in which case the
data is transferred sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (Bit0) and the data is received
sequentially beginning with the least significant (Bit0).
14.3.3 Transfer modes
Transmit, receive and transmit/receive mode are selected by using SIO1CR<SIOM>.
14.3.3.1 Transmit mode
Transmit mode is selected by writing “00B” to SIO1CR<SIOM>.
(1)
Starting the transmit operation
Transmit mode is selected by setting “00B” to SIO1CR<SIOM>. Serial clock is selected by using
SIO1CR<SCK>. Transfer direction is selected by using SIO1CR<SIODIR>.
When a transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register (SIO1TDB), SIO1SR<TXF> is
cleared to “0”.
After SIO1CR<SIOS> is set to “1”, SIO1SR<SIOF> is set synchronously to “1” the falling edge of
SCK1 pin.
The data is transferred sequentially starting from SO1 pin with the direction of the bit specified by
SIO1CR<SIODIR>, synchronizing with the SCK1 pin's falling edge.
SIO1SR<SEF> is kept in high level, between the first clock falling edge of SCK1 pin and eighth
clock falling edge.
SIO1SR<TXF> is set to “1” at the rising edge of pin after the data written to the SIO1TDB is
transferred to shift register, then the INTSIO1 interrupt request is generated, synchronizing with the
next falling edge on SCK1 pin.
Note 1: In internal clock operation, when SIO1CR<SIOS> is set to "1", transfer mode does not start without writing a transmit data to the transmit buffer register (SIO1TDB).
Note 2: In internal clock operation, when the SIO1CR<SIOS> is set to "1", SIO1TDB is transferred to
shift register after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock frequency, then a serial clock is output from
SCK1 pin.
Note 3: In external clock operation, when the falling edge is input from SCK1 pin after SIO1CR<SIOS> is
set to "1", SIO1TDB is transferred to shift register immediately.
Page 165
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
(2)
During the transmit operation
When data is written to SIO1TDB, SIO1SR<TXF> is cleared to “0”.
In internal clock operation, in case a next transmit data is not written to SIO1TDB, the serial clock
stops to “H” level by an automatic-wait function when all of the bit set in the SIO1TDB has been
transmitted. Automatic-wait function is released by writing a transmit data to SIO1TDB. Then, transmit operation is restarted after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock.
When the next data is written to the SIO1TDB before termination of previous 8-bit data with
SIO1SR<TXF> “1”, the next data is continuously transferred after transmission of previous data.
In external clock operation, after SIO1SR<TXF> is set to “1”, the transmit data must be written to
SIO1TDB before the shift operation of the next data begins.
If the transmit data is not written to SIO1TDB, transmit error occurs immediately after shift operation is started. Then, INTSIO1 interrupt request is generated after SIO1SR<TXERR> is set to “1”.
(3)
Stopping the transmit operation
There are two ways for stopping transmits operation.
• The way of clearing SIO1CR<SIOS>.
When SIO1CR<SIOS> is cleared to “0”, transmit operation is stopped after all transfer of the
data is finished. When transmit operation is finished, SIO1SR<SIOF> is cleared to “0” and
SO1 pin is kept in high level.
In external clock operation, SIO1CR<SIOS> must be cleared to “0” before SIO1SR<SEF> is
set to “1” by beginning next transfer.
• The way of setting SIO1CR<SIOINH>.
Transmit operation is stopped immediately after SIO1CR<SIOINH> is set to “1”. In this
case, SIO1CR<SIOS>, SIO1SR register, SIO1RDB register and SIO1TDB register are initialized.
Clearing SIOS
SIO1CR<SIOS>
SIO1SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO1SR<SEF>
SCK1 pin outout
Automatic wait
SO1 pin
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
SIO1SR<TXF>
INTSIO1
interrupt
request
SIO1TDB
A
C
B
Writing transmit
data C
Writing transmit Writing transmit
data A
data B
Figure 14-6 Example of Internal Clock and MSB Transmit Mode
Page 166
TMP86FS49AUG
Writing transmit data
Clearing SIOS
SIO1CR<SIOS>
SIO1SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO1SR<SEF>
SCK1 pin
SO1 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SIO1SR<TXF>
INTSIO1
interrupt
request
SIO1TDB <SIOS>
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Writing transmit
data B
C
Writing transmit
data C
Figure 14-7 Exaple of External Clock and MSB Transmit Mode
SCK1 pin
SIO1SR<SIOF>
SO1 pin
tSODH
4/fc < tSODH < 8/fc
Figure 14-8 Hold Time of the End of Transmit Mode
(4)
Transmit error processing
Transmit errors occur on the following situation.
• Shift operation starts before writing next transmit data to SIO1TDB in external clock operation.
If transmit errors occur during transmit operation, SIO1SR<TXERR> is set to “1” immediately after starting shift operation. Synchronizing with the next serial clock falling edge,
INTSIO1 interrupt request is generated.
If shift operation starts before writing data to SIO1TDB after SIO1CR<SIOS> is set to “1”,
SIO1SR<TXERR> is set to “1” immediately after shift operation is started and then
INTSIO1 interrupt request is generated.
SIO1 pin is kept in high level when SIO1SR<TXERR> is set to “1”. When transmit error
occurs, transmit operation must be forcibly stop by writing SIO1CR<SIOINH> to “1”. In
this case, SIO1CR<SIOS>, SIO1SR register, SIO1RDB register and SIO1TDB register are
initialized.
Page 167
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
SIO1CR<SIOS>
SIO1SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO1SR<SEF>
SCK1 pin
SO1 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
SIO1SR<TXF>
SIO1SR<TXERR>
INTSIO1
interrupt
request
SIO1TDB
SIO1CR
<SIOINH>
A
Writing transmit
data A
B
Unknown
Writing transmit
data B
Figure 14-9 Example of Transmit Error Processingme
14.3.3.2 Receive mode
The receive mode is selected by writing “01B” to SIO1CR<SIOM>.
(1)
Starting the receive operation
Receive mode is selected by setting “01” to SIO1CR<SIOM>. Serial clock is selected by using
SIO1CR<SCK>. Transfer direction is selected by using SIO1CR<SIODIR>.
After SIO1CR<SIOS> is set to “1”, SIO1SR<SIOF> is set synchronously to “1” the falling edge of
SCK1 pin.
Synchronizing with the SCK1 pin's rising edge, the data is received sequentially from SI1 pin with
the direction of the bit specified by SBI1DIR<SIODIR>.
SIO1SR<SEF> is kept in high level, between the first clock falling edge of SCK1 pin and eighth
clock falling edge.
When 8-bit data is received, the data is transferred to SIO1RDB from shift register. INTSIO1 interrupt request is generated and SIO1SR<RXF> is set to “1”
Note: In internal clock operation, when the SIO1CR<SIOS> is set to "1", the serial clock is generated
from SCK1 pin after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock frequency.
(2)
During the receive operation
The SIO1SR<RXF> is cleared to “0” by reading a data from SIO1RDB.
In the internal clock operation, the serial clock stops to “H” level by an automatic-wait function
when the all of the 8-bit data has been received. Automatic-wait function is released by reading a
received data from SIO1RDB. Then, receive operation is restarted after maximum 1-cycle of serial
clock.
In external clock operation, after SIO1SR<RXF> is set to “1”, the received data must be read from
SIO1RDB, before the next data shift-in operation is finished.
Page 168
TMP86FS49AUG
If received data is not read out from SIO1RDB receive error occurs immediately after shift operation is finished. Then INTSIO1 interrupt request is generated after SIO1SR<RXERR> is set to “1”.
(3)
Stopping the receive operation
There are two ways for stopping the receive operation.
• The way of clearing SIO1CR<SIOS>.
When SIO1CR<SIOS> is cleared to “0”, receive operation is stopped after all of the data is
finished to receive. When receive operation is finished, SIO1SR<SIOF> is cleared to “0”.
In external clock operation, SIO1CR<SIOS> must be cleared to “0” before SIO1SR<SEF> is
set to “1” by starting the next shift operation.
• The way of setting SIO1CR<SIOINH>.
Receive operation is stopped immediately after SIO1CR<SIOINH> is set to “1”. In this case,
SIO1CR<SIOS>, SIO1SR register, SIO1RDB register and SIO1TDB register are initialized.
Clearing SIOS
SIO1CR<SIOS>
SIO1SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO1SR<SEF>
SCK1 pin
SI1 pin
Automatic wait
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A0
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
SIO1SR<RXF>
INTSIO1
interrupt
request
SIO1RDB
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Writing transmit
data B
Figure 14-10 Example of Internal Clock and MSB Receive Mode
Page 169
C
Writing transmit
data C
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
Reading received data
Clearing SIOS
SIO1CR<SIOS>
SIO1SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO1SR<SEF>
SCK1 pin
SI1 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SIO1SR<RXF>
INTSIO1
interrupt
request
SIO1RDB
A
Writing transmit
data A
B
C
Writing transmit
data B
Writing transmit
data C
Figure 14-11 Example of External Clock and MSB Receive Mode
(4)
Receive error processing
Receive errors occur on the following situation. To protect SIO1RDB and the shift register contents, the received data is ignored while the SIO1SR<RXERR> is “1”.
• Shift operation is finished before reading out received data from SIO1RDB at
SIO1SR<RXF> is “1” in an external clock operation.
If receive error occurs, set the SIO1CR<SIOS> to “0” for reading the data that received
immediately before error occurence. And read the data from SIO1RDB. Data in shift register
(at errors occur) can be read by reading the SIO1RDB again.
When SIO1SR<RXERR> is cleared to “0” after reading the received data, SIO1SR<RXF> is
cleared to “0”.
After clearing SIO1CR<SIOS> to “0”, when 8-bit serial clock is input to SCK1 pin, receive
operation is stopped. To restart the receive operation, confirm that SIO1SR<SIOF> is cleared
to “0”.
If the receive error occurs, set the SIO1CR<SIOINH> to “1” for stopping the receive operation immediately. In this case, SIO1CR<SIOS>, SIO1SR register, SIO1RDB register and
SIO1TDB register are initialized.
Page 170
TMP86FS49AUG
SIO1CR<SIOS>
SIO1SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO1SR<SEF>
SCK1 pin
SI1 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SIO1SR<RXF>
SIO1SR<RXERR>
Write a "0" after reading the
received data when a receive
error occurs.
INTSIO1
interrupt
request
SIO1RDB
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Writing transmit
data B
Figure 14-12 Example of Receive Error Processing
Note: If receive error is not corrected, an interrupt request does not generate after the error occurs.
14.3.3.3 Transmit/receive mode
The transmit/receive mode are selected by writing “10” to SIO1CR<SIOM>.
(1)
Starting the transmit/receive operation
Transmit/receive mode is selected by writing “10B” to SIO1CR<SIOM>. Serial clock is selected
by using SIO1CR<SCK>. Transfer direction is selected by using SIO1CR<SIODIR>.
When a transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register (SIO1TDB), SIO1SR<TXF> is
cleared to “0”.
After SIO1CR<SIOS> is set to “1”, SIO1SR<SIOF> is set synchronously to the falling edge of
SCK1 pin.
The data is transferred sequentially starting from SO1 pin with the direction of the bit specified by
SIO1CR<SIODIR>, synchronizing with the SCK1 pin's falling edge. And receiving operation also
starts with the direction of the bit specified by SIO1CR<SIODIR>, synchronizing with the SCK1
pin's rising edge.
SIO1SR<SEF> is kept in high level between the first clock falling edge of SCK1 pin and eighth
clock falling edge.
SIO1SR<TXF> is set to “1” at the rising edge of SCK1 pin after the data written to the SIO1TDB is
transferred to shift register. When 8-bit data has been received, the received data is transferred to
SIO1RDB from shift register, then the INTSIO1 interrupt request occurs, synchronizing with setting
SIO1SR<RXF> to “1”.
Note 1: In internal clock operation, when the SIO1CR<SIOS> is set to "1", SIO1TDB is transferred to
shift register after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock frequency, then a serial clock is output from
SCK1 pin.
Note 2: In external clock operation, when the falling edge is input from SCK1 pin after SIO1CR<SIOS> is
set to "1", SIO1TDB is transferred to shift register immediately. When the rising edge is input
from SCK1 pin, receive operation also starts.
Page 171
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
(2)
During the transmit/receive operation
When data is written to SIO1TDB, SIO1SR<TXF> is cleared to “0” and when a data is read from
SIO1RDB, SIO1SR<RXF> is cleared to “0”.
In internal clock operation, in case of the condition described below, the serial clock stops to “H”
level by an automatic-wait function when all of the bit set in the data has been transmitted.
• Next transmit data is not written to SIO1TDB after reading a received data from SIO1RDB.
• Received data is not read from SIO1RDB after writing a next transmit data to SIO1TDB.
• Neither SIO1TDB nor SIO1RDB is accessed after transmission.
The automatic wait function is released by writing the next transmit data to SIO1TDB after reading
the received data from SIO1RDB, or reading the received data from SIO1RDB after writing the next
data to SIO1TDB.
Then, transmit/receive operation is restarted after maximum 1 cycle of serial clock.
In external clock operation, reading the received data from SIO1RDB and writing the next data to
SIO1TDB must be finished before the shift operation of the next data begins.
If the transmit data is not written to SIO1TDB after SIO1SR<TXF> is set to “1”, transmit error
occurs immediately after shift operation is started. When the transmit error occurred,
SIO1SR<TXERR> is set to “1”.
If received data is not read out from SIO1RDB before next shift operation starts after setting
SIO1SR<RXF> to “1”, receive error occurs immediately after shift operation is finished. When the
receive error has occurred, SIO1SR<RXERR> is set to “1”.
(3)
Stopping the transmit/receive operation
There are two ways for stopping the transmit/receive operation.
• The way of clearing SIO1CR<SIOS>.
When SIO1CR<SIOS> is cleared to “0”, transmit/receive operation is stopped after all transfer of the data is finished. When transmit/receive operation is finished, SIO1SR<SIOF> is
cleared to “0” and SO1 pin is kept in high level.
In external clock operation, SIO1CR<SIOS> must be cleared to “0” before SIO1SR<SEF> is
set to “1” by beginning next transfer.
• The way of setting SIO1CR<SIOINH>.
Transmit/receive operation is stopped immediately after SIO1CR<SIOINH> is set to “1”. In
this case, SIO1CR<SIOS>, SIO1SR register, SIO1RDB register and SIO1TDB register are
initialized.
Page 172
TMP86FS49AUG
Clearing SIOS
SIO1CR<SIOS>
SIO1SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO1SR<SEF>
SCK1 pin output
Automatic wait
Automatic wait
SO1 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A0
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
B0
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SI1 pin
INTSIO1
interrupt
request
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
D0
E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1
E0
F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
SIO1SR<TXF>
SIO1TDB
A
Writing transmit
data A
C
B
Writing transmit
data B
Writing transmit
data C
SIO1SR<RXF>
SIO1RDB
D
Reading received
data D
F
E
Reading received
data E
Reading received
data F
Figure 14-13 Example of Internal Clock and MSB Transmit/Receive Mode
Page 173
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
Reading received data
Writing transmit data
Clearing SIOS
SIO1CR<SIOS>
SIO1SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO1SR<SEF>
SCK1 pin output
SO1 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SI1 pin
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
INTSIO1
interrupt
request
SIO1SR<TXF>
SIO1TDB
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Writing transmit
data B
C
Writing transmit
data C
SIO1SR<RXF>
SIO1RDB
D
E
F
Reading received
data D
Reading received
data E
Reading received
data F
Figure 14-14 Example of External Clock and MSB Transmit/Receive Mode
(4)
Transmit/receive error processing
Transmit/receive errors occur on the following situation. Corrective action is different, which
errors occur transmits or receives.
(a) Transmit errors
Transmit errors occur on the following situation.
• Shift operation starts before writing next transmit data to SIO1TDB in external clock operation.
If transmit errors occur during transmit operation, SIO1SR<TXERR> is set to “1” immediately after starting shift operation. And INTSIO1 interrupt request is generated after all of the 8-bit data has been received.
If shift operation starts before writing data to SIO1TDB after SIO1CR<SIOS> is set to
“1”, SIO1SR<TXERR> is set immediately after starting shift operation. And INTSIO1
interrupt request is generated after all of the 8-bit data has been received.
SO1 pin is kept in high level when SIO1SR<TXERR> is set to “1”. When transmit error
occurs, transmit operation must be forcibly stop by writing SIO1CR<SIOINH> to “1”
after the received data is read from SIO1RDB. In this case, SIO1CR<SIOS>, SIO1SR
register, SIO1RDB register and SIO1TDB register are initialized.
Page 174
TMP86FS49AUG
SIO1CR<SIOS>
SIO1SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO1SR<SEF>
SCK1 pin output
SO1 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
SI1 pin
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
INTSIO1
interrupt
request
SIO1SR<TXF>
SIO1SR<TXERR>
SIO1TDB
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Unknown
Writing transmit
data B
SIO1SR<RXF>
SIO1RDB
D
Reading received
data D
E
Reading received
data E
F
Reading received
data F
SIO1CR<SIOINH>
Figure 14-15 Example of Transmit/Receive (Transmit) Error Processing
(b) Receive errors
Receive errors occur on the following situation. To protect SIO1RDB and the shift register
contents, the received data is ignored while the SIO1SR<RXERR> is “1”.
• Shift operation is finished before reading out received data from SIO1RDB at
SIO1SR<RXF> is “1” in an external clock operation.
If receive error occurs, set the SIO1CR<SIOS> to “0” for reading the data that received
immediately before error occurence. And read the data from SIO1RDB. Data in shift
register (at errors occur) can be read by reading the SIO1RDB again.
When SIO1SR<RXERR> is cleared to “0” after reading the received data,
SIO1SR<RXF> is cleared to “0”.
After clearing SIO1CR<SIOS> to “0”, when 8-bit serial clock is input to SCK1 pin, receive operation is stopped. To restart the receive operation, confirm that
SIO1SR<SIOF> is cleared to “0”.
If the received error occurs, set the SIO1CR<SIOINH> to “1” for stopping the receive
operation immediately. In this case, SIO1CR<SIOS>, SIO1SR register, SIO1RDB register and SIO1TDB register are initialized.
Page 175
14. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO1)
14.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
SIO1CR<SIOS>
SIO1SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO1SR<SEF>
SCK1 pin output
SO1 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3
SI1 pin
INTSIO1
interrupt
request
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
SIO1SR<TXF>
SIO1TDB
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Writing transmit
data B
Unknown
C
Writing transmit
data C
SIO1SR<RXF>
SIO1SR<RXERR>
SIO1RDB
D
E
Reading received
data D
OOH
Reading received
data E
SIO1CR<SIOINH>
Figure 14-16 Example of Transmit/Receive (Receive) Error Processing
Note: If receive error is not corrected, an interrupt request does not generate after the error
occurs.
SCK1 pin
SIO1SR<SIOF>
SO1 pin
tSODH
4/fc < tSODH < 8/fc
Figure 14-17 Hold Time of the End of Transmit/Receive Mode
Page 176
TMP86FS49AUG
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
The serial interfaces connect to an external device via SI2, SO2, and SCK2 pins.
When these pins are used as serial interface, the output latches for each port should be set to "1".
15.1 Configuration
Internal data bus
SIO2CR
SIO2SR
SIO2TDB
Shift register on transmitter
Shift clock
Port
(Note)
Control circuit
SO2 pin
(Serial data output)
MSB/LSB
selection
Port
(Note)
Shift register on receiver
SI2 pin
(Serial data input)
SIO2RDB
To BUS
Port
(Note)
INTSIO2
interrupt
SCK2 pin
(Serial data output)
Internal clock
input
Note: Set the register of port correctly for the port assigned as serial interface pins.
For details, see the description of the input/output port control register.
Figure 15-1 Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
Page 177
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.2 Control
TMP86FS49AUG
15.2 Control
The SIO is controlled using the serial interface control register (SIO2CR). The operating status of the serial interface can be inspected by reading the status register (SIO2CR).
Serial Interface Control Register
SIO2CR
(0031H)
7
6
SIOS
SIOINH
SIOS
SIOINH
SIOM
SIODIR
5
4
SIOM
3
2
SIODIR
1
0
SCK
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Specify start/stop of transfer
0: Stop
1: Start
Forcibly stops transfer (Note 1)
0: –
1: Forcibly stop (Automatically cleared to "0" after stopping)
Selects transfer mode
00: Transmit mode
01: Receive mode
10: Transmit/receive mode
11: Reserved
Selects direction of transfer
0: MSB (Transfer beginning with bit7)
1: LSB (Transfer beginning with bit0)
NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 modes
SCK
Selects serial clock
SLOW/SLEEP
mode
TBTCR
<DV7CK> = "0"
TBTCR
<DV7CK> = "1"
000
fc/212
fs/24
fs/24
001
fc/28
fc/28
Reserved
010
fc/2
7
7
Reserved
011
fc/26
fc/26
Reserved
100
fc/2
5
5
Reserved
101
fc/24
fc/24
Reserved
110
3
3
Reserved
111
fc/2
fc/2
fc/2
fc/2
R/W
External clock (Input from SCK2 pin)
Note 1: When SIO2CR<SIOINH> is set to “1”, SIO2CR<SIOS>, SIO2SR register, SIO2RDB register and SIO2TDB register are
initialized.
Note 2: Transfer mode, direction of transfer and serial clock must be select during the transfer is stopping (when SIO2SR<SIOF>
"0").
Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don’t care
Page 178
TMP86FS49AUG
Serial Interface Status Register
SIO2SR
(0032H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
SIOF
SEF
TXF
RXF
TXERR
RXERR
1
0
(Initial value: 0010 00**)
SIOF
Serial transfer operation status
monitor
0: Transfer finished
1: Transfer in progress
SEF
Number of clocks monitor
0: 8 clocks
1: 1 to 7 clocks
TXF
Transmit buffer empty flag
0: Data exists in transmit buffer
1: No data exists in transmit buffer
RXF
Receive buffer full flag
0: No data exists in receive buffer
1: Data exists in receive buffer
Transfer operation error flag
Read
0: – (No error exist)
1: Transmit buffer under run occurs in an external clock mode
Write
0: Clear the flag
1: – (A write of "1" to this bit is ignored)
Receive operation error flag
Read
0: – (No error exist)
1: Receive buffer over run occurs in an external clock mode
Write
0: Clear the flag
1: – (A write of "1" to this bit is ignored)
TXERR
RXERR
Read
only
R/W
Note 1: The operation error flag (TXERR and RXERR) are not automatically cleared by stopping transfer with SIO2CR<SIOS>
"0". Therefore, set these bits to "0" for clearing these error flag. Or set SIO2CR<SIOINH> to "1".
Note 2: *: Don't care
Receive buffer register
SIO2RDB
(002BH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read only
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Transmit buffer register
SIO2TDB
(002BH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Write only
(Initial value: **** ****)
Note 1: SIO2TDB is write only register. A bit manipulation should not be performed on the transmit buffer register using a readmodify-write instruction.
Note 2: The SIO2TDB should be written after checking SIO2SR<TXF> "1". When SIO2SR<TXF> is "0", the writing data can't be
transferred to SIO2TDB even if write instruction is executed to SIO2TDB .
Note 3: *: Don't care
Page 179
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
15.3 Function
15.3.1 Serial clock
15.3.1.1 Clock source
The serial clock can be selected by using SIO2CR<SCK>. When the serial clock is changed, the writing
instruction to SIO2CR<SCK> should be executed while the transfer is stopped (when SIO2SR<SIOF>
“0”)
(1)
Internal clock
Setting the SIO2CR<SCK> to other than “111B” outputs the clock (shown in " Table 15-1 Serial
Clock Rate (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768kHz) ") as serial clock outputs from SCK2 pin. At the before
beginning or finishing of a transfer, SCK2 pin is kept in high level.
When writing (in the transmit mode) or reading (in the receive mode) data can not follow the serial
clock rate, an automatic-wait function is executed to stop the serial clock automatically and hold the
next shift operation until reading or writing is completed (shown in " Figure 15-2 Automatic-wait
Function (Example of transmit mode) "). The maximum time from releasing the automatic-wait
function by reading or writing a data is 1 cycle of the selected serial clock until the serial clock comes
out from SCK2 pin.
SIO2CR<SIOS>
Automatically wait
SCK2 pin output
SO2 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
SIO2TDB
A0
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
A
B
Automatic wait is released by writing SIO2TDB
Figure 15-2 Automatic-wait Function (Example of transmit mode)
Table 15-1 Serial Clock Rate (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768kHz)
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode
TBTCR<DV7CK> = "0"
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode
TBTCR<DV7CK> = "1"
Serial Clock
Baud Rate
2048 bps
fs/24
2048 bps
fc/28
62.5 kbps
Reserved
–
125 kbps
fc/27
125 kbps
Reserved
–
fc/26
250 kbps
fc/26
250 kbps
Reserved
–
100
fc/25
500 kbps
fc/25
500 kbps
Reserved
–
101
fc/24
1.00 Mbps
fc/24
1.00 Mbps
Reserved
–
110
fc/23
2.00 Mbps
fc/23
2.00 Mbps
Reserved
SCK
Serial Clock
Baud Rate
Serial Clock
Baud Rate
000
fc/212
3.906 kbps
fs/24
001
fc/28
62.5 kbps
010
fc/27
011
Page 180
TMP86FS49AUG
(2)
External clock
When an external clock is selected by setting SIO2CR<SCK> to “111B”, the clock via the SCK2
pin from an external source is used as the serial clock.
To ensure shift operation, the serial clock pulse width must be 4/fc or more for both “H” and “L”
levels.
SCK2 pin
tSCKL
tSCKH
tSCKL, tSCKH > 4/fc
Figure 15-3 External Clock
15.3.1.2 Shift edge
The leading edge is used to transmit data, and the trailing edge is used to receive data.
(1)
Leading edge shift
Data is shifted on the leading edge of the serial clock (falling edge of the SCK2 pin input/output).
(2)
Trailing edge shift
Data is shifted on the trailing edge of the serial clock (rising edge of the SCK2 pin input/output).
SIO2CR<SIOS>
SCK2 pin
Shift register
01234567
*0123456
**012345
***01234
****0123
*****012
******01
*******0
********
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit1
Bit0
Shift out
SO2 pin
Bit7
(a) Leading edge shift (Example of MSB transfer)
SIO2CR<SIOS>
SCK2 pin
SI2 pin
Shift register
Bit7
********
Bit6
7*******
Bit5
67******
Bit4
567*****
Bit3
4567****
Bit2
34567***
234567**
(b) Trailing edge shift (Example of MSB transfer)
Figure 15-4 Shift Edge
Page 181
1234567*
01234567
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
15.3.2 Transfer bit direction
Transfer data direction can be selected by using SIO2CR<SIODIR>. The transfer data direction can't be set
individually for transmit and receive operations.
When the data direction is changed, the writing instruction to SIO2CR<SIODIR> should be executed while
the transfer is stopped (when SIO2CR<SIOF>= “0”)
SIO2CR<SIOS>
SCK2 pin
SIO2TDB
A
Shift out
SO2 pin
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
A4
A5
A6
A7
(a) MSB transfer
SIO2CR<SIOS>
SCK2 pin
SIO2TDB
A
Shift out
SO2 pin
A0
A1
A2
A3
(b) LSB transfer
Figure 15-5 Transfer Bit Direction (Example of transmit mode)
15.3.2.1 Transmit mode
(1)
MSB transmit mode
MSB transmit mode is selected by setting SIO2CR<SIODIR> to “0”, in which case the data is
transferred sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (Bit7).
(2)
LSB transmit mode
LSB transmit mode is selected by setting SIO2CR<SIODIR> to “1”, in which case the data is
transferred sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (Bit0).
15.3.2.2 Receive mode
(1)
MSB receive mode
MSB receive mode is selected by setting SIO2CR<SIODIR> to “0”, in which case the data is
received sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (Bit7).
Page 182
TMP86FS49AUG
(2)
LSB receive mode
LSB receive mode is selected by setting SIO2CR<SIODIR> to “1”, in which case the data is
received sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (Bit0).
15.3.2.3 Transmit/receive mode
(1)
MSB transmit/receive mode
MSB transmit/receive mode are selected by setting SIO2CR<SIODIR> to “0” in which case the
data is transferred sequentially beginning with the most significant bit (Bit7) and the data is received
sequentially beginning with the most significant (Bit7).
(2)
LSB transmit/receive mode
LSB transmit/receive mode are selected by setting SIO2CR<SIODIR> to “1”, in which case the
data is transferred sequentially beginning with the least significant bit (Bit0) and the data is received
sequentially beginning with the least significant (Bit0).
15.3.3 Transfer modes
Transmit, receive and transmit/receive mode are selected by using SIO2CR<SIOM>.
15.3.3.1 Transmit mode
Transmit mode is selected by writing “00B” to SIO2CR<SIOM>.
(1)
Starting the transmit operation
Transmit mode is selected by setting “00B” to SIO2CR<SIOM>. Serial clock is selected by using
SIO2CR<SCK>. Transfer direction is selected by using SIO2CR<SIODIR>.
When a transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register (SIO2TDB), SIO2SR<TXF> is
cleared to “0”.
After SIO2CR<SIOS> is set to “1”, SIO2SR<SIOF> is set synchronously to “1” the falling edge of
SCK2 pin.
The data is transferred sequentially starting from SO2 pin with the direction of the bit specified by
SIO2CR<SIODIR>, synchronizing with the SCK2 pin's falling edge.
SIO2SR<SEF> is kept in high level, between the first clock falling edge of SCK2 pin and eighth
clock falling edge.
SIO2SR<TXF> is set to “1” at the rising edge of pin after the data written to the SIO2TDB is
transferred to shift register, then the INTSIO2 interrupt request is generated, synchronizing with the
next falling edge on SCK2 pin.
Note 1: In internal clock operation, when SIO2CR<SIOS> is set to "1", transfer mode does not start without writing a transmit data to the transmit buffer register (SIO2TDB).
Note 2: In internal clock operation, when the SIO2CR<SIOS> is set to "1", SIO2TDB is transferred to
shift register after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock frequency, then a serial clock is output from
SCK2 pin.
Note 3: In external clock operation, when the falling edge is input from SCK2 pin after SIO2CR<SIOS> is
set to "1", SIO2TDB is transferred to shift register immediately.
Page 183
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
(2)
During the transmit operation
When data is written to SIO2TDB, SIO2SR<TXF> is cleared to “0”.
In internal clock operation, in case a next transmit data is not written to SIO2TDB, the serial clock
stops to “H” level by an automatic-wait function when all of the bit set in the SIO2TDB has been
transmitted. Automatic-wait function is released by writing a transmit data to SIO2TDB. Then, transmit operation is restarted after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock.
When the next data is written to the SIO2TDB before termination of previous 8-bit data with
SIO2SR<TXF> “1”, the next data is continuously transferred after transmission of previous data.
In external clock operation, after SIO2SR<TXF> is set to “1”, the transmit data must be written to
SIO2TDB before the shift operation of the next data begins.
If the transmit data is not written to SIO2TDB, transmit error occurs immediately after shift operation is started. Then, INTSIO2 interrupt request is generated after SIO2SR<TXERR> is set to “1”.
(3)
Stopping the transmit operation
There are two ways for stopping transmits operation.
• The way of clearing SIO2CR<SIOS>.
When SIO2CR<SIOS> is cleared to “0”, transmit operation is stopped after all transfer of the
data is finished. When transmit operation is finished, SIO2SR<SIOF> is cleared to “0” and
SO2 pin is kept in high level.
In external clock operation, SIO2CR<SIOS> must be cleared to “0” before SIO2SR<SEF> is
set to “1” by beginning next transfer.
• The way of setting SIO2CR<SIOINH>.
Transmit operation is stopped immediately after SIO2CR<SIOINH> is set to “1”. In this
case, SIO2CR<SIOS>, SIO2SR register, SIO2RDB register and SIO2TDB register are initialized.
Clearing SIOS
SIO2CR<SIOS>
SIO2SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO2SR<SEF>
SCK2 pin outout
Automatic wait
SO2 pin
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
SIO2SR<TXF>
INTSIO2
interrupt
request
SIO2TDB
A
C
B
Writing transmit
data C
Writing transmit Writing transmit
data A
data B
Figure 15-6 Example of Internal Clock and MSB Transmit Mode
Page 184
TMP86FS49AUG
Writing transmit data
Clearing SIOS
SIO2CR<SIOS>
SIO2SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO2SR<SEF>
SCK2 pin
SO2 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SIO2SR<TXF>
INTSIO2
interrupt
request
SIO2TDB <SIOS>
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Writing transmit
data B
C
Writing transmit
data C
Figure 15-7 Exaple of External Clock and MSB Transmit Mode
SCK2 pin
SIO2SR<SIOF>
SO2 pin
tSODH
4/fc < tSODH < 8/fc
Figure 15-8 Hold Time of the End of Transmit Mode
(4)
Transmit error processing
Transmit errors occur on the following situation.
• Shift operation starts before writing next transmit data to SIO2TDB in external clock operation.
If transmit errors occur during transmit operation, SIO2SR<TXERR> is set to “1” immediately after starting shift operation. Synchronizing with the next serial clock falling edge,
INTSIO2 interrupt request is generated.
If shift operation starts before writing data to SIO2TDB after SIO2CR<SIOS> is set to “1”,
SIO2SR<TXERR> is set to “1” immediately after shift operation is started and then
INTSIO2 interrupt request is generated.
SIO2 pin is kept in high level when SIO2SR<TXERR> is set to “1”. When transmit error
occurs, transmit operation must be forcibly stop by writing SIO2CR<SIOINH> to “1”. In
this case, SIO2CR<SIOS>, SIO2SR register, SIO2RDB register and SIO2TDB register are
initialized.
Page 185
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
SIO2CR<SIOS>
SIO2SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO2SR<SEF>
SCK2 pin
SO2 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
SIO2SR<TXF>
SIO2SR<TXERR>
INTSIO2
interrupt
request
SIO2TDB
SIO2CR
<SIOINH>
A
Writing transmit
data A
B
Unknown
Writing transmit
data B
Figure 15-9 Example of Transmit Error Processingme
15.3.3.2 Receive mode
The receive mode is selected by writing “01B” to SIO2CR<SIOM>.
(1)
Starting the receive operation
Receive mode is selected by setting “01” to SIO2CR<SIOM>. Serial clock is selected by using
SIO2CR<SCK>. Transfer direction is selected by using SIO2CR<SIODIR>.
After SIO2CR<SIOS> is set to “1”, SIO2SR<SIOF> is set synchronously to “1” the falling edge of
SCK2 pin.
Synchronizing with the SCK2 pin's rising edge, the data is received sequentially from SI2 pin with
the direction of the bit specified by SBI2DIR<SIODIR>.
SIO2SR<SEF> is kept in high level, between the first clock falling edge of SCK2 pin and eighth
clock falling edge.
When 8-bit data is received, the data is transferred to SIO2RDB from shift register. INTSIO2 interrupt request is generated and SIO2SR<RXF> is set to “1”
Note: In internal clock operation, when the SIO2CR<SIOS> is set to "1", the serial clock is generated
from SCK2 pin after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock frequency.
(2)
During the receive operation
The SIO2SR<RXF> is cleared to “0” by reading a data from SIO2RDB.
In the internal clock operation, the serial clock stops to “H” level by an automatic-wait function
when the all of the 8-bit data has been received. Automatic-wait function is released by reading a
received data from SIO2RDB. Then, receive operation is restarted after maximum 1-cycle of serial
clock.
In external clock operation, after SIO2SR<RXF> is set to “1”, the received data must be read from
SIO2RDB, before the next data shift-in operation is finished.
Page 186
TMP86FS49AUG
If received data is not read out from SIO2RDB receive error occurs immediately after shift operation is finished. Then INTSIO2 interrupt request is generated after SIO2SR<RXERR> is set to “1”.
(3)
Stopping the receive operation
There are two ways for stopping the receive operation.
• The way of clearing SIO2CR<SIOS>.
When SIO2CR<SIOS> is cleared to “0”, receive operation is stopped after all of the data is
finished to receive. When receive operation is finished, SIO2SR<SIOF> is cleared to “0”.
In external clock operation, SIO2CR<SIOS> must be cleared to “0” before SIO2SR<SEF> is
set to “1” by starting the next shift operation.
• The way of setting SIO2CR<SIOINH>.
Receive operation is stopped immediately after SIO2CR<SIOINH> is set to “1”. In this case,
SIO2CR<SIOS>, SIO2SR register, SIO2RDB register and SIO2TDB register are initialized.
Clearing SIOS
SIO2CR<SIOS>
SIO2SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO2SR<SEF>
SCK2 pin
SI2 pin
Automatic wait
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A0
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
SIO2SR<RXF>
INTSIO2
interrupt
request
SIO2RDB
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Writing transmit
data B
Figure 15-10 Example of Internal Clock and MSB Receive Mode
Page 187
C
Writing transmit
data C
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
Reading received data
Clearing SIOS
SIO2CR<SIOS>
SIO2SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO2SR<SEF>
SCK2 pin
SI2 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SIO2SR<RXF>
INTSIO2
interrupt
request
SIO2RDB
A
Writing transmit
data A
B
C
Writing transmit
data B
Writing transmit
data C
Figure 15-11 Example of External Clock and MSB Receive Mode
(4)
Receive error processing
Receive errors occur on the following situation. To protect SIO2RDB and the shift register contents, the received data is ignored while the SIO2SR<RXERR> is “1”.
• Shift operation is finished before reading out received data from SIO2RDB at
SIO2SR<RXF> is “1” in an external clock operation.
If receive error occurs, set the SIO2CR<SIOS> to “0” for reading the data that received
immediately before error occurence. And read the data from SIO2RDB. Data in shift register
(at errors occur) can be read by reading the SIO2RDB again.
When SIO2SR<RXERR> is cleared to “0” after reading the received data, SIO2SR<RXF> is
cleared to “0”.
After clearing SIO2CR<SIOS> to “0”, when 8-bit serial clock is input to SCK2 pin, receive
operation is stopped. To restart the receive operation, confirm that SIO2SR<SIOF> is cleared
to “0”.
If the receive error occurs, set the SIO2CR<SIOINH> to “1” for stopping the receive operation immediately. In this case, SIO2CR<SIOS>, SIO2SR register, SIO2RDB register and
SIO2TDB register are initialized.
Page 188
TMP86FS49AUG
SIO2CR<SIOS>
SIO2SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO2SR<SEF>
SCK2 pin
SI2 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SIO2SR<RXF>
SIO2SR<RXERR>
Write a "0" after reading the
received data when a receive
error occurs.
INTSIO2
interrupt
request
SIO2RDB
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Writing transmit
data B
Figure 15-12 Example of Receive Error Processing
Note: If receive error is not corrected, an interrupt request does not generate after the error occurs.
15.3.3.3 Transmit/receive mode
The transmit/receive mode are selected by writing “10” to SIO2CR<SIOM>.
(1)
Starting the transmit/receive operation
Transmit/receive mode is selected by writing “10B” to SIO2CR<SIOM>. Serial clock is selected
by using SIO2CR<SCK>. Transfer direction is selected by using SIO2CR<SIODIR>.
When a transmit data is written to the transmit buffer register (SIO2TDB), SIO2SR<TXF> is
cleared to “0”.
After SIO2CR<SIOS> is set to “1”, SIO2SR<SIOF> is set synchronously to the falling edge of
SCK2 pin.
The data is transferred sequentially starting from SO2 pin with the direction of the bit specified by
SIO2CR<SIODIR>, synchronizing with the SCK2 pin's falling edge. And receiving operation also
starts with the direction of the bit specified by SIO2CR<SIODIR>, synchronizing with the SCK2
pin's rising edge.
SIO2SR<SEF> is kept in high level between the first clock falling edge of SCK2 pin and eighth
clock falling edge.
SIO2SR<TXF> is set to “1” at the rising edge of SCK2 pin after the data written to the SIO2TDB is
transferred to shift register. When 8-bit data has been received, the received data is transferred to
SIO2RDB from shift register, then the INTSIO2 interrupt request occurs, synchronizing with setting
SIO2SR<RXF> to “1”.
Note 1: In internal clock operation, when the SIO2CR<SIOS> is set to "1", SIO2TDB is transferred to
shift register after maximum 1-cycle of serial clock frequency, then a serial clock is output from
SCK2 pin.
Note 2: In external clock operation, when the falling edge is input from SCK2 pin after SIO2CR<SIOS> is
set to "1", SIO2TDB is transferred to shift register immediately. When the rising edge is input
from SCK2 pin, receive operation also starts.
Page 189
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
(2)
During the transmit/receive operation
When data is written to SIO2TDB, SIO2SR<TXF> is cleared to “0” and when a data is read from
SIO2RDB, SIO2SR<RXF> is cleared to “0”.
In internal clock operation, in case of the condition described below, the serial clock stops to “H”
level by an automatic-wait function when all of the bit set in the data has been transmitted.
• Next transmit data is not written to SIO2TDB after reading a received data from SIO2RDB.
• Received data is not read from SIO2RDB after writing a next transmit data to SIO2TDB.
• Neither SIO2TDB nor SIO2RDB is accessed after transmission.
The automatic wait function is released by writing the next transmit data to SIO2TDB after reading
the received data from SIO2RDB, or reading the received data from SIO2RDB after writing the next
data to SIO2TDB.
Then, transmit/receive operation is restarted after maximum 1 cycle of serial clock.
In external clock operation, reading the received data from SIO2RDB and writing the next data to
SIO2TDB must be finished before the shift operation of the next data begins.
If the transmit data is not written to SIO2TDB after SIO2SR<TXF> is set to “1”, transmit error
occurs immediately after shift operation is started. When the transmit error occurred,
SIO2SR<TXERR> is set to “1”.
If received data is not read out from SIO2RDB before next shift operation starts after setting
SIO2SR<RXF> to “1”, receive error occurs immediately after shift operation is finished. When the
receive error has occurred, SIO2SR<RXERR> is set to “1”.
(3)
Stopping the transmit/receive operation
There are two ways for stopping the transmit/receive operation.
• The way of clearing SIO2CR<SIOS>.
When SIO2CR<SIOS> is cleared to “0”, transmit/receive operation is stopped after all transfer of the data is finished. When transmit/receive operation is finished, SIO2SR<SIOF> is
cleared to “0” and SO2 pin is kept in high level.
In external clock operation, SIO2CR<SIOS> must be cleared to “0” before SIO2SR<SEF> is
set to “1” by beginning next transfer.
• The way of setting SIO2CR<SIOINH>.
Transmit/receive operation is stopped immediately after SIO2CR<SIOINH> is set to “1”. In
this case, SIO2CR<SIOS>, SIO2SR register, SIO2RDB register and SIO2TDB register are
initialized.
Page 190
TMP86FS49AUG
Clearing SIOS
SIO2CR<SIOS>
SIO2SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO2SR<SEF>
SCK2 pin output
Automatic wait
Automatic wait
SO2 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
A0
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
B0
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SI2 pin
INTSIO2
interrupt
request
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
D0
E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1
E0
F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
SIO2SR<TXF>
SIO2TDB
A
Writing transmit
data A
C
B
Writing transmit
data B
Writing transmit
data C
SIO2SR<RXF>
SIO2RDB
D
Reading received
data D
F
E
Reading received
data E
Reading received
data F
Figure 15-13 Example of Internal Clock and MSB Transmit/Receive Mode
Page 191
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
Reading received data
Writing transmit data
Clearing SIOS
SIO2CR<SIOS>
SIO2SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO2SR<SEF>
SCK2 pin output
SO2 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
SI2 pin
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
INTSIO2
interrupt
request
SIO2SR<TXF>
SIO2TDB
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Writing transmit
data B
C
Writing transmit
data C
SIO2SR<RXF>
SIO2RDB
D
E
F
Reading received
data D
Reading received
data E
Reading received
data F
Figure 15-14 Example of External Clock and MSB Transmit/Receive Mode
(4)
Transmit/receive error processing
Transmit/receive errors occur on the following situation. Corrective action is different, which
errors occur transmits or receives.
(a) Transmit errors
Transmit errors occur on the following situation.
• Shift operation starts before writing next transmit data to SIO2TDB in external clock operation.
If transmit errors occur during transmit operation, SIO2SR<TXERR> is set to “1” immediately after starting shift operation. And INTSIO2 interrupt request is generated after all of the 8-bit data has been received.
If shift operation starts before writing data to SIO2TDB after SIO2CR<SIOS> is set to
“1”, SIO2SR<TXERR> is set immediately after starting shift operation. And INTSIO2
interrupt request is generated after all of the 8-bit data has been received.
SO2 pin is kept in high level when SIO2SR<TXERR> is set to “1”. When transmit error
occurs, transmit operation must be forcibly stop by writing SIO2CR<SIOINH> to “1”
after the received data is read from SIO2RDB. In this case, SIO2CR<SIOS>, SIO2SR
register, SIO2RDB register and SIO2TDB register are initialized.
Page 192
TMP86FS49AUG
SIO2CR<SIOS>
SIO2SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO2SR<SEF>
SCK2 pin output
SO2 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
SI2 pin
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
INTSIO2
interrupt
request
SIO2SR<TXF>
SIO2SR<TXERR>
SIO2TDB
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Unknown
Writing transmit
data B
SIO2SR<RXF>
SIO2RDB
D
Reading received
data D
E
Reading received
data E
F
Reading received
data F
SIO2CR<SIOINH>
Figure 15-15 Example of Transmit/Receive (Transmit) Error Processing
(b) Receive errors
Receive errors occur on the following situation. To protect SIO2RDB and the shift register
contents, the received data is ignored while the SIO2SR<RXERR> is “1”.
• Shift operation is finished before reading out received data from SIO2RDB at
SIO2SR<RXF> is “1” in an external clock operation.
If receive error occurs, set the SIO2CR<SIOS> to “0” for reading the data that received
immediately before error occurence. And read the data from SIO2RDB. Data in shift
register (at errors occur) can be read by reading the SIO2RDB again.
When SIO2SR<RXERR> is cleared to “0” after reading the received data,
SIO2SR<RXF> is cleared to “0”.
After clearing SIO2CR<SIOS> to “0”, when 8-bit serial clock is input to SCK2 pin, receive operation is stopped. To restart the receive operation, confirm that
SIO2SR<SIOF> is cleared to “0”.
If the received error occurs, set the SIO2CR<SIOINH> to “1” for stopping the receive
operation immediately. In this case, SIO2CR<SIOS>, SIO2SR register, SIO2RDB register and SIO2TDB register are initialized.
Page 193
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO2)
15.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
SIO2CR<SIOS>
SIO2SR<SIOF>
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
Start shift
operation
SIO2SR<SEF>
SCK2 pin output
SO2 pin
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3
SI2 pin
INTSIO2
interrupt
request
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
SIO2SR<TXF>
SIO2TDB
A
B
Writing transmit
data A
Writing transmit
data B
Unknown
C
Writing transmit
data C
SIO2SR<RXF>
SIO2SR<RXERR>
SIO2RDB
D
E
Reading received
data D
OOH
Reading received
data E
SIO2CR<SIOINH>
Figure 15-16 Example of Transmit/Receive (Receive) Error Processing
Note: If receive error is not corrected, an interrupt request does not generate after the error
occurs.
SCK2 pin
SIO2SR<SIOF>
SO2 pin
tSODH
4/fc < tSODH < 8/fc
Figure 15-17 Hold Time of the End of Transmit/Receive Mode
Page 194
TMP86FS49AUG
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
The TMP86FS49AUG has a serial bus interface which employs an I2C bus.
The serial interface is connected to an external devices through SDA and SCL.
The serial bus interface pins are also used as the port. When used as serial bus interface pins, set the output latches
of these pins to "1". When not used as serial bus interface pins, the port is used as a normal I/O port.
Note 1: The serial bus interface can be used only in NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 mode. It can not be used in IDLE0,
SLOW1/2 and SLEEP0/1/2 mode.
Note 2: The serial bus interface can be used only in the Standard mode of I2C. The fast mode and the high-speed mode
can not be used.
Note 3: Please refer to the I/O port section about the detail of setting port.
16.1 Configuration
INTSBI interrupt request
SCL
fc/4
Noise
canceller
Input/
output
control
Divider
Transfer
control
circuit
I2C bus
clock sysn.
Control
Shift
register
SBICRB/
SBISRB
SBI control register B/
SBI status register B
I C bus
address register
I2C bus data
control
SBI data
buffer register
Noise
canceller
SDA
SDA
SBICRA/
SBISRA
SBIDBR
I2CAR
2
SCL
SBI control register A/
SBI status register A
Figure 16-1 Serial Bus Interface (SBI)
16.2 Control
The following registers are used for control the serial bus interface and monitor the operation status.
• Serial bus interface control register A (SBICRA)
• Serial bus interface control register B (SBICRB)
• Serial bus interface data buffer register (SBIDBR)
• I2C bus address register (I2CAR)
• Serial bus interface status register A (SBISRA)
• Serial bus interface status register B (SBISRB)
16.3 Software Reset
A serial bus interface circuit has a software reset function, when a serial bus interface circuit is locked by an external noise, etc.
To reset the serial bus interface circuit, write “10”, “01” into the SWRST (Bit1, 0 in SBICRB).
And a status of software reset canbe read from SWRMON (Bit0 in SBISRA).
Page 195
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.4 The Data Format in the I2C Bus Mode
TMP86FS49AUG
16.4 The Data Format in the I2C Bus Mode
The data format of the I2C bus is shown below.
(a) Addressing format
8 bits
1
RA
S Slave address / C
WK
1 to 8 bits
1
1 to 8 bits
Data
A
C
K
Data
1
1
A
CP
K
1 or more
(b) Addressing format (with restart)
8 bits
1
RA
S Slave address / C
WK
1
1 to 8 bits
1
8 bits
1
A
RA
C S Slave address / C
K
WK
Data
1 or more
1
S
1
1 to 8 bits
1
1 to 8 bits
Data
A
C
K
Data
A
C
K
Data
1
S
R/W
ACK
P
1
A
CP
K
1 or more
: Start condition
: Direction bit
: Acknowledge bit
: Stop condition
Figure 16-2 Data Format in of I2C Bus
Page 196
Data
1 or more
(c) Free data format
8 bits
1 to 8 bits
1
A
CP
K
TMP86FS49AUG
16.5 I2C Bus Control
The following registers are used to control the serial bus interface and monitor the operation status of the I2C bus.
Serial Bus Interface Control Register A
7
SBICRA
(0F90H)
6
5
4
BC
3
2
1
ACK
0
SCK
(Initial value: 0000 *000)
ACK = 0
BC
Number of transferred bits
BC
Number of
Clock
000:
Bits
Bits
8
8
9
8
001:
1
1
2
1
010:
2
2
3
2
011:
3
3
4
3
100:
4
4
5
4
101:
5
5
6
5
110:
6
6
7
6
111:
7
7
8
ACK
ACK
SCK
Acknowledgement mode
specification
ACK = 1
Number of
Clock
Master mode
Write
only
7
Slave mode
0:
Not generate a clock pulse for
an acknowledgement.
Not count a clock pulse for
an acknowledgement.
1:
Generate a clock pulse for an
acknowledgement.
Count a clock pulse for an
acknowledgement.
SCK
n
At fc = 16 MHz
At fc = 8 MHz
At fc = 4 MHz
000:
4
Reserved
Reserved
100.0 kHz
001:
5
Reserved
Reserved
55.6 kHz
Serial clock (fscl) selection
(Output on SCL pin)
010:
6
Reserved
58.8 kHz
29.4 kHz
011:
7
60.6 kHz
30.3 kHz
15.2 kHz
[fscl = 1/(2n+1/fc + 8/fc)]
100:
8
30.8 kHz
15.4 kHz
7.7 kHz
101:
9
15.5 kHz
7.8 kHz
3.9 kHz
110:
10
7.8 kHz
3.9 kHz
1.9 kHz
111:
R/W
Write
only
Reserved
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care
Note 2: SBICRA cannot be used with any of read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation, etc.
Note 3: Do not set SCK as the frequency that is over 100 kHz.
Serial Bus Interface Data Buffer Register
SBIDBR
(0F91H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: **** ****) R/W
Note 1: For writing transmitted data, start from the MSB (Bit7).
Note 2: The data which was written into SBIDBR can not be read, since a write data buffer and a read buffer are independent in
SBIDBR. Therefore, SBIDBR cannot be used with any of read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation, etc.
Note 3: *: Don't care
Page 197
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.5 I2C Bus Control
TMP86FS49AUG
I2C bus Address Register
I2CAR
(0F92H)
7
6
5
SA6
SA5
SA4
4
3
2
1
SA2
SA1
SA0
0
Slave address
SA
Slave address selection
ALS
Address recognition mode specification
SA3
ALS
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
Write
only
0:
Slave address recognition
1:
Non slave address recognition
Note 1: I2CAR is write-only register, which cannot be used with any of read-modify-write instruction such as bit manipulation, etc.
Note 2: Do not set I2CAR to "00H" to avoid the incorrect response of acknowledgment in slave mode. ( If "00H" is set to I2CAR as
the Slave Address and a START Byte "01H" in I2C bus standard is recived, the device detects slave address match.)
Serial Bus Interface Control Register B
SBICRB
(0F93H)
MST
TRX
BB
PIN
SBIM
SWRST1
SWRST0
7
6
5
4
3
MST
TRX
BB
PIN
SBIM
0:
Master/slave selection
Transmitter/receiver selection
Start/stop generation
Cancel interrupt service request
Serial bus interface operating
mode selection
Software reset start bit
2
1
0
SWRST1
SWRST0
(Initial value: 0001 0000)
Slave
1:
Master
0:
Receiver
1:
Transmitter
0:
Generate a stop condition when MST, TRX and PIN are "1"
1:
Generate a start condition when MST, TRX and PIN are "1"
0:
– (Can not clear this bit by a software)
1:
Cancel interrupt service request
Write
only
00:
Port mode (Serial bus interface output disable)
01:
Reserved
10:
I2C bus mode
11:
Reserved
Software reset starts by first writing "10" and next writing "01"
Note 1: Switch a mode to port after confirming that the bus is free.
Note 2: Switch a mode to I2C bus mode after confiming that the port is high level.
Note 3: SBICRB has write-only register and must not be used with any of read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation,
etc.
Note 4: When the SWRST (Bit1, 0 in SBICRB) is written to "10", "01" in I2C bus mode, software reset is occurred. In this case, the
SBICRA, I2CAR, SBISRA and SBISRB registers are initialized and the bits of SBICRB except the SBIM (Bit3, 2 in SBICRB) are also initialized.
Serial Bus Interface Status Register A
7
SBISRA
(0F90H)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SWRMON
SWRMON
Software reset monitor
0:
During software reset
1:
– (Initial value)
(Initial value: **** ***1)
Read
only
Serial Bus Interface Status Register B
SBISRB
(0F93H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MST
TRX
BB
PIN
AL
AAS
AD0
LRB
Page 198
(Initial value: 0001 0000)
TMP86FS49AUG
MST
TRX
BB
Master/slave selection status
monitor
0:
1:
Master
Transmitter/receiver selection
status monitor
0:
Receiver
Bus status monitor
AL
AD0
LRB
Transmitter
0:
Bus free
Bus busy
0:
Requesting interrupt service
1:
Releasing interrupt service request
0:
–
1:
Arbitration lost detected
Slave address match detection
monitor
0:
-
1:
Detect slave address match or "GENERAL CALL"
"GENERAL CALL" detection
monitor
0:
-
Arbitration lost detection monitor
AAS
1:
1:
Interrupt service requests status monitor
PIN
Slave
Last received bit monitor
1:
Detect "GENERAL CALL"
0:
Last receive bit is "0"
1:
Last receiv bit is "1"
Read
only
16.5.1 Acknowledgement mode specification
16.5.1.1 Acknowledgment mode (ACK = “1”)
To set the device as an acknowledgment mode, the ACK (Bit4 in SBICRA) should be set to “1”. When
a serial bus interface circuit is a master mode, an additional clock pulse is generated for an acknowledge
signal. In a slave mode, a clock is counted for the acknowledge signal.
In the master transmitter mode, the SDA pin is released in order to receive an acknowledge signal from
the receiver during additional clock pulse cycle. In the master receiver mode, the SDA pin is set to low
level generation an acknowledge signal during additional clock pulse cycle.
In a slave mode, when a received slave address matches to a slave address which is set to the I2CAR or
when a “GENERAL CALL” is received, the SDA pin is set to low level generating an acknowledge signal. After the matching of slave address or the detection of “GENERAL CALL”, in the transmitter, the
SDA pin is released in order to receive an acknowledge signal from the receiver during additional clock
pulse cycle. In a receiver, the SDA pin is set to low level generation an acknowledge signal during additional clock pulse cycle after the matching of slave address or the detection of “GENERAL CALL”
The Table 16-1 shows the SCL and SDA pins status in acknowledgment mode.
Table 16-1 SCL and SDA Pins Status in Acknowledgement Mode
Mode
Pin
Transmitter
SCL
An additional clock pulse is generated.
Master
Released in order to receive
an acknowledge signal.
SDA
SCL
Set to low level generating an
acknowledge signal
A clock is counted for the acknowledge signal.
When slave address matches
or a general call is detected
Slave
Receiver
–
Set to low level generating an
acknowledge signal.
SDA
After matching of slave
address or general call
Released in order to receive
an acknowledge signal.
Set to low level generating an
acknowledge signal.
16.5.1.2 Non-acknowledgment mode (ACK = “0”)
To set the device as a non-acknowledgement mode, the ACK (Bit4 in SBICRA) should be cleared to
“0”.
Page 199
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.5 I2C Bus Control
TMP86FS49AUG
In the master mode, a clock pulse for an acknowledge signal is not generated.
In the slave mode, a clock for a acknowledge signal is not counted.
16.5.2 Number of transfer bits
The BC (Bits7 to 5 in SBICRA) is used to select a number of bits for next transmitting and receiving data.
Since the BC is cleared to “000” by a start condition, a slave address and direction bit transmissions are
always executed in 8 bits. Other than these, the BC retains a specified value.
16.5.3 Serial clock
16.5.3.1 Clock source
The SCK (Bits2 to 0 in SBICRA) is used to select a maximum transfer frequency output from the SCL
pin in the master mode.
Four or more machine cycles are required for both high and low levels of pulse width in the external
clock which is input from SCL pin.
Note: Since the serial bus interface can not be used as the fast mode and the high-speed mode, do not set
SCK as the frequency that is over 100 kHz.
tHIGH
tLOW
1/fscl
SCK (Bits2 to 0 in the SBICRA)
n
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
tLOW = 2 /fc
n
tHIGH = 2 /fc + 8/fc
fscl = 1/(tLOW + tHIGH)
tSCKL
n
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
tSCKH
tSCKL, tSCKH > 4 tcyc
Note 1: fc = High-frequency clock
Note 2: tcyc = 4/fc (in NORMAL mode, IDLE mode)
Figure 16-3 Clock Source
16.5.3.2 Clock synchronization
In the I2C bus, in order to drive a bus with a wired AND, a master device which pulls down a clock
pulse to low will, in the first place, invalidate a clock pulse of another master device which generates a
high-level clock pulse.
Page 200
TMP86FS49AUG
The serial bus interface circuit has a clock synchronization function. This function ensures normal
transfer even if there are two or more masters on the same bus.
The example explains clock synchronization procedures when two masters simultaneously exist on a
bus.
Count start
Wait
SCL pin (Master 1)
Count restart
SCL pin (Master 2)
Count reset
SCL (Bus)
a
b
c
Figure 16-4 Clock Synchronization
As Master 1 pulls down the SCL pin to the low level at point “a”, the SCL line of the bus becomes the
low level. After detecting this situation, Master 2 resets counting a clock pulse in the high level and sets
the SCL pin to the low level.
Master 1 finishes counting a clock pulse in the low level at point “b” and sets the SCL pin to the high
level. Since Master 2 holds the SCL line of the bus at the low level, Master 1 waits for counting a clock
pulse in the high level. After Master 2 sets a clock pulse to the high level at point “c” and detects the SCL
line of the bus at the high level, Master 1 starts counting a clock pulse in the high level. Then, the master,
which has finished the counting a clock pulse in the high level, pulls down the SCL pin to the low level.
The clock pulse on the bus is determined by the master device with the shortest high-level period and
the master device with the longest low-level period from among those master devices connected to the
bus.
16.5.4 Slave address and address recognition mode specification
When the serial bus interface circuit is used with an addressing format to recognize the slave address, clear
the ALS (Bit0 in I2CAR) to “0”, and set the SA (Bits7 to 1 in I2CAR) to the slave address.
When the serial bus interface circuit is used with a free data format not to recognize the slave address, set the
ALS to “1”. With a free data format, the slave address and the direction bit are not recognized, and they are
processed as data from immediately after start condition.
16.5.5 Master/slave selection
To set a master device, the MST (Bit7 in SBICRB) should be set to “1”. To set a slave device, the MST
should be cleared to “0”.
When a stop condition on the bus or an arbitration lost is detected, the MST is cleared to “0” by the hardware.
16.5.6 Transmitter/receiver selection
To set the device as a transmitter, the TRX (Bit6 in SBICRB) should be set to "1". To set the device as a
receiver, the TRX should be cleared to “0”. When data with an addressing format is transferred in the slave
mode, the TRX is set to "1" by a hardware if the direction bit (R/W) sent from the master device is “1”, and is
cleared to “0” by a hardware if the bit is “0”. In the master mode, after an acknowledge signal is returned from
the slave device, the TRX is cleared to “0” by a hardware if a transmitted direction bit is “1”, and is set to "1"
by a hardware if it is “0”. When an acknowledge signal is not returned, the current condition is maintained.
Page 201
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.5 I2C Bus Control
TMP86FS49AUG
When a stop condition on the bus or an arbitration lost is detected, the TRX is cleared to “0” by the hardware.
" Table 16-2 TRX changing conditions in each mode " shows TRX changing conditions in each mode and TRX
value after changing
Table 16-2 TRX changing conditions in each mode
Mode
Direction Bit
Conditions
TRX after Changing
Slave
Mode
"0"
A received slave address is
the same value set to I2CAR
"0"
"1"
"1"
"0"
Master
Mode
"1"
ACK signal is returned
"1"
"0"
When a serial bus interface circuit operates in the free data format, a slave address and a direction bit are not
recognized. They are handled as data just after generating a start condition. The TRX is not changed by a hardware.
16.5.7 Start/stop condition generation
When the BB (Bit5 in SBISRB) is “0”, a slave address and a direction bit which are set to the SBIDBR are
output on a bus after generating a start condition by writing “1” to the MST, TRX, BB and PIN. It is necessary
to set ACK to “1” beforehand.
SCL pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SDA pin
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
R/W
Slave address and the direction bit
Start condition
9
Acknowledge signal
Figure 16-5 Start Condition Generation and Slave Address Generation
When the BB is “1”, sequence of generating a stop condition is started by writing “1” to the MST, TRX and
PIN, and “0” to the BB. Do not modify the contents of MST, TRX, BB and PIN until a stop condition is generated on a bus.
When a stop condition is generated and the SCL line on a bus is pulled-down to low level by another device,
a stop condition is generated after releasing the SCL line.
SCL pin
SDA pin
Stop condition
Figure 16-6 Stop Condition Generation
The bus condition can be indicated by reading the contents of the BB (Bit5 in SBISRB). The BB is set to “1”
when a start condition on a bus is detected (Bus Busy State) and is cleared to “0” when a stop condition is
detected (Bus Free State).
16.5.8 Interrupt service request and cancel
When a serial bus interface circuit is in the master mode and transferring a number of clocks set by the BC
and the ACK is complete, a serial bus interface interrupt request (INTSBI) is generated.
Page 202
TMP86FS49AUG
In the slave mode, the conditions of generating INTSBI interrupt request are follows:
• At the end of acknowledge signal when the received slave address matches to the value set by the
I2CAR
• At the end of acknowledge signal when a “GENERAL CALL” is received
• At the end of transferring or receiving after matching of slave address or receiving of “GENERAL
CALL”
When a serial bus interface interrupt request occurs, the PIN (Bit4 in SBISRB) is cleared to “0”. During the
time that the PIN is “0”, the SCL pin is pulled-down to low level.
Either writing data to SBIDBR or reading data from the SBIDBR sets the PIN to “1”.
The time from the PIN being set to “1” until the SCL pin is released takes tLOW.
Although the PIN (Bit4 in SBICRB) can be set to “1” by the softrware, the PIN can not be cleared to “0” by
the softrware.
Note:When the arbitration lost occurs, if the slave address sent from the other master devices is not match, the
INTSBI interrupt request is generated. But the PIN is not cleared.
16.5.9 Setting of I2C bus mode
The SBIM (Bit3 and 2 in SBICRB) is used to set I2C bus mode.
Set the SBIM to “10” in order to set I2C bus mode. Before setting of I2C bus mode, confirm serial bus interface pins in a high level, and then, write “10” to SBIM. And switch a port mode after confirming that a bus is
free.
16.5.10Arbitration lost detection monitor
Since more than one master device can exist simultaneously on a bus, a bus arbitration procedure is implemented in order to guarantee the contents of transferred data.
Data on the SDA line is used for bus arbitration of the I2C bus.
The following shows an example of a bus arbitration procedure when two master devices exist simultaneously on a bus. Master 1 and Master 2 output the same data until point “a”. After that, when Master 1 outputs
“1” and Master 2 outputs “0”, since the SDA line of a bus is wired AND, the SDA line is pulled-down to the
low level by Master 2. When the SCL line of a bus is pulled-up at point “b”, the slave device reads data on the
SDA line, that is data in Master 2. Data transmitted from Master 1 becomes invalid. The state in Master 1 is
called “arbitration lost”. A master device which loses arbitration releases the SDA pin and the SCL pin in order
not to effect data transmitted from other masters with arbitration. When more than one master sends the same
data at the first word, arbitration occurs continuously after the second word.
SCL (Bus)
SDA pin (Master 1)
SDA pin becomes "1" after losing arbitration.
SDA pin (Master 2)
SDA (Bus)
a
b
Figure 16-7 Arbitration Lost
The serial bus interface circuit compares levels of a SDA line of a bus with its SDA pin at the rising edge of
the SCL line. If the levels are unmatched, arbitration is lost and the AL (Bit3 in SBISRB) is set to “1”.
Page 203
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.5 I2C Bus Control
TMP86FS49AUG
When the AL is set to “1”, the MST and TRX are cleared to “0” and the mode is switched to a slave receiver
mode. Thus, the serial bus interface circuit stops output of clock pulses during data transfer after the AL is set
to “1”.
The AL is cleared to “0” by writing data to the SBIDBR, reading data from the SBIDBR or writing data to
the SBICRB.
SCL pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
Master A
SDA pin
SCL pin
D7A D6A D5A D4A D3A D2A D1A D0A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D7A’ D6A’ D5A’
9
Stop clock output
Master B
SDA pin
D7B D6B
Releasing SDA pin and SCL pin to high level as losing arbitration.
AL
MST
TRX
Accessed to SBIDBR or SBICRB
INTSBI
Figure 16-8 Example of when a Serial Bus Interface Circuit is a Master B
16.5.11Slave address match detection monitor
In the slave mode, the AAS (Bit2 in SBISRB) is set to “1” when the received data is “GENERAL CALL” or
the received data matches the slave address setting by I2CAR with an address recognition mode (ALS = 0).
When a serial bus interface circuit operates in the free data format (ALS = 1), the AAS is set to “1” after
receiving the first 1-word of data.
The AAS is cleared to “0” by writing data to the SBIDBR or reading data from the SBIDBR.
16.5.12GENERAL CALL detection monitor
The AD0 (Bit1 in SBISRB) is set to “1” when all 8-bit received data is “0” immediately after a start condition in a slave mode. The AD0 is cleared to “0” when a start or stop condition is detected on a bus.
16.5.13Last received bit monitor
The SDA line value stored at the rising edge of the SCL line is set to the LRB (Bit0 in SBISRB). In the
acknowledge mode, immediately after an INTSBI interrupt request is generated, an acknowledge signal is read
by reading the contents of the LRB.
Page 204
TMP86FS49AUG
16.6 Data Transfer of I2C Bus
16.6.1 Device initialization
For initialization of device, set the ACK in SBICRA to “1” and the BC to “000”. Specify the data length to 8
bits to count clocks for an acknowledge signal. Set a transfer frequency to the SCK in SBICRA.
Next, set the slave address to the SA in I2CAR and clear the ALS to “0” to set an addressing format.
After confirming that the serial bus interface pin is high level, for specifying the default setting to a slave
receiver mode, clear “0” to the MST, TRX and BB in SBICRB, set “1” to the PIN, “10” to the SBIM, and “00”
to bits SWRST1 and SWRST0.
Note:The initialization of a serial bus interface circuit must be complete within the time from all devices which are
connected to a bus have initialized to and device does not generate a start condition. If not, the data can not
be received correctly because the other device starts transferring before an end of the initialization of a serial
bus interface circuit.
16.6.2 Start condition and slave address generation
Confirm a bus free status (BB = 0).
Set the ACK to “1” and specify a slave address and a direction bit to be transmitted to the SBIDBR.
By writing “1” to the MST, TRX, BB and PIN, the start condition is generated on a bus and then, the slave
address and the direction bit which are set to the SBIDBR are output. The time from generating the START
condition until the falling SCL pin takes tLOW.
An INTSBI interrupt request occurs at the 9th falling edge of a SCL clock cycle, and the PIN is cleared to
“0”. The SCL pin is pulled-down to the low level while the PIN is “0”. When an interrupt request occurs, the
TRX changes by the hardware according to the direction bit only when an acknowledge signal is returned from
the slave device.
Note 1: Do not write a slave address to be output to the SBIDBR while data is transferred. If data is written to the
SBIDBR, data to been outputting may be destroyed.
Note 2: The bus free must be confirmed by software within 98.0 µs (The shortest transmitting time according to the
I2C bus standard) after setting of the slave address to be output. Only when the bus free is confirmed, set
"1" to the MST, TRX, BB, and PIN to generate the start conditions. If the writing of slave address and setting
of MST, TRX, BB and PIN doesn't finish within 98.0 µs, the other masters may start the transferring and the
slave address data written in SBIDBR may be broken.
SCL pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SDA pin
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
R/W
Start condition
9
Slave address + Direction bit
Acknowledge
signal from a
slave device
PIN
INTSBI
interrupt request
Figure 16-9 Start Condition Generation and Slave Address Transfer
16.6.3 1-word data transfer
Check the MST by the INTSBI interrupt process after an 1-word data transfer is completed, and determine
whether the mode is a master or slave.
Page 205
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.6 Data Transfer of I2C Bus
TMP86FS49AUG
16.6.3.1 When the MST is “1” (Master mode)
Check the TRX and determine whether the mode is a transmitter or receiver.
(1)
When the TRX is “1” (Transmitter mode)
Test the LRB. When the LRB is “1”, a receiver does not request data. Implement the process to
generate a stop condition (Described later) and terminate data transfer.
When the LRB is “0”, the receiver requests next data. When the next transmitted data is other than
8 bits, set the BC, set the ACK to “1”, and write the transmitted data to the SBIDBR. After writing
the data, the PIN becomes “1”, a serial clock pulse is generated for transferring a next 1 word of data
from the SCL pin, and then the 1 word of data is transmitted. After the data is transmitted, and an
INTSBI interrupt request occurs. The PIN become “0” and the SCL pin is set to low level. If the data
to be transferred is more than one word in length, repeat the procedure from the LRB test above.
SCL pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
9
Write to SBIDBR
SDA pin
Acknowledge
signal from a
receiver
PIN
INTSBI
interrupt request
Figure 16-10 Example of when BC = “000”, ACK = “1”
(2)
When the TRX is “0” (Receiver mode)
When the next transmitted data is other than of 8 bits, set the BC again. Set the ACK to “1” and
read the received data from the SBIDBR (Reading data is undefined immediately after a slave
address is sent). After the data is read, the PIN becomes “1”. A serial bus interface circuit outputs a
serial clock pulse to the SCL pin to transfer next 1-word of data and sets the SDA pin to “0” at the
acknowledge signal timing.
An INTSBI interrupt request occurs and the PIN becomes “0”. Then a serial bus interface circuit
outputs a clock pulse for 1-word of data transfer and the acknowledge signal each time that received
data is read from the SBIDBR.
Read SBIDBR
SCL pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SDA pin
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
9
New D7
Acknowledge
signal to a
transmitter
PIN
INTSBI
interrupt request
Figure 16-11 Example of when BC = “000”, ACK = “1”
Page 206
TMP86FS49AUG
To make the transmitter terminate transmit, clear the ACK to “0” before reading data which is 1word before the last data to be received. A serial bus interface circuit does not generate a clock pulse
for the acknowledge signal by clearing ACK. In the interrupt routine of end of transmission, when
the BC is set to “001” and read the data, PIN is set to “1” and generates a clock pulse for a 1-bit data
transfer. In this case, since the master device is a receiver, the SDA line on a bus keeps the high-level.
The transmitter receives the high-level signal as an ACK signal. The receiver indicates to the transmitter that data transfer is complete.
After 1-bit data is received and an interrupt request has occurred, generate the stop condition to terminate data transfer.
SCL pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SDA pin
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
1
Acknowledge signal
sent to a transmitter
PIN
INTSBI
interrupt request
Clear ACK to "0"
before reading SBIDBR
Set BC to "001"
before reading SBIDBR
Figure 16-12 Termination of Data Transfer in Master Receiver Mode
16.6.3.2 When the MST is “0” (Slave mode)
In the slave mode, a serial bus interface circuit operates either in normal slave mode or in slave mode
after losing arbitration.
In the slave mode, the conditions of generating INTSBI interrupt request are follows:
• At the end of acknowledge signal when the received slave address matches to the value set by the
I2CAR
• At the end of acknowledge signal when a “GENERAL CALL” is received
• At the end of transferring or receiving after matching of slave address or receiving of “GENERAL
CALL”
A serial bus interface circuit changes to a slave mode if arbitration is lost in the master mode. And an
INTSBI interrupt request occurs when word data transfer terminates after losing arbitration. The behavior
of INTSBI interrupt request and PIN after losing arbitration are shown in Table 16-3.
Table 16-3 The Behavior of INTSBI interrupt request and PIN after Losing Arbitration
When the Arbitration Lost Occurs during Transmission of Slave Address as a Master
INTSBI
interrupt
request
PIN
When the Arbitration Lost Occurs during Transmission of Data as a Master Transmit Mode
INTSBI interrupt request is generated at the termination of word data.
When the slave address matches the value set
by I2CAR, the PIN is cleared to "0" by generating
of INTSBI interrupt request. When the slave
address doesn't match the value set by I2CAR,
the PIN keeps "1".
PIN keeps "1" (PIN is not cleared to "0").
When an INTSBI interrupt request occurs, the PIN (bit 4 in the SBICRB) is reset, and the SCL pin is set
to low level. Either reading or writing from or to the SBIDBR or setting the PIN to “1” releases the SCL
pin after taking tLOW.
Page 207
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.6 Data Transfer of I2C Bus
TMP86FS49AUG
Check the AL (Bit3 in the SBISRB), the TRX (Bit6 in the SBISRB), the AAS (Bit2 in the SBISRB),
and the AD0 (Bit1 in the SBISRB) and implements processes according to conditions listed in " Table 164 Operation in the Slave Mode ".
Table 16-4 Operation in the Slave Mode
TRX
AL
1
AAS
1
1
AD0
Conditions
0
A serial bus interface circuit loses arbitration when transmitting a slave address.
And receives a slave address of which the
value of the direction bit sent from another
master is "1".
0
1
Process
Set the number of bits in 1 word to the BC
and write transmitted data to the SBIDBR.
In the slave receiver mode, a serial bus
interface circuit receives a slave address
of which the value of the direction bit sent
from the master is "1".
0
In the slave transmitter mode, 1-word data
is transmitted.
Test the LRB. If the LRB is set to "1", set
the PIN to "1" since the receiver does not
request next data. Then, clear the TRX to
"0" to release the bus. If the LRB is set to
"0", set the number of bits in 1 word to the
BC and write transmitted data to the
SBIDBR since the receiver requests next
data.
1/0
A serial bus interface circuit loses arbitration when transmitting a slave address.
And receives a slave address of which the
value of the direction bit sent from another
master is "0" or receives a "GENERAL
CALL".
Read the SBIDBR for setting the PIN to
"1" (Reading dummy data) or write "1" to
the PIN.
0
A serial bus interface circuit loses arbitration when transmitting a slave address or
data. And terminates transferring word
data.
A serial bus interface circuit is changed to
slave mode. To clear AL to "0", read the
SBIDBR or write the data to SBIDBR.
1
1/0
In the slave receiver mode, a serial bus
interface circuit receives a slave address
of which the value of the direction bit sent
from the master is "0" or receives "GENERAL CALL".
Read the SBIDBR for setting the PIN to
"1" (Reading dummy data) or write "1" to
the PIN.
0
1/0
In the slave receiver mode, a serial bus
interface circuit terminates receiving of 1word data.
Set the number of bits in 1-word to the BC
and read received data from the SBIDBR.
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Note: In the slave mode, if the slave address set in I2CAR is "00H", a START Byte "01H" in I2C bus standard is recived, the
device detects slave address match and the TRX is set to "1".
16.6.4 Stop condition generation
When the BB is “1”, a sequence of generating a stop condition is started by setting “1” to the MST, TRX and
PIN, and clear “0” to the BB. Do not modify the contents of the MST, TRX, BB, PIN until a stop condition is
generated on a bus.
When a SCL line on a bus is pulled-down by other devices, a serial bus interface circuit generates a stop condition after they release a SCL line.
The time from the releasing SCL line until the generating the STOP condition takes tLOW.
Page 208
TMP86FS49AUG
"1"
"1"
"0"
"1"
MST
TRX
BB
PIN
Stop condition
SCL pin
SDA pin
PIN
BB (Read)
Figure 16-13 Stop Condition Generation
16.6.5 Restart
Restart is used to change the direction of data transfer between a master device and a slave device during
transferring data. The following explains how to restart a serial bus interface circuit.
Clear “0” to the MST, TRX and BB and set “1” to the PIN. The SDA pin retains the high-level and the SCL
pin is released. Since a stop condition is not generated on a bus, a bus is assumed to be in a busy state from
other devices. Test the BB until it becomes “0” to check that the SCL pin of a serial bus interface circuit is
released. Test the LRB until it becomes “1” to check that the SCL line on a bus is not pulled-down to the low
level by other devices. After confirming that a bus stays in a free state, generate a start condition with procedure " 16.6.2 Start condition and slave address generation ".
In order to meet setup time when restarting, take at least 4.7 µs of waiting time by software from the time of
restarting to confirm that a bus is free until the time to generate a start condition.
Note:When the master is in the receiver mode, it is necessary to stop the data transmission from the slave devcie
before the STOP condtion is generated. To stop the transmission, the master device make the slave device
receiving a negative acknowledge. Therefore, the LRB is "1" before generating the Restart and it can not be
confirmed that SCL line is not pulled-down by other devices. Please confirm the SCL line state by reading the
port.
"0"
"0"
"0"
"1"
"1"
"1"
"1"
"1"
MST
TRX
BB
PIN
MST
TRX
BB
PIN
4.7µs (Min)
SCL (Bus)
SCL pin
SDA pin
LRB
BB
PIN
Figure 16-14 Timing Diagram when Restarting
Page 209
Start condition
16. Serial Bus Interface(I2C Bus) Ver.-D (SBI)
16.6 Data Transfer of I2C Bus
TMP86FS49AUG
Page 210
TMP86FS49AUG
17. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
The TMP86FS49AUG have a 10-bit successive approximation type AD converter.
17.1 Configuration
The circuit configuration of the 10-bit AD converter is shown in Figure 17-1.
It consists of control register ADCCR1 and ADCCR2, converted value register ADCDR1 and ADCDR2, a DA
converter, a sample-hold circuit, a comparator, and a successive comparison circuit.
DA converter
VAREF
VSS
R/2
R
R/2
AVDD
Analog input
multiplexer
AIN0
A
Sample hold
circuit
Reference
voltage
Y
10
Analog
comparator
n
S EN
Successive approximate circuit
Shift clock
AINDS
ADRS
SAIN
INTADC
Control circuit
4
ADCCR1
2
AMD
IREFON
AIN15
3
ACK
ADCCR2
AD converter control register 1, 2
8
ADCDR1
2
EOCF ADBF
ADCDR2
AD conversion result register 1, 2
Note: Before using AD converter, set appropriate value to I/O port register conbining a analog input port. For details, see the section on "I/O ports".
Figure 17-1 10-bit AD Converter
Page 211
17. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
17.2 Register configuration
TMP86FS49AUG
17.2 Register configuration
The AD converter consists of the following four registers:
1. AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1)
This register selects the analog channels and operation mode (Software start or repeat) in which to perform AD conversion and controls the AD converter as it starts operating.
2. AD converter control register 2 (ADCCR2)
This register selects the AD conversion time and controls the connection of the DA converter (Ladder
resistor network).
3. AD converted value register 1 (ADCDR1)
This register used to store the digital value fter being converted by the AD converter.
4. AD converted value register 2 (ADCDR2)
This register monitors the operating status of the AD converter.
AD Converter Control Register 1
ADCCR1
(001CH)
7
ADRS
6
5
AMD
4
3
2
AINDS
1
SAIN
AD conversion start
0:
1:
AD conversion start
AMD
AD operating mode
00:
01:
10:
11:
AD operation disable
Software start mode
Reserved
Repeat mode
AINDS
Analog input control
0:
1:
Analog input enable
Analog input disable
Analog input channel select
0000:
0001:
0010:
0011:
0100:
0101:
0110:
0111:
1000:
1001:
1010:
1011:
1100:
1101:
1110:
1111:
AIN0
AIN1
AIN2
AIN3
AIN4
AIN5
AIN6
AIN7
AIN8
AIN9
AIN10
AIN11
AIN12
AIN13
AIN14
AIN15
ADRS
SAIN
0
(Initial value: 0001 0000)
R/W
Note 1: Select analog input channel during AD converter stops (ADCDR2<ADBF> = "0").
Note 2: When the analog input channel is all use disabling, the ADCCR1<AINDS> should be set to "1".
Note 3: During conversion, Do not perform port output instruction to maintain a precision for all of the pins because analog input
port use as general input port. And for port near to analog input, Do not input intense signaling of change.
Note 4: The ADCCR1<ADRS> is automatically cleared to "0" after starting conversion.
Note 5: Do not set ADCCR1<ADRS> newly again during AD conversion. Before setting ADCCR1<ADRS> newly again, check
ADCDR2<EOCF> to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g.,
interrupt handling routine).
Note 6: After STOP or SLOW/SLEEP mode are started, AD converter control register1 (ADCCR1) is all initialized and no data can
be written in this register. Therfore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCR1 newly after returning to NORMAL1 or
NORMAL2 mode.
Page 212
TMP86FS49AUG
AD Converter Control Register 2
7
ADCCR2
(001DH)
6
IREFON
ACK
5
4
3
IREFON
"1"
2
1
ACK
0
"0"
(Initial value: **0* 000*)
DA converter (Ladder resistor) connection
control
0:
1:
Connected only during AD conversion
Always connected
AD conversion time select
(Refer to the following table about the conversion time)
000:
001:
010:
011:
100:
101:
110:
111:
39/fc
Reserved
78/fc
156/fc
312/fc
624/fc
1248/fc
Reserved
R/W
Note 1: Always set bit0 in ADCCR2 to "0" and set bit4 in ADCCR2 to "1".
Note 2: When a read instruction for ADCCR2, bit6 to 7 in ADCCR2 read in as undefined data.
Note 3: After STOP or SLOW/SLEEP mode are started, AD converter control register2 (ADCCR2) is all initialized and no data can
be written in this register. Therfore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCR2 newly after returning to NORMAL1 or
NORMAL2 mode.
Table 17-1 ACK setting and Conversion time
Condition
ACK
000
Conversion
time
16 MHz
8 MHz
4 MHz
2 MHz
10 MHz
5 MHz
2.5 MHz
39/fc
-
-
-
19.5 µs
-
-
15.6 µs
001
Reserved
010
78/fc
-
-
19.5 µs
39.0 µs
-
15.6 µs
31.2 µs
011
156/fc
-
19.5 µs
39.0 µs
78.0 µs
15.6 µs
31.2 µs
62.4 µs
100
312/fc
19.5 µs
39.0 µs
78.0 µs
156.0 µs
31.2 µs
62.4 µs
124.8 µs
101
624/fc
39.0 µs
78.0 µs
156.0 µs
-
62.4 µs
124.8 µs
-
110
1248/fc
78.0 µs
156.0 µs
-
-
124.8 µs
-
-
111
Reserved
Note 1: Setting for "−" in the above table are inhibited.
fc: High Frequency oscillation clock [Hz]
Note 2: Set conversion time setting should be kept more than the following time by Analog reference voltage (VAREF) .
-
VAREF = 4.5 to 5.5 V
15.6 µs and more
-
VAREF = 2.7 to 5.5 V
31.2 µs and more
AD Converted value Register 1
ADCDR1
(001FH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AD09
AD08
AD07
AD06
AD05
AD04
AD03
AD02
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
AD Converted value Register 2
ADCDR2
(001EH)
7
6
5
4
AD01
AD00
EOCF
ADBF
(Initial value: 0000 ****)
Page 213
17. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
17.2 Register configuration
TMP86FS49AUG
EOCF
ADBF
AD conversion end flag
0:
1:
Before or during conversion
Conversion completed
AD conversion BUSY flag
0:
1:
During stop of AD conversion
During AD conversion
Read
only
Note 1: The ADCDR2<EOCF> is cleared to "0" when reading the ADCDR1. Therfore, the AD conversion result should be read to
ADCDR2 more first than ADCDR1.
Note 2: The ADCDR2<ADBF> is set to "1" when AD conversion starts, and cleared to "0" when AD conversion finished. It also is
cleared upon entering STOP mode or SLOW mode .
Note 3: If a read instruction is executed for ADCDR2, read data of bit3 to bit0 are unstable.
Page 214
TMP86FS49AUG
17.3 Function
17.3.1 Software Start Mode
After setting ADCCR1<AMD> to “01” (software start mode), set ADCCR1<ADRS> to “1”. AD conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by ADCCR1<SAIN> is thereby started.
After completion of the AD conversion, the conversion result is stored in AD converted value registers
(ADCDR1, ADCDR2) and at the same time ADCDR2<EOCF> is set to 1, the AD conversion finished interrupt (INTADC) is generated.
ADRS is automatically cleared after AD conversion has started. Do not set ADCCR1<ADRS> newly again
(Restart) during AD conversion. Before setting ADRS newly again, check ADCDR2<EOCF> to see that the
conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine).
AD conversion start
AD conversion start
ADCCR1<ADRS>
ADCDR2<ADBF>
ADCDR1 status
Indeterminate
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result
EOCF cleared by reading
conversion result
ADCDR2<EOCF>
INTADC interrupt request
ADCDR1
ADCDR2
Conversion result
read
Conversion result
read
Conversion result
read
Conversion result
read
Figure 17-2 Software Start Mode
17.3.2 Repeat Mode
AD conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by ADCCR1<SAIN> is performed repeatedly.
In this mode, AD conversion is started by setting ADCCR1<ADRS> to “1” after setting ADCCR1<AMD> to
“11” (Repeat mode).
After completion of the AD conversion, the conversion result is stored in AD converted value registers
(ADCDR1, ADCDR2) and at the same time ADCDR2<EOCF> is set to 1, the AD conversion finished interrupt (INTADC) is generated.
In repeat mode, each time one AD conversion is completed, the next AD conversion is started. To stop AD
conversion, set ADCCR1<AMD> to “00” (Disable mode) by writing 0s. The AD convert operation is stopped
immediately. The converted value at this time is not stored in the AD converted value register.
Page 215
17. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
17.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
ADCCR1<AMD>
“11”
“00”
AD conversion start
ADCCR1<ADRS>
1st conversion
result
Conversion operation
Indeterminate
ADCDR1,ADCDR2
2nd conversion result
3rd conversion result
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result
AD convert operation suspended.
Conversion result is not stored.
3rd conversion result
ADCDR2<EOCF>
EOCF cleared by reading
conversion result
INTADC interrupt request
ADCDR1
Conversion
result read
ADCDR2
Conversion
result read
Conversion
result read
Conversion
result read
Conversion
result read
Conversion
result read
Figure 17-3 Repeat Mode
17.3.3
Register Setting
1. Set up the AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) as follows:
• Choose the channel to AD convert using AD input channel select (SAIN).
• Specify analog input enable for analog input control (AINDS).
• Specify AMD for the AD converter control operation mode (software or repeat mode).
2. Set up the AD converter control register 2 (ADCCR2) as follows:
• Set the AD conversion time using AD conversion time (ACK). For details on how to set the conversion time, refer to Figure 17-1 and AD converter control register 2.
• Choose IREFON for DA converter control.
3. After setting up (1) and (2) above, set AD conversion start (ADRS) of AD converter control register 1
(ADCCR1) to “1”. If software start mode has been selected, AD conversion starts immediately.
4. After an elapse of the specified AD conversion time, the AD converted value is stored in AD converted value register 1 (ADCDR1) and the AD conversion finished flag (EOCF) of AD converted
value register 2 (ADCDR2) is set to “1”, upon which time AD conversion interrupt INTADC is generated.
5. EOCF is cleared to “0” by a read of the conversion result. However, if reconverted before a register
read, although EOCF is cleared the previous conversion result is retained until the next conversion is
completed.
Page 216
TMP86FS49AUG
Example :After selecting the conversion time 19.5 µs at 16 MHz and the analog input channel AIN3 pin, perform AD conversion once. After checking EOCF, read the converted value, store the lower 2 bits in address 0009EH nd store
the upper 8 bits in address 0009FH in RAM. The operation mode is software start mode.
SLOOP :
: (port setting)
:
;Set port register approrriately before setting AD
converter registers.
:
:
(Refer to section I/O port in details)
LD
(ADCCR1) , 00100011B
; Select AIN3
LD
(ADCCR2) , 11011000B
;Select conversion time(312/fc) and operation
mode
SET
(ADCCR1) . 7
; ADRS = 1(AD conversion start)
TEST
(ADCDR2) . 5
; EOCF= 1 ?
JRS
T, SLOOP
LD
A , (ADCDR2)
LD
(9EH) , A
LD
A , (ADCDR1)
LD
(9FH), A
; Read result data
; Read result data
17.4 STOP/SLOW Modes during AD Conversion
When standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode) is entered forcibly during AD conversion, the AD convert operation
is suspended and the AD converter is initialized (ADCCR1 and ADCCR2 are initialized to initial value). Also, the
conversion result is indeterminate. (Conversion results up to the previous operation are cleared, so be sure to read
the conversion results before entering standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode).) When restored from standby mode
(STOP or SLOW mode), AD conversion is not automatically restarted, so it is necessary to restart AD conversion.
Note that since the analog reference voltage is automatically disconnected, there is no possibility of current flowing
into the analog reference voltage.
Page 217
17. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
17.5 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result
TMP86FS49AUG
17.5 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result
The analog input voltage is corresponded to the 10-bit digital value converted by the AD as shown in Figure 17-4.
3FFH
3FEH
3FDH
AD
conversion
result
03H
02H
01H
VAREF
0
1
2
3
1021 1022 1023 1024
Analog input voltage
VSS
1024
Figure 17-4 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result (Typ.)
Page 218
TMP86FS49AUG
17.6 Precautions about AD Converter
17.6.1 Restrictions for AD Conversion interrupt (INTADC) usage
When an AD interrupt is used, it may not be processed depending on program composition. For example, if
an INTADC interrupt request is generated while an interrupt with priority lower than the interrupt latch IL15
(INTADC) is being accepted, the INTADC interrupt latch may be cleared without the INTADC interrupt being
processed.
The completion of AD conversion can be detected by the following methods:
(1) Method not using the AD conversion end interrupt
Whether or not AD conversion is completed can be detected by monitoring the AD conversion end flag
(EOCF) by software. This can be done by polling EOCF or monitoring EOCF at regular intervals after start of
AD conversion.
(2) Method for detecting AD conversion end while a lower-priority interrupt is being processed
While an interrupt with priority lower than INTADC is being processed, check the AD conversion end flag
(EOCF) and interrupt latch IL15. If IL15 = 0 and EOCF = 1, call the AD conversion end interrupt processing
routine with consideration given to PUSH/POP operations. At this time, if an interrupt request with priority
higher than INTADC has been set, the AD conversion end interrupt processing routine will be executed first
against the specified priority. If necessary, we recommend that the AD conversion end interrupt processing routine be called after checking whether or not an interrupt request with priority higher than INTADC has been
set.
17.6.2 Analog input pin voltage range
Make sure the analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN15) are used at voltages within VAREF to VSS. If any voltage
outside this range is applied to one of the analog input pins, the converted value on that pin becomes uncertain.
The other analog input pins also are affected by that.
17.6.3 Analog input shared pins
The analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN15) are shared with input/output ports. When using any of the analog
inputs to execute AD conversion, do not execute input/output instructions for all other ports. This is necessary
to prevent the accuracy of AD conversion from degrading. Not only these analog input shared pins, some other
pins may also be affected by noise arising from input/output to and from adjacent pins.
17.6.4 Noise Countermeasure
The internal equivalent circuit of the analog input pins is shown in Figure 17-5. The higher the output
impedance of the analog input source, more easily they are susceptible to noise. Therefore, make sure the output impedance of the signal source in your design is 5 kΩ or less. Toshiba also recommends attaching a capacitor external to the chip.
Internal resistance
AINi
Permissible signal
source impedance
5 kΩ (typ)
Analog comparator
Internal capacitance
C = 12 pF (typ.)
5 kΩ (max)
DA converter
Note) i = 15 to 0
Figure 17-5
Analog Input Equivalent Circuit and Example of Input Pin Processing
Page 219
17. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
17.6 Precautions about AD Converter
TMP86FS49AUG
Page 220
TMP86FS49AUG
18. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
In the TMP86FS49AUG, the STOP mode is released by not only P20(INT5/STOP) pin but also four (STOP0 to
STOP3) pins.
When the STOP mode is released by STOP0 to STOP3 pins, the STOP pin needs to be used.
In details, refer to the following section " 18.2 Control ".
18.1 Configuration
INT5
STOP
STOP mode
release signal
(1: Release)
STOP0
STOP1
STOP2
STOPCR
(0F9FH)
STOP3
STOP2
STOP1
STOP0
STOP3
Figure 18-1 Key-on Wakeup Circuit
18.2 Control
STOP0 to STOP3 pins can controlled by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR). It can be configured as
enable/disable in 1-bit unit. When those pins are used for STOP mode release, configure corresponding I/O pins to
input mode by I/O port register beforehand.
Key-on Wakeup Control Register
STOPCR
7
6
5
4
(0F9FH)
STOP3
STOP2
STOP1
STOP0
3
2
1
0
(Initial value: 0000 ****)
STOP3
STOP mode released by STOP3
0:Disable
1:Enable
Write
only
STOP2
STOP mode released by STOP2
0:Disable
1:Enable
Write
only
STOP1
STOP mode released by STOP1
0:Disable
1:Enable
Write
only
STOP0
STOP mode released by STOP0
0:Disable
1:Enable
Write
only
18.3 Function
Stop mode can be entered by setting up the System Control Register (SYSCR1), and can be exited by detecting the
"L" level on STOP0 to STOP3 pins, which are enabled by STOPCR, for releasing STOP mode (Note1).
Page 221
18. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
18.3 Function
TMP86FS49AUG
Also, each level of the STOP0 to STOP3 pins can be confirmed by reading corresponding I/O port data register,
check all STOP0 to STOP3 pins "H" that is enabled by STOPCR before the STOP mode is started (Note2,3).
Note 1: When the STOP mode released by the edge release mode (SYSCR1<RELM> = “0”), inhibit input from STOP0 to
STOP3 pins by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR) or must be set "H" level into STOP0 to STOP3 pins
that are available input during STOP mode.
Note 2: When the STOP pin input is high or STOP0 to STOP3 pins input which is enabled by STOPCR is low, executing an
instruction which starts STOP mode will not place in STOP mode but instead will immediately start the release
sequence (Warm up).
Note 3: The input circuit of Key-on Wakeup input and Port input is separated, so each input voltage threshold value is different. Therefore, a value comes from port input before STOP mode start may be different from a value which is
detected by Key-on Wakeup input (Figure 18-2).
Note 4: STOP pin doesn’t have the control register such as STOPCR, so when STOP mode is released by STOP0 to
STOP3 pins, STOP pin also should be used as STOP mode release function.
Note 5: In STOP mode, Key-on Wakeup pin which is enabled as input mode (for releasing STOP mode) by Key-on
Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR) may generate the penetration current, so the said pin must be disabled AD
conversion input (analog voltage input).
Note 6: When the STOP mode is released by STOP0 to STOP3 pins, the level of STOP pin should hold "L" level (Figure
18-3).
External pin
Port input
Key-on wakeup
input
Figure 18-2 Key-on Wakeup Input and Port Input
b) In case of STOP0 to STOP3
a) STOP
STOP pin
STOP pin "L"
STOP mode
Release
STOP mode
STOP0 pin
STOP mode
Release
STOP mode
Figure 18-3 Priority of STOP pin and STOP0 to STOP3 pins
Table 18-1 Release level (edge) of STOP mode
Release level (edge)
Pin name
SYSCR1<RELM>="1"
(Note2)
SYSCR1<RELM>="0"
STOP
"H" level
Rising edge
STOP0
"L" level
Don’t use (Note1)
STOP1
"L" level
Don’t use (Note1)
STOP2
"L" level
Don’t use (Note1)
STOP3
"L" level
Don’t use (Note1)
Page 222
TMP86FS49AUG
19. Flash Memory
TMP86FS49AUG has 61440byte flash memory (address: 1000H to FFFFH). The write and erase operations to the
flash memory are controlled in the following three types of mode.
- MCU mode
The flash memory is accessed by the CPU control in the MCU mode. This mode is used for software
bug correction and firmware change after shipment of the device since the write operation to the flash
memory is available by retaining the application behavior.
- Serial PROM mode
The flash memory is accessed by the CPU control in the serial PROM mode. Use of the serial interface
(UART) enables the flash memory to be controlled by the small number of pins. TMP86FS49AUG in the
serial PROM mode supports on-board programming which enables users to program flash memory after
the microcontroller is mounted on a user board.
- Parallel PROM mode
The parallel PROM mode allows the flash memory to be accessed as a stand-alone flash memory by the
program writer provided by the third party. High-speed access to the flash memory is available by controlling address and data signals directly. For the support of the program writer, please ask Toshiba sales representative.
In the MCU and serial PROM modes, the flash memory control register (FLSCR) is used for flash memory control. This chapter describes how to access the flash memory using the flash memory control register (FLSCR) in the
MCU and serial PROM modes.
Page 223
19. Flash Memory
19.1 Flash Memory Control
TMP86FS49AUG
19.1 Flash Memory Control
The flash memory is controlled via the flash memory control register (FLSCR) .
Flash Memory Control Register
FLSCR
7
6
(0FFFH)
5
4
FLSMD
FLSMD
BANKSEL
3
2
1
0
BANKSEL
(Initial value : 1100 1***)
Flash memory command sequence execution control
1100: Disable command sequence execution
0011: Enable command sequence execution
Others: Reserved
R/W
Flash memory bank select control
(Serial PROM mode only)
0: Select BANK0
1: Select BANK1
R/W
Note 1: The command sequence of the flash memory can be executed only when FLSMD="0011B". In other cases, any attempts
to execute the command sequence are ineffective.
Note 2: FLSMD must be set to either "1100B" or "0011B".
Note 3: BANKSEL is effective only in the serial PROM mode. In the MCU mode, the flash memory is always accessed with actual
addresses (1000-FFFFH) regardless of BANKSEL.
Note 4: Bits 2 through 0 in FLSCR are always read as don’t care.
19.1.1 Flash Memory Command Sequence Execution Control (FLSCR<FLSMD>)
The flash memory can be protected from inadvertent write due to program error or microcontroller misoperation. This write protection feature is realized by disabling flash memory command sequence execution via the
flash memory control register (write protect). To enable command sequence execution, set FLSCR<FLSMD>
to “0011B”. To disable command sequence execution, set FLSCR<FLSMD> to “1100B”. After reset,
FLSCR<FLSMD> is initialized to “1100B” to disable command sequence execution. Normally,
FLSCR<FLSMD> should be set to “1100B” except when the flash memory needs to be written or erased.
19.1.2 Flash Memory Bank Select Control (FLSCR<BANKSEL>)
In the serial PROM mode, a 2-kbyte BOOTROM is mapped to addresses 7800H-7FFFH and the flash memory is mapped to 2 banks at 8000H-FFFFH. Flash memory addresses 1000H-7FFFH are mapped to 9000HFFFFH as BANK0, and flash memory addresses 8000H-FFFFH are mapped to 8000H-FFFFH as BANK1.
FLSCR<BANKSEL> is used to switch between these banks. For example, to access the flash memory address
7000H, set FLSCR<BANKSEL> to “0” and then access F000H. To access the flash memory address 9000H,
set FLSCR<BANKSEL> to “1" and then access 9000H.
In the MCU mode, the flash memory is accessed with actual addresses at 1000H-FFFFH. In this case,
FLSCR<BANKSEL> is ineffective (i.e., its value has no effect on other operations).
Table 19-1 Flash Memory Access
Operating Mode
FLSCR
<BANKSEL>
MCU mode
Don’t care
0
(BANK0)
Access Area
Specified Address
1000H-FFFFH
1000H-7FFFH
9000H-FFFFH
Serial PROM mode
1
(BANK1)
8000H-FFFFH
Page 224
TMP86FS49AUG
19.2 Command Sequence
The command sequence in the MCU and the serial PROM modes consists of six commands (JEDEC compatible),
as shown in Table 19-2. Addresses specified in the command sequence are recognized with the lower 12 bits
(excluding BA, SA, and FF7FH used for read protection). The upper 4 bits are used to specify the flash memory
area, as shown in Table 19-3.
Table 19-2 Command Sequence
Command
Sequence
1st Bus Write
Cycle
2nd Bus Write
Cycle
3rd Bus Write
Cycle
4th Bus Write
Cycle
5th Bus Write
Cycle
6th Bus Write
Cycle
Address
Data
Address
Data
Address
Data
Address
Data
Address
Data
Address
Data
1
Byte program
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
A0H
BA
(Note 1)
Data
(Note 1)
-
-
-
-
2
Sector Erase
(4-kbyte Erase)
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
80H
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
SA
(Note 2)
30H
3
Chip Erase
(All Erase)
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
80H
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
10H
4
Product ID Entry
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
90H
-
-
-
-
-
-
Product ID Exit
XXH
F0H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Product ID Exit
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
F0H
-
-
-
-
-
-
Read Protect
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
A5H
FF7FH
00H
-
-
-
-
5
6
Note 1: Set the address and data to be written.
Note 2: The area to be erased is specified with the upper 4 bits of the address.
Table 19-3 Address Specification in the Command Sequence
Operating Mode
FLSCR
<BANKSEL>
Specified Address
MCU mode
Don’t care
1***H-F***H
0
(BANK0)
9***H-F***H
1
(BANK1)
8***H-F***H
Serial PROM mode
19.2.1 Byte Program
This command writes the flash memory for each byte unit. The addresses and data to be written are specified
in the 4th bus write cycle. Each byte can be programmed in a maximum of 40 µs. The next command sequence
cannot be executed until the write operation is completed. To check the completion of the write operation, perform read operations repeatedly until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory.
During the write operation, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data
(toggling between 0 and 1).
Note:To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to
erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
19.2.2 Sector Erase (4-kbyte Erase)
This command erases the flash memory in units of 4 kbytes. The flash memory area to be erased is specified
by the upper 4 bits of the 6th bus write cycle address. For example, in the MCU mode, to erase 4 kbytes from
7000H to 7FFFH, specify one of the addresses in 7000H-7FFFH as the 6th bus write cycle. In the serial PROM
mode, to erase 4 kbytes from 7000H to 7FFFH, set FLSCR<BANKSEL> to "0" and then specify one of the
addresses in F000H-FFFFH as the 6th bus write cycle. The sector erase command is effective only in the MCU
and serial PROM modes, and it cannot be used in the parallel PROM mode.
Page 225
19. Flash Memory
19.2 Command Sequence
TMP86FS49AUG
A maximum of 30 ms is required to erase 4 kbytes. The next command sequence cannot be executed until the
erase operation is completed. To check the completion of the erase operation, perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. During the
erase operation, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling
between 0 and 1).
19.2.3 Chip Erase (All Erase)
This command erases the entire flash memory in approximately 30 ms. The next command sequence cannot
be executed until the erase operation is completed. To check the completion of the erase operation, perform
read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash
memory. During the erase operation, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6
of the data (toggling between 0 and 1). After the chip is erased, all bytes contain FFH.
19.2.4 Product ID Entry
This command activates the Product ID mode. In the Product ID mode, the vendor ID, the flash ID, and the
read protection status can be read from the flash memory.
Table 19-4 Values To Be Read in the Product ID Mode
Address
Meaning
F000H
Vendor ID
98H
F001H
Flash macro ID
41H
F002H
FF7FH
Read Value
Flash size
0EH:
60 kbytes
0BH:
48 kbytes
07H:
32 kbytes
05H:
24 kbytes
03H:
16 kbytes
01H:
8 kbytes
00H:
4 kbytes
FFH:
Read protection disabled
Read protection status
Other than FFH: Read protection enabled
Note: The value at address F002H (flash size) depends on the size of flash memory incorporated in each product. For example, if
the product has 60-kbyte flash memory, "0EH" is read from address F002H.
19.2.5 Product ID Exit
This command is used to exit the Product ID mode.
19.2.6 Read Protect
This command enables the read protection setting in the flash memory. When the read protection is enabled,
the flash memory cannot be read in the parallel PROM mode. In the serial PROM mode, the flash write and
RAM loader commands cannot be executed.
To enable the read protection setting in the serial PROM mode, set FLSCR<BANKSEL> to "1" before executing the read protect command sequence. To disable the read protection setting, it is necessary to execute the
chip erase command sequence. Whether or not the read protection is enabled can be checked by reading
FF7FH in the Product ID mode. For details, see Table 19-4.
Page 226
TMP86FS49AUG
It takes a maximum of 40 µs to set read protection in the flash memory. The next command sequence cannot
be executed until this operation is completed. To check the completion of the read protect operation, perform
read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash
memory. During the read protect operation, any attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the
data (toggling between 0 and 1).
19.3 Toggle Bit (D6)
After the byte program, chip erase, and read protect command sequence is executed, any consecutive attempts to
read from the same address is reversed bit 6 (D6) of the data (toggling between 0 and 1) until the operation is completed. Therefore, this toggle bit provides a software mechanism to check the completion of each operation. Usually
perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the
flash memory. After the byte program, chip erase, or read protect command sequence is executed, the initial read of
the toggle bit always produces a "1".
Page 227
19. Flash Memory
19.4 Access to the Flash Memory Area
TMP86FS49AUG
19.4 Access to the Flash Memory Area
When the write, erase and read protections are set in the flash memory, read and fetch operations cannot be performed in the entire flash memory area. Therefore, to perform these operations in the entire flash memory area,
access to the flash memory area by the control program in the BOOTROM or RAM area. (The flash memory program cannot write to the flash memory.) The serial PROM or MCU mode is used to run the control program in the
BOOTROM or RAM area.
Note 1: The flash memory can be written or read for each byte unit. Erase operations can be performed either in the entire
area or in units of 4 kbytes, whereas read operations can be performed by an one transfer instruction. However,
the command sequence method is adopted for write and erase operations, requiring several-byte transfer instructions for each operation.
Note 2: To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to erase
the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
19.4.1 Flash Memory Control in the Serial PROM Mode
The serial PROM mode is used to access to the flash memory by the control program provided in the
BOOTROM area. Since almost of all operations relating to access to the flash memory can be controlled simply by the communication data of the serial interface (UART), these functions are transparent to the user. For
the details of the serial PROM mode, see “Serial PROM Mode.”
To access to the flash memory by using peripheral functions in the serial PROM mode, run the RAM loader
command to execute the control program in the RAM area. The procedures to execute the control program in
the RAM area is shown in " 19.4.1.1 How to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the
RAM area (in the RAM loader mode within the serial PROM mode) ".
19.4.1.1 How to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the RAM area (in
the RAM loader mode within the serial PROM mode)
(Steps 1 and 2 are controlled by the BOOTROM, and steps 3 through 10 are controlled by the control
program executed in the RAM area.)
1. Transfer the write control program to the RAM area in the RAM loader mode.
2. Jump to the RAM area.
3. Disable (DI) the interrupt master enable flag (IMF←"0").
4. Set FLSCR<FLSMD> to "0011B" (to enable command sequence execution).
5. Execute the erase command sequence.
6. Read the same flash memory address twice.
(Repeat step 6 until the same data is read by two consecutive reads operations.)
7. Specify the bank to be written in FLSCR<BANKSEL>.
8. Execute the write command sequence.
9. Read the same flash memory address twice.
(Repeat step 9 until the same data is read by two consecutive reads operations.)
10. Set FLSCR<FLSMD> to "1100B" (to disable command sequence execution).
Note 1: Before writing to the flash memory in the RAM area, disable interrupts by setting the interrupt master
enable flag (IMF) to "0". Usually disable interrupts by executing the DI instruction at the head of the
write control program in the RAM area.
Note 2: Since the watchdog timer is disabled by the BOOTROM in the RAM loader mode, it is not required to
disable the watchdog timer by the RAM loader program.
Page 228
TMP86FS49AUG
Example :After chip erasure, the program in the RAM area writes data 3FH to address F000H.
DI
: Disable interrupts (IMF←"0")
LD
(FLSCR),0011_1000B
LD
IX,0F555H
LD
IY,0FAAAH
LD
HL,0F000H
: Enable command sequence execution.
; #### Flash Memory Chip erase Process ####
sLOOP1:
LD
(IX),0AAH
: 1st bus write cycle
LD
(IY),55H
: 2nd bus write cycle
LD
(IX),80H
: 3rd bus write cycle
LD
(IX),0AAH
: 4th bus write cycle
LD
(IY),55H
: 5th bus write cycle
LD
(IX),10H
: 6th bus write cycle
LD
W,(IX)
CMP
W,(IX)
JR
NZ,sLOOP1
: Loop until the same value is read.
SET
(FLSCR).3
: Set BANK1.
; #### Flash Memory Write Process ####
sLOOP2:
sLOOP3:
LD
(IX),0AAH
: 1st bus write cycle
LD
(IY),55H
: 2nd bus write cycle
LD
(IX),0A0H
: 3rd bus write cycle
LD
(HL),3FH
: 4th bus write cycle, (F000H)=3FH
LD
W,(HL)
CMP
W,(HL)
JR
NZ,sLOOP2
: Loop until the same value is read.
LD
(FLSCR),1100_1000B
: Disable command sequence execution.
JP
sLOOP3
Page 229
19. Flash Memory
19.4 Access to the Flash Memory Area
TMP86FS49AUG
19.4.2 Flash Memory Control in the MCU mode
In the MCU mode, write operations are performed by executing the control program in the RAM area.
Before execution of the control program, copy the control program into the RAM area or obtain it from the
external using the communication pin. The procedures to execute the control program in the RAM area in the
MCU mode are described below.
19.4.2.1 How to write to the flash memory by executing a user write control program in the
RAM area (in the MCU mode)
(Steps 1 and 2 are controlled by the program in the flash memory, and steps 3 through 11 are controlled
by the control program in the RAM area.)
1. Transfer the write control program to the RAM area.
2. Jump to the RAM area.
3. Disable (DI) the interrupt master enable flag (IMF←"0").
4. Disable the watchdog timer, if it is used.
5. Set FLSCR<FLSMD> to "0011B" (to enable command sequence execution).
6. Execute the erase command sequence.
7. Read the same flash memory address twice.
(Repeat step 7 until the same data is read by two consecutive read operations.)
8. Execute the write command sequence. (It is not required to specify the bank to be written.)
9. Read the same flash memory address twice.
(Repeat step 9 until the same data is read by two consecutive read operations.)
10. Set FLSCR<FLSMD> to "1100B" (to disable command sequence execution).
11. Jump to the flash memory area.
Note 1: Before writing to the flash memory in the RAM area, disable interrupts by setting the interrupt master
enable flag (IMF) to "0". Usually disable interrupts by executing the DI instruction at the head of the
write control program in the RAM area.
Note 2: When writing to the flash memory, do not intentionally use non-maskable interrupts (the watchdog
timer must be disabled if it is used). If a non-maskable interrupt occurs while the flash memory is
being written, unexpected data is read from the flash memory (interrupt vector), resulting in malfunction of the microcontroller.
Page 230
TMP86FS49AUG
Example :After sector erasure (E000H-EFFFH), the program in the RAM area writes data 3FH to address
E000H.
DI
: Disable interrupts (IMF←"0")
LD
(WDTCR2),4EH
: Clear the WDT binary counter.
LDW
(WDTCR1),0B101H
: Disable the WDT.
LD
(FLSCR),0011_1000B
: Enable command sequence execution.
LD
IX,0F555H
LD
IY,0FAAAH
LD
HL,0E000H
; #### Flash Memory Sector Erase Process ####
sLOOP1:
LD
(IX),0AAH
: 1st bus write cycle
LD
(IY),55H
: 2nd bus write cycle
LD
(IX),80H
: 3rd bus write cycle
LD
(IX),0AAH
: 4th bus write cycle
LD
(IY),55H
: 5th bus write cycle
LD
(HL),30H
: 6th bus write cycle
LD
W,(IX)
CMP
W,(IX)
JR
NZ,sLOOP1
: Loop until the same value is read.
; #### Flash Memory Write Process ####
sLOOP2:
LD
(IX),0AAH
: 1st bus write cycle
LD
(IY),55H
: 2nd bus write cycle
LD
(IX),0A0H
: 3rd bus write cycle
LD
(HL),3FH
: 4th bus write cycle, (1000H)=3FH
LD
W,(HL)
CMP
W,(HL)
JR
NZ,sLOOP2
: Loop until the same value is read.
LD
(FLSCR),1100_1000B
: Disable command sequence execution.
JP
XXXXH
: Jump to the flash memory area.
Example :This write control program reads data from address F000H and stores it to 98H in the RAM area.
LD
A,(0F000H)
: Read data from address F000H.
LD
(98H),A
: Store data to address 98H.
Page 231
19. Flash Memory
19.4 Access to the Flash Memory Area
TMP86FS49AUG
Page 232
TMP86FS49AUG
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.1 Outline
The TMP86FS49AUG has a 2048 byte BOOTROM (Mask ROM) for programming to flash memory. The
BOOTROM is available in the serial PROM mode, and controlled by TEST, BOOT and RESET pins. Communication is performed via UART. The serial PROM mode has seven types of operating mode: Flash memory writing,
RAM loader, Flash memory SUM output, Product ID code output, Flash memory status output, Flash memory erasing and Flash memory read protection setting. Memory address mapping in the serial PROM mode differs from that
in the MCU mode. Figure 20-1 shows memory address mapping in the serial PROM mode.
Table 20-1 Operating Range in the Serial PROM Mode
Parameter
Power supply
High frequency (Note)
Min
Max
Unit
4.5
5.5
V
2
16
MHz
Note: Though included in above operating range, some of high frequencies are not supported in the serial PROM mode. For
details, refer to “Table 20-5”.
20.2 Memory Mapping
The Figure 20-1 shows memory mapping in the Serial PROM mode and MCU mode.
In the serial PROM mode, the BOOTROM (Mask ROM) is mapped in addresses from 7800H to 7FFFH. The flash
memory is divided into two banks for mapping. Therefore, when the RAM loader mode (60H) is used, it is required
to specify the flash memory address according to Figure 20-1 (For detail of banks and control register, refer to the
chapter of “Flash Memory Control Register”.)
To use the Flash memory writing command (30H), specify the flash memory addresses from 1000H to FFFFH, that
is the same addresses in the MCU mode, because the BOOTROM changes the flash memory address.
0000H
SFR
003FH
0040H
RAM
0000H
64 bytes
SFR
2048 bytes
RAM
083FH
64 bytes
2048 bytes
083FH
0F80H
DBR
003FH
0040H
0F80H
DBR
128 bytes
0FFFH
128 bytes
0FFFH
1000H
7800H
BOOTROM
7FFFH
8000H
9000H
Flash memory
2048 bytes
Flash memory
28672 bytes
(BANK0)
7FFFH
8000H
61440 bytes
32768 bytes
(BANK1)
FFFFH
FFFFH
Serial PROM mode
MCU mode
Figure 20-1 Memory Address Maps
Page 233
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.3 Serial PROM Mode Setting
TMP86FS49AUG
20.3 Serial PROM Mode Setting
20.3.1 Serial PROM Mode Control Pins
To execute on-board programming, activate the serial PROM mode. Table 20-2 shows pin setting to activate
the serial PROM mode.
Table 20-2 Serial PROM Mode Setting
Pin
Setting
TEST pin
High
BOOT/RXD1 pin
High
RESET pin
Note: The BOOT pin is shared with the UART communication pin (RXD1 pin) in the serial PROM mode. This pin is used as UART
communication pin after activating serial PROM mode
20.3.2 Pin Function
In the serial PROM mode, TXD1 (P02) and RXD1 (P01) are used as a serial interface pin.
Table 20-3 Pin Function in the Serial PROM Mode
Pin Name
(Serial PROM Mode)
Input/
Output
Pin Name
(MCU Mode)
Function
TXD1
Output
Serial data output
BOOT/RXD1
Input/Input
Serial PROM mode control/Serial data input
RESET
Input
Serial PROM mode control
RESET
TEST
Input
Fixed to high
TEST
VDD, AVDD
Power
supply
4.5 to 5.5 V
VSS
Power
supply
0V
VAREF
Power
supply
Leave open or apply input reference voltage.
I/O ports except
P02, P01
I/O
XIN
Input
XOUT
Output
P02
(Note 1)
P01
These ports are in the high-impedance state in the serial PROM mode.
Self-oscillate with an oscillator.
(Note 2)
Note 1: During on-board programming with other parts mounted on a user board, be careful no to affect these communication
control pins.
Note 2: Operating range of high frequency in serial PROM mode is 2 MHz to 16 MHz.
Page 234
TMP86FS49AUG
TMP86FS49AUG
VDD(4.5 V to 5.5 V)
VDD
Serial PROM mode
TEST
MCU mode
XIN
pull-up
BOOT / RXD1 (P01)
TXD1 (P02)
XOUT
External control
RESET
VSS
GND
Figure 20-2 Serial PROM Mode Pin Setting
Note 1: For connection of other pins, refer to " Table 20-3 Pin Function in the Serial PROM Mode ".
20.3.3 Example Connection for On-Board Writing
Figure 20-3 shows an example connection to perform on-board wring.
VDD(4.5 V to 5.5 V)
VDD
Serial PROM mode
TEST
Pull-up
MCU mode
BOOT / RXD1 (P01)
Level
converter
TXD1 (P02)
PC control
(Note 2)
Other
parts
RESET
control
(Note 1)
RC power-on
reset circuit
RESET
XIN
XOUT
VSS
GND
Application board
External control board
Figure 20-3 Example Connection for On-Board Writing
Note 1: When other parts on the application board effect the UART communication in the serial PROM mode, isolate these pins by a jumper or switch.
Note 2: When the reset control circuit on the application board effects activation of the serial PROM mode, isolate
the pin by a jumper or switch.
Note 3: For connection of other pins, refer to " Table 20-3 Pin Function in the Serial PROM Mode ".
Page 235
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.3 Serial PROM Mode Setting
TMP86FS49AUG
20.3.4 Activating the Serial PROM Mode
The following is a procedure to activate the serial PROM mode. " Figure 20-4 Serial PROM Mode Timing "
shows a serial PROM mode timing.
1. Supply power to the VDD pin.
2. Set the RESET pin to low.
3. Set the TEST pin and BOOT/RXD1 pins to high.
4. Wait until the power supply and clock oscillation stabilize.
5. Set the RESET pin to high.
6. Input the matching data (5AH) to the BOOT/RXD1 pin after setup sequence. For details of the setup
timing, refer to " 20.15 UART Timing ".
VDD
TEST(Input)
RESET(Input)
PROGRAM
BOOT/RXD1 (Input)
don't care
Reset mode
High level setting
Serial PROM mode
Setup time for serial PROM mode (Rxsup)
Matching data
input
Figure 20-4 Serial PROM Mode Timing
Page 236
TMP86FS49AUG
20.4 Interface Specifications for UART
The following shows the UART communication format used in the serial PROM mode.
To perform on-board programming, the communication format of the write controller must also be set in the same
manner.
The default baud rate is 9600 bps regardless of operating frequency of the microcontroller. The baud rate can be
modified by transmitting the baud rate modification data shown in Table 1-4 to TMP86FS49AUG. The Table 20-5
shows an operating frequency and baud rate. The frequencies which are not described in Table 20-5 can not be used.
- Baud rate (Default): 9600 bps
- Data length: 8 bits
- Parity addition: None
- Stop bit: 1 bit
Table 20-4 Baud Rate Modification Data
Baud rate modification data
04H
05H
06H
07H
0AH
18H
28H
Baud rate (bps)
76800
62500
57600
38400
31250
19200
9600
Page 237
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.4 Interface Specifications for UART
TMP86FS49AUG
Table 20-5 Operating Frequency and Baud Rate in the Serial PROM Mode
(Note 3)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Reference Baud Rate
(bps)
76800
62500
57600
38400
31250
19200
9600
Baud Rate Modification
Data
04H
05H
06H
07H
0AH
18H
28H
Ref. Frequency
(MHz)
Rating
(MHz)
Baud
rate
(bps)
(%)
(bps)
(%)
(bps)
(%)
(bps)
(%)
2
1.91 to 2.10
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
9615
+0.16
4
3.82 to 4.19
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
31250
0.00
19231
+0.16
9615
+0.16
(bps)
(%)
(bps)
(%)
(bps)
(%)
4.19
3.82 to 4.19
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
32734
+4.75
20144
+4.92
10072
+4.92
4.9152
4.70 to 5.16
-
-
-
-
-
-
38400
0.00
-
-
19200
0.00
9600
0.00
5
4.70 to 5.16
-
-
-
-
-
-
39063
+1.73
-
-
19531
+1.73
9766
+1.73
6
5.87 to 6.45
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
9375
-2.34
-
6.144
5.87 to 6.45
-
-
7.3728
7.05 to 7.74
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
9600
0.00
-
57600
0.00
-
-
-
-
19200
0.00
9600
0.00
8
7.64 to 8.39
-
-
62500
0.00
-
-
38462
+0.16
31250
0.00
19231
+0.16
9615
+0.16
9.8304
9.40 to 10.32
76800
0.00
-
-
-
-
38400
0.00
-
-
19200
0.00
9600
0.00
10
9.40 to 10.32
78125
+1.73
-
-
-
-
39063
+1.73
-
-
19531
+1.73
9766
+1.73
12
11.75 to 12.90
-
-
-
-
57692
+0.16
-
-
31250
0.00
18750
-2.34
9375
-2.34
12.288
11.75 to 12.90
-
-
-
-
59077
+2.56
-
-
32000
+2.40
19200
0.00
9600
0.00
12.5
11.75 to 12.90
-
-
60096
-3.85
60096
+4.33
-
-
30048
-3.85
19531
+1.73
9766
+1.73
9
14.7456
14.10 to 15.48
-
-
-
-
57600
0.00
38400
0.00
-
-
19200
0.00
9600
0.00
10
16
15.27 to 16.77
76923
+0.16
62500
0.00
-
-
38462
+0.16
31250
0.00
19231
+0.16
9615
+0.16
Note 1: “Ref. Frequency” and “Rating” show frequencies available in the serial PROM mode. Though the frequency is supported
in the serial PROM mode, the serial PROM mode may not be activated correctly due to the frequency difference in the
external controller (such as personal computer) and oscillator, and load capacitance of communication pins.
Note 2: It is recommended that the total frequency difference is within ±3% so that auto detection is performed correctly by the reference frequency.
Note 3: The external controller must transmit the matching data (5AH) repeatedly till the auto detection of baud rate is performed.
This number indicates the number of times the matching data is transmitted for each frequency.
Page 238
TMP86FS49AUG
20.5 Operation Command
The eight commands shown in Table 20-6 are used in the serial PROM mode. After reset release, the
TMP86FS49AUG waits for the matching data (5AH).
Table 20-6 Operation Command in the Serial PROM Mode
Command Data
Operating Mode
Description
5AH
Setup
Matching data. Execute this command after releasing the reset.
F0H
Flash memory erasing
Erases the flash memory area (address 1000H to FFFFH).
30H
Flash memory writing
Writes to the flash memory area (address 1000H to FFFFH).
60H
RAM loader
Writes to the specified RAM area (address 0050H to 083FH).
90H
Flash memory SUM output
Outputs the 2-byte checksum upper byte and lower byte in this order for the
entire area of the flash memory (address 1000H to FFFFH).
C0H
Product ID code output
Outputs the product ID code (13-byte data).
C3H
Flash memory status output
Outputs the status code (7-byte data) such as the read protection condition.
FAH
Flash memory read protection setting
Enables the read protection.
20.6 Operation Mode
The serial PROM mode has seven types of modes, that are (1) Flash memory erasing, (2) Flash memory writing,
(3) RAM loader, (4) Flash memory SUM output, (5) Product ID code output, (6) Flash memory status output and (7)
Flash memory read protection setting modes. Description of each mode is shown below.
1. Flash memory erasing mode
The flash memory is erased by the chip erase (erasing an entire flash area) or sector erase (erasing sectors in
4-kbyte units). The erased area is filled with FFH. When the read protection is enabled, the sector erase in
the flash erasing mode can not be performed. To disable the read protection, perform the chip erase. Before
erasing the flash memory, TMP86FS49AUG checks the passwords except a blank product. If the password
is not matched, the flash memory erasing mode is not activated.
2. Flash memory writing mode
Data is written to the specified flash memory address for each byte unit. The external controller must transmit the write data in the Intel Hex format (Binary). If no error is encountered till the end record,
TMP86FS49AUG calculates the checksum for the entire flash memory area (1000H to FFFFH), and
returns the obtained result to the external controller. When the read protection is enabled, the flash memory
writing mode is not activated. In this case, perform the chip erase command beforehand in the flash memory erasing mode. Before activating the flash memory writing mode, TMP86FS49AUG checks the password except a blank product. If the password is not matched, flash memory writing mode is not activated.
3. RAM loader mode
The RAM loader transfers the data in Intel Hex format sent from the external controller to the internal
RAM. When the transfer is completed normally, the RAM loader calculates the checksum. After transmitting the results, the RAM loader jumps to the RAM address specified with the first data record in order to
execute the user program. When the read protection is enabled, the RAM loader mode is not activated. In
this case, perform the chip erase beforehand in the flash memory erasing mode. Before activating the RAM
loader mode, TMP86FS49AUG checks the password except a blank product. If the password is not
matched, flash RAM loader mode is not activated.
4. Flash memory SUM output mode
The checksum is calculated for the entire flash memory area (1000H to FFFFH), and the result is returned
to the external controller. Since the BOOTROM does not support the operation command to read the flash
memory, use this checksum to identify programs when managing revisions of application programs.
5. Product ID code output
The code used to identify the product is output. The code to be output consists of 13-byte data, which
includes the information indicating the area of the ROM incorporated in the product. The external controller reads this code, and recognizes the product to write.
(In the case of TMP86FS49AUG, the addresses from 1000H to FFFFH become the ROM area.)
Page 239
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.6 Operation Mode
TMP86FS49AUG
6. Flash memory status output mode
The status of the area from FFE0H to FFFFH, and the read protection condition are output as 7-byte code.
The external controller reads this code to recognize the flash memory status.
7. Flash memory read protection setting mode
This mode disables reading the flash memory data in parallel PROM mode. In the serial PROM mode, the
flash memory writing and RAM loader modes are disabled. To disable the flash memory read protection,
perform the chip erase in the flash memory erasing mode.
Page 240
TMP86FS49AUG
20.6.1 Flash Memory Erasing Mode (Operating command: F0H)
Table 20-7 shows the flash memory erasing mode.
Table 20-7 Flash Memory Erasing Mode
Transfer Data from the External
Controller to TMP86FS49AUG
Transfer Byte
BOOT
ROM
Transfer Data from TMP86FS49AUG to
the External Controller
Baud Rate
1st byte
2nd byte
Matching data (5AH)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
- (Automatic baud rate adjustment)
OK: Echo back data (5AH)
Error: No data transmitted
3rd byte
4th byte
Baud rate change data (Table 20-4)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
OK: Echo back data
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 62H × 3 (Note 1)
5th byte
6th byte
Operation command data (F0H)
-
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Echo back data (F0H)
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 63H × 3 (Note 1)
7th byte
8th byte
Password count storage address bit
15 to 08 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
9th byte
10th byte
Password count storage address bit
07 to 00 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
11th byte
12th byte
Password comparison start address
bit 15 to 08 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
13th byte
14th byte
Password comparison start address
bit 07 to 00 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted)
15th byte
:
m’th byte
Password string (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate
-
-
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’th - 2 byte
Erase area specification (Note 2)
Modified baud rate
-
n’th - 1 byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: Checksum (Upper byte) (Note 3)
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’th byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: Checksum (Lower byte) (Note 3)
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’th + 1 byte
(Wait for the next operation command
data)
Modified baud rate
-
Note 1: “xxH × 3” indicates that the device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of xxh.
Note 2: Refer to " 20.13 Specifying the Erasure Area ".
Note 3: Refer to " 20.8 Checksum (SUM) ".
Note 4: Refer to " 20.10 Passwords ".
Note 5: Do not transmit the password string for a blank product.
Note 6: When a password error occurs, TMP86FS49AUG stops UART communication and enters the halt mode. Therefore, when
a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FS49AUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Note 7: If an error occurs during transfer of a password address or a password string, TMP86FS49AUG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. Therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FS49AUG by the RESET pin
and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Description of the flash memory erasing mode
1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash
memory writing mode.
Page 241
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.6 Operation Mode
TMP86FS49AUG
2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in the flash memory erasing mode
(F0H).
3. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 20-6, the
device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in
this case, F0H). If the 5th byte of the received data does not contain the operation command data, the
device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of the operation command error code (63H).
4. The 7th thorough m'th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash
memory writing mode. In the case of a blank product, do not transmit a password string. (Do not
transmit a dummy password string.)
5. The n’th - 2 byte contains the erasure area specification data. The upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits specify
the start address and end address of the erasure area, respectively. For the detailed description, see
“1.13 Specifying the Erasure Area”.
6. The n’th - 1 byte and n’th byte contain the upper and lower bytes of the checksum, respectively. For
how to calculate the checksum, refer to “1.8 Checksum (SUM)”. Checksum is calculated unless a
receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs. After sending the end record, the external controller
judges whether the transmission is completed correctly by receiving the checksum sent by the device.
7. After sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 242
TMP86FS49AUG
20.6.2 Flash Memory Writing Mode (Operation command: 30H)
Table 20-8 shows flash memory writing mode process.
Table 20-8 Flash Memory Writing Mode Process
Transfer Byte
BOOT
ROM
Transfer Data from External Controller
to TMP86FS49AUG
Transfer Data from TMP86FS49AUG to
External Controller
Baud Rate
1st byte
2nd byte
Matching data (5Ah)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
- (Automatic baud rate adjustment)
OK: Echo back data (5AH)
Error: Nothing transmitted
3rd byte
4th byte
Baud rate modification data
(See Table 20-4)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
OK: Echo back data
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 62H × 3 (Note 1)
5th byte
6th byte
Operation command data (30H)
-
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Echo back data (30H)
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 63H × 3 (Note 1)
7th byte
8th byte
Password count storage address bit
15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
9th byte
10th byte
Password count storage address bit
07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
11th byte
12th byte
Password comparison start address
bit 15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
13th byte
14th byte
Password comparison start address
bit 07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted)
15th byte
:
m’th byte
Password string (Note 5)
Modified baud rate
-
m’th + 1 byte
:
n’th - 2 byte
Intel Hex format (binary)
(Note 2)
n’th - 1 byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: SUM (Upper byte) (Note 3)
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’th byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: SUM (Lower byte) (Note 3)
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’th + 1 byte
(Wait state for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
-
-
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
Modified baud rate
-
Note 1: “xxH × 3” indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 20.7 Error
Code ".
Note 2: Refer to " 20.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary) ".
Note 3: Refer to " 20.8 Checksum (SUM) ".
Note 4: Refer to " 20.10 Passwords ".
Note 5: If addresses from FFE0H to FFFFH are filled with “FFH”, the passwords are not compared because the device is considered as a blank product. Transmitting a password string is not required. Even in the case of a blank product , it is required
to specify the password count storage address and the password comparison start address. Transmit these data from the
external controller. If a password error occurs due to incorrect password count storage address or password comparison
start address, TMP86FS49AUG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. Therefore, when a password
error occurs, initialize TMP86FS49AUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial ROM mode.
Note 6: If the read protection is enabled or a password error occurs, TMP86FS49AUG stops UART communication and enters the
halt confition. In this case, initialize TMP86FS49AUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial ROM mode.
Note 7: If an error occurs during the reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FS49AUG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. In this case, initialize TMP86FS49AUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the
serial PROM mode.
Page 243
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.6 Operation Mode
TMP86FS49AUG
Description of the flash memory writing mode
1. The 1st byte of the received data contains the matching data. When the serial PROM mode is activated, TMP86FS49AUG (hereafter called device), waits to receive the matching data (5AH). Upon
reception of the matching data, the device automatically adjusts the UART’s initial baud rate to 9600
bps.
2. When receiving the matching data (5AH), the device transmits an echo back data (5AH) as the second
byte data to the external controller. If the device can not recognize the matching data, it does not
transmit the echo back data and waits for the matching data again with automatic baud rate adjustment. Therefore, the external controller should transmit the matching data repeatedly till the device
transmits an echo back data. The transmission repetition count varies depending on the frequency of
device. For details, refer to Table 20-5.
3. The 3rd byte of the received data contains the baud rate modification data. The five types of baud rate
modification data shown in Table 20-4 are available. Even if baud rate is not modified, the external
controller should transmit the initial baud rate data (28H: 9600 bps).
4. Only when the 3rd byte of the received data contains the baud rate modification data corresponding to
the device's operating frequency, the device echoes back data the value which is the same data in the
4th byte position of the received data. After the echo back data is transmitted, baud rate modification
becomes effective. If the 3rd byte of the received data does not contain the baud rate modification
data, the device enters the halts condition after sending 3 bytes of baud rate modification error code
(62H).
5. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data (30H) to write the flash memory.
6. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the
device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in
this case, 30H). If the 5th byte of the received data does not contain the operation command data, the
device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of the operation command error code (63H).
7. The 7th byte contains the data for 15 to 8 bits of the password count storage address. When the data
received with the 7th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving
error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition.
8. The 9th byte contains the data for 7 to 0 bits of the password count storage address. When the data
received with the 9th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving
error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition.
9. The 11th byte contains the data for 15 to 8 bits of the password comparison start address. When the
data received with the 11th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition.
10. The 13th byte contains the data for 7 to 0 bits of the password comparison start address. When the
data received with the 13th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition.
11. The 15th through m’th bytes contain the password data. The number of passwords becomes the data
(N) stored in the password count storage address. The external password data is compared with Nbyte data from the address specified by the password comparison start address. The external controller should send N-byte password data to the device. If the passwords do not match, the device enters
the halt condition without returning an error code to the external controller. If the addresses from
FFE0H to FFFFH are filled with “FFH”, the passwords are not conpared because the device is considered as a blank product.
12. The m’th + 1 through n’th - 2 bytes of the received data contain the binary data in the Intel Hex format. No received data is echoed back to the external controller. After receiving the start mark (3AH
for “:”) in the Intel Hex format, the device starts data record reception. Therefore, the received data
except 3AH is ignored until the start mark is received. After receiving the start mark, the device
receives the data record, that consists of data length, address, record type, write data and checksum.
Since the device starts checksum calculation after receiving an end record, the external controller
should wait for the checksum after sending the end record. If a receiving error or Intel Hex format
error occurs, the device enters the halts condition without returning an error code to the external controller.
13. The n’th - 1 and n’th bytes contain the checksum upper and lower bytes. For details on how to calculate the SUM, refer to " 20.8 Checksum (SUM) ". The checksum is calculated only when the end
record is detected and no receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs. After sending the end
Page 244
TMP86FS49AUG
record, the external controller judges whether the transmission is completed correctly by receiving the
checksum sent by the device.
14. After transmitting the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Note 1: Do not write only the address from FFE0H to FFFFH when all flash memory data is the same. If only these
area are written, the subsequent operation can not be executed due to password error.
Note 2: To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to
erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
Page 245
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.6 Operation Mode
TMP86FS49AUG
20.6.3 RAM Loader Mode (Operation Command: 60H)
Table 20-9 shows RAM loader mode process.
Table 20-9 RAM Loader Mode Process
Transfer Bytes
BOOT
ROM
RAM
Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FS49AUG
Transfer Data from TMP86FS49AUG to
External Controller
Baud Rate
1st byte
2nd byte
Matching data (5AH)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
- (Automatic baud rate adjustment)
OK: Echo back data (5AH)
Error: Nothing transmitted
3rd byte
9600 bps
-
4th byte
Baud rate modification data
(See Table 20-4)
-
9600 bps
OK: Echo back data
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 62H × 3 (Note 1)
5th byte
6th byte
Operation command data (60H)
-
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Echo back data (60H)
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 63H × 3 (Note 1)
7th byte
8th byte
Password count storage address bit
15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
9th byte
10th byte
Password count storage address bit
07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
11th byte
12th byte
Password comparison start address
bit 15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
13th byte
14th byte
Password comparison start address
bit 07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
15th byte
:
m’th byte
Password string (Note 5)
Modified baud rate
-
m’th + 1 byte
:
n’th - 2 byte
Intel Hex format (Binary)
(Note 2)
n’th - 1 byte
-
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
Modified baud rate
-
Modified baud rate
-
-
Modified baud rate
OK: SUM (Upper byte) (Note 3)
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’th byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: SUM (Lower byte) (Note 3)
Error: Nothing transmitted
-
The program jumps to the start address of RAM in which the first transferred data is written.
Note 1: “xxH × 3” indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 20.7 Error
Code ".
Note 2: Refer to " 20.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary) ".
Note 3: Refer to " 20.8 Checksum (SUM) ".
Note 4: Refer to " 20.10 Passwords ".
Note 5: If addresses from FFE0H to FFFFH are filled with “FFH”, the passwords are not compared because the device is considered as a blank product. Transmitting a password string is not required. Even in the case of a blank product , it is required
to specify the password count storage address and the password comparison start address. Transmit these data from the
external controller. If a password error occurs due to incorrect password count storage address or password comparison
start address, TMP86FS49AUG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. Therefore, when a password
error occurs, initialize TMP86FS49AUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial ROM mode.
Note 6: After transmitting a password string, the external controller must not transmit only an end record. If receiving an end
record after a password string, the device may not operate correctly.
Note 7: If the read protection is enabled or a password error occurs, TMP86FS49AUG stops UART communication and enters the
halt condition. In this case, initialize TMP86FS49AUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Page 246
TMP86FS49AUG
Note 8: If an error occurs during the reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FS49AUG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. In this case, initialize TMP86FS49AUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the
serial PROM mode.
Description of RAM loader mode
1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contains the same data as in the flash
memory writing mode.
2. In the 5th byte of the received data contains the RAM loader command data (60H).
3. When th 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the
device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position (in this case, 60H). If the
5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H).
4. The 7th through m’th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash
memory writing mode.
5. The m’th + 1 through n’th - 2 bytes of the received data contain the binary data in the Intel Hex format. No received data is echoed back to the external controller. After receiving the start mark (3AH
for “:”) in the Intel Hex format, the device starts data record reception. Therefore, the received data
except 3AH is ignored until the start mark is received. After receiving the start mark, the device
receives the data record, that consists of data length, address, record type, write data and checksum.
The writing data of the data record is written into RAM specified by address. Since the device starts
checksum calculation after receiving an end record, the external controller should wait for the checksum after sending the end record. If a receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs, the device
enters the halts condition without returning an error code to the external controller.
6. The n’th - 1 and n’th bytes contain the checksum upper and lower bytes. For details on how to calculate the SUM, refer to " 20.8 Checksum (SUM) ". The checksum is calculated only when the end
record is detected and no receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs. After sending the end
record, the external controller judges whether the transmission is completed correctly by receiving the
checksum sent by the device.
7. After transmitting the checksum to the external controller, the boot program jumps to the RAM
address that is specified by the first received data record.
Note 1: To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to
erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
Page 247
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.6 Operation Mode
TMP86FS49AUG
20.6.4 Flash Memory SUM Output Mode (Operation Command: 90H)
Table 20-10 shows flash memory SUM output mode process.
Table 20-10 Flash Memory SUM Output Process
Transfer Bytes
BOOT
ROM
Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FS49AUG
Transfer Data from TMP86FS49AUG to
External Controller
Baud Rate
1st byte
2nd byte
Matching data (5AH)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
- (Automatic baud rate adjustment)
OK: Echo back data (5AH)
Error: Nothing transmitted
3rd byte
9600 bps
-
4th byte
Baud rate modification data
(See Table 20-4)
-
9600 bps
OK: Echo back data
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 62H × 3 (Note 1)
5th byte
6th byte
Operation command data (90H)
-
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Echo back data (90H)
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 63H × 3 (Note 1)
7th byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: SUM (Upper byte) (Note 2)
Error: Nothing transmitted
8th byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: SUM (Lower byte) (Note 2)
Error: Nothing transmitted
9th byte
(Wait for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
-
Note 1: “xxH × 3” indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 20.7 Error
Code ".
Note 2: Refer to " 20.8 Checksum (SUM) ".
Description of the flash memory SUM output mode
1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contains the same data as in the flash
memory writing mode.
2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in the flash memory SUM output mode
(90H).
3. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the
device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in
this case, 90H). If the 5th byte of the received data does not contain the operation command data, the
device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H).
4. The 7th and the 8th bytes contain the upper and lower bits of the checksum, respectively. For how to
calculate the checksum, refer to " 20.8 Checksum (SUM) ".
5. After sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 248
TMP86FS49AUG
20.6.5 Product ID Code Output Mode (Operation Command: C0H)
Table 20-11 shows product ID code output mode process.
Table 20-11 Product ID Code Output Process
Transfer Bytes
BOOT
ROM
Transfer Data from External Controller
to TMP86FS49AUG
Transfer Data from TMP86FS49AUG to
External Controller
Baud Rate
1st byte
2nd byte
Matching data (5AH)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
- (Automatic baud rate adjustment)
OK: Echo back data (5AH)
Error: Nothing transmitted
3rd byte
9600 bps
-
4th byte
Baud rate modification data
(See Table 20-4)
-
9600 bps
OK: Echo back data
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 62H × 3 (Note 1)
5th byte
6th byte
Operation command data (C0H)
-
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Echo back data (C0H)
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 63H × 3 (Note 1)
7th byte
Modified baud rate
3AH
Start mark
8th byte
Modified baud rate
0AH
The number of transfer data
(from 9th to 18th bytes)
9th byte
Modified baud rate
02H
Length of address (2 bytes)
10th byte
Modified baud rate
1DH
Reserved data
11th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
Reserved data
12th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
Reserved data
13th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
Reserved data
14th byte
Modified baud rate
01H
ROM block count (1 block)
15th byte
Modified baud rate
10H
First address of ROM
(Upper byte)
16th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
First address of ROM
(Lower byte)
17th byte
Modified baud rate
FFH
End address of ROM
(Upper byte)
18th byte
Modified baud rate
FFH
End address of ROM
(Lower byte)
19th byte
Modified baud rate
D2H
Checksum of transferred data
(9th through 18th byte)
Modified baud rate
-
20th byte
(Wait for the next operation command
data)
Note: “xxH × 3” indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 20.7 Error
Code ".
Description of Product ID code output mode
1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash
memory writing mode.
2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the product ID code output mode command data (C0H).
3. When the 5th byte contains the operation command data shown in Table 20-6, the device echoes back
the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, C0H). If the
5th byte data does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after
sending 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H).
4. The 9th through 19th bytes contain the product ID code. For details, refer to " 20.11 Product ID Code
".
Page 249
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.6 Operation Mode
TMP86FS49AUG
5. After sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 250
TMP86FS49AUG
20.6.6 Flash Memory Status Output Mode (Operation Command: C3H)
Table 20-12 shows Flash memory status output mode process.
Table 20-12 Flash Memory Status Output Mode Process
Transfer Bytes
BOOT
ROM
Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FS49AUG
Transfer Data from TMP86FS49AUG to
External Controller
Baud Rate
1st byte
2nd byte
Matching data (5AH)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
- (Automatic baud rate adjustment)
OK: Echo back data (5AH)
Error: Nothing transmitted
3rd byte
9600 bps
-
4th byte
Baud rate modification data
(See Table 20-4)
-
9600 bps
OK: Echo back data
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 62H × 3 (Note 1)
5th byte
6th byte
Operation command data (C3H)
-
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Echo back data (C3H)
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 63H × 3 (Note 1)
7th byte
Modified baud rate
3AH
Start mark
8th byte
Modified baud rate
04H
Byte count
(from 9th to 12th byte)
9th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
to
03H
Status code 1
10th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
Reserved data
11th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
Reserved data
12th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
Reserved data
13th byte
Modified baud rate
Checksum 2’s complement for the sum of 9th
through 12th bytes
9th byte Checksum
00H:
00H
01H:
FFH
02H:
FEH
03H:
FDH
Modified baud rate
-
14th byte
(Wait for the next operation command data)
Note 1: “xxH × 3” indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 20.7 Error
Code ".
Note 2: For the details on status code 1, refer to " 20.12 Flash Memory Status Code ".
Description of Flash memory status output mode
1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the Flash
memory writing mode.
2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the flash memory status output mode command data
(C3H).
3. When the 5th byte contains the operation command data shown in Table 20-6, the device echoes back
the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, C3H). If the
5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H).
4. The 9th through 13th bytes contain the status code. For details on the status code, refer to " 20.12
Flash Memory Status Code ".
5. After sending the status code, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 251
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.6 Operation Mode
TMP86FS49AUG
20.6.7 Flash Memory Read Protection Setting Mode (Operation Command: FAH)
Table 20-13 shows Flash memory read protection setting mode process.
Table 20-13 Flash Memory Read Protection Setting Mode Process
Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FS49AUG
Transfer Bytes
BOOT
ROM
Transfer Data from TMP86FS49AUG to
External Controller
Baud Rate
1st byte
2nd byte
Matching data (5AH)
-
9600 bps
9600 bps
- (Automatic baud rate adjustment)
OK: Echo back data (5AH)
Error: Nothing transmitted
3rd byte
9600 bps
-
4th byte
Baud rate modification data
(See Table 20-4)
-
9600 bps
OK: Echo back data
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 62H × 3 (Note 1)
5th byte
6th byte
Operation command data (FAH)
-
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Echo back data (FAH)
Error: A1H × 3, A3H × 3, 63H × 3 (Note 1)
7th byte
8th byte
Password count storage address
15 to 08 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
9th byte
10th byte
Password count storage address
07 to 00 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
11th byte
12th byte
Password comparison start
address 15 to 08 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
13th byte
14th byte
Password comparison start
address 07 to 00 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
15th byte
:
m’th byte
Password string (Note 2)
Modified baud rate
-
-
Modified baud rate
OK: Nothing transmitted
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’th byte
-
Modified baud rate
OK: FBH (Note 3)
Error: Nothing transmitted
n’+1th byte
(Wait for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
-
Note 1: “xxH × 3” indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 20.7 Error
Code ".
Note 2: Refer to " 20.10 Passwords ".
Note 3: If the read protection is enabled for a blank product or a password error occurs for a non-blank product, TMP86FS49AUG
stops UART communication and enters the halt mode. In this case, initialize TMP86FS49AUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Note 4: If an error occurs during reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FS49AUG stops UART communication and enters the halt mode. In this case, initialize TMP86FS49AUG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM
mode.
Description of the Flash memory read protection setting mode
1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the Flash
memory writing mode.
2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in the flash memory status output mode
(FAH).
3. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the
device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in
Page 252
TMP86FS49AUG
this case, FAH). If the 5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the
halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H).
4. The 7th through m’th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash
memory writing mode.
5. The n'th byte contains the status to be transmitted to the external controller in the case of the successful read protection.
Page 253
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.7 Error Code
TMP86FS49AUG
20.7 Error Code
When detecting an error, the device transmits the error code to the external controller, as shown in Table 20-14.
Table 20-14 Error Code
Transmit Data
Meaning of Error Data
62H, 62H, 62H
Baud rate modification error.
63H, 63H, 63H
Operation command error.
A1H, A1H, A1H
Framing error in the received data.
A3H, A3H, A3H
Overrun error in the received data.
Note: If a password error occurs, TMP86FS49AUG does not transmit an error code.
20.8 Checksum (SUM)
20.8.1 Calculation Method
The checksum (SUM) is calculated with the sum of all bytes, and the obtained result is returned as a word.
The data is read for each byte unit and the calculated result is returned as a word.
Example:
A1H
B2H
C3H
D4H
If the data to be calculated consists of the four bytes,
the checksum of the data is as shown below.
A1H + B2H + C3H + D4H = 02EAH
SUM (HIGH)= 02H
SUM (LOW)= EAH
The checksum which is transmitted by executing the flash memory write command, RAM loader command,
or flash memory SUM output command is calculated in the manner, as shown above.
Page 254
TMP86FS49AUG
20.8.2 Calculation data
The data used to calculate the checksum is listed in Table 20-15.
Table 20-15 Checksum Calculation Data
Operating Mode
Calculation Data
Description
Data in the entire area of the flash memory
Even when a part of the flash memory is written, the checksum
of the entire flash memory area (1000H to FFFH) is calculated.
The data length, address, record type and checksum in Intel
Hex format are not included in the checksum.
RAM loader mode
RAM data written in the first received RAM
address through the last received RAM address
The length of data, address, record type and checksum in Intel
Hex format are not included in the checksum.
Product ID Code
Output mode
9th through 18th bytes of the transferred data
For details, refer to " 20.11 Product ID Code ".
Flash Memory Status Output mode
9th through 12th bytes of the transferred data
For details, refer to " 20.12 Flash Memory Status Code "
Flash Memory Erasing mode
All data in the erased area of the flash memory
(the whole or part of the flash memory)
When the sector erase is executed, only the erased area is
used to calculate the checksum. In the case of the chip erase,
an entire area of the flash memory is used.
Flash memory writing mode
Flash memory SUM output
mode
Page 255
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary)
TMP86FS49AUG
20.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary)
1. After receiving the checksum of a data record, the device waits for the start mark (3AH “:”) of the next data
record. After receiving the checksum of a data record, the device ignores the data except 3AH transmitted
by the external controller.
2. After transmitting the checksum of end record, the external controller must transmit nothing, and wait for
the 2-byte receive data (upper and lower bytes of the checksum).
3. If a receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs, the device enters the halt condition without returning
an error code to the external controller. The Intel Hex format error occurs in the following case:
When the record type is not 00H, 01H, or 02H
When a checksum error occurs
When the data length of an extended record (record type = 02H) is not 02H
When the device receives the data record after receiving an extended record (record type = 02H) with
extended address of 1000H or larger.
When the data length of the end record (record type = 01H) is not 00H
20.10Passwords
The consecutive eight or more-byte data in the flash memory area can be specified to the password.
TMP86FS49AUG compares the data string specified to the password with the password string transmitted from the
external controller. The area in which passwords can be specified is located at addresses 1000H to FF9FH. The area
from FFA0H to FFFFH can not be specified as the passwords area.
If addresses from FFE0H through FFFFH are filled with “FFH”, the passwords are not compared because the
product is considered as a blank product. Even in this case, the password count storage addresses and password
comparison start address must be specified. Table 20-16 shows the password setting in the blank product and nonblank product.
Table 20-16 Password Setting in the Blank Product and Non-Blank Product
Password
Blank Product (Note 1)
Non-Blank Product
PNSA
(Password count storage address)
1000H ≤ PNSA ≤ FF9FH
1000H ≤ PNSA ≤ FF9FH
PCSA
(Password comparison start address)
1000H ≤ PCSA ≤ FF9FH
1000H ≤ PCSA ≤ FFA0 - N
N
(Password count)
*
8≤N
Password string setting
Not required (Note 5)
Required (Note 2)
Note 1: When addresses from FFE0H through FFFFH are filled with “FFH”, the product is recognized as a blank product.
Note 2: The data including the same consecutive data (three or more bytes) can not be used as a password. (This causes a password error data. TMP86FS49AUG transmits no data and enters the halt condition.)
Note 3: *: Don’t care.
Note 4: When the above condition is not met, a password error occurs. If a password error occurs, the device enters the halt condition without returning the error code.
Note 5: In the flash memory writing mode or RAM loader mode, the blank product receives the Intel Hex format data immediately
after receiving PCSA without receiving password strings. In this case, the subsequent processing is performed correctly
because the blank product ignores the data except the start mark (3AH “:”) as the Intel Hex format data, even if the external controller transmits the dummy password string. However, if the dummy password string contains “3AH”, it is detected
as the start mark erroneously. The microcontroller enters the halt mode. If this causes the problem, do not transmit the
dummy password strings.
Note 6: In the flash memory erasing mode, the external controller must not transmit the password string for the blank product.
Page 256
TMP86FS49AUG
UART
RXD pin
F0H 12H F1H 07H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H
PNSA
08H
Password string
PCSA
Flash memory
F012H
08H
F107H
01H
F108H
02H
F109H
03H
F10AH
04H
F10BH
05H
Example
F10CH
06H
PNSA = F012H
PCSA = F107H
Password string = 01H,02H,03H,04H,05H
06H,07H,08H
F10DH
07H
F10EH
"08H" becomes
the umber of
Compare
passwords
8 bytes
08H
Figure 20-5 Password Comparison
20.10.1Password String
The password string transmitted from the external controller is compared with the specified data in the flash
memory. When the password string is not matched to the data in the flash memory, the device enters the halt
condition due to the password error.
20.10.2Handling of Password Error
If a password error occurs, the device enters the halt condition. In this case, reset the device to reactivate the
serial PROM mode.
20.10.3Password Management during Program Development
If a program is modified many times in the development stage, confusion may arise as to the password.
Therefore, it is recommended to use a fixed password in the program development stage.
Example :Specify PNSA to F000H, and the password string to 8 bytes from address F001H
(PCSA becomes F001H.)
Password Section code abs = 0F000H
DB
08H
: PNSA definition
DB
“CODE1234”
: Password string definition
Page 257
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.11 Product ID Code
TMP86FS49AUG
20.11Product ID Code
The product ID code is the 13-byte data containing the start address and the end address of ROM. Table 20-17
shows the product ID code format.
Table 20-17 Product ID Code Format
Data
Description
In the Case of TMP86FS49AUG
1st
Start Mark (3AH)
3AH
2nd
The number of transfer data (10 bytes from 3rd to 12th byte)
0AH
3rd
Address length (2 bytes)
02H
4th
Reserved data
1DH
5th
Reserved data
00H
6th
Reserved data
00H
7th
Reserved data
00H
8th
ROM block count
01H
9th
The first address of ROM (Upper byte)
10H
10th
The first address of ROM (Lower byte)
00H
11th
The end address of ROM (Upper byte)
FFH
12th
The end address of ROM (Lower byte)
FFH
13th
Checksum of the transferred data (2’s compliment for the sum of
3rd through 12th bytes)
D2H
20.12Flash Memory Status Code
The flash memory status code is the 7-byte data including the read protection status and the status of the data from
FFE0H to FFFFH. Table 20-18 shows the flash memory status code.
Table 20-18 Flash Memory Status Code
Data
Description
In the Case of
TMP86FS49AUG
1st
Start mark
3AH
2nd
Transferred data count (3rd through 6th byte)
04H
3rd
Status code
00H to 03H
(See figure below)
4th
Reserved data
00H
5th
Reserved data
00H
6th
Reserved data
00H
3rd byte
00H
01H
02H
03H
Checksum of the transferred data (2’s compliment
for the sum of 3rd through 6th data)
7th
checksum
00H
FFH
FEH
FDH
Status Code 1
7
6
5
4
3
Page 258
2
1
0
RPENA
BLANK
(Initial Value: 0000 00**)
TMP86FS49AUG
RPENA
Flash memory read protection status
0:
1:
Read protection is disabled.
Read protection is enabled.
BLANK
The status from FFE0H
to FFFFH.
0:
1:
All data is FFH in the area from FFE0H to FFFFH.
The value except FFH is included in the area from FFE0H to FFFFH.
Some operation commands are limited by the flash memory status code 1. If the read protection is enabled, flash
memory writing mode command and RAM loader mode command can not be executed. Erase all flash memory
before executing these command.
Flash Memory
Erasing Mode
RPENA
BLANK
Flash Memory
Writing Mode
RAM Loader
Mode
Flash memory
SUM
Output Mode
0
0
m
m
m
0
1
Pass
Pass
m
m
m
1
0
×
×
m
m
m
m
×
×
1
1
×
×
m
m
m
Pass
×
Pass
Product
ID Code Output
Mode
Flash Memory
Status Output
Mode
m
m
Sector
Erase
Chip
Erase
Read Protection Setting
Mode
×
m
Pass
Pass
Note: m:
The command can be executed.
Pass: The command can be executed with a password.
×:
The command can not be executed.
(After echoing the command back to the external controller, TMP86FS49AUG stops UART communication and enters
the halt condition.)
Page 259
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.13 Specifying the Erasure Area
TMP86FS49AUG
20.13Specifying the Erasure Area
In the flash memory erasing mode, the erasure area of the flash memory is specified by n−2 byte data.
The start address of an erasure area is specified by ERASTA, and the end address is specified by ERAEND.
If ERASTA is equal to or smaller than ERAEND, the sector erase (erasure in 4 kbyte units) is executed. Executing
the sector erase while the read protection is enabled results in an infinite loop.
If ERASTA is larger than ERAEND, the chip erase (erasure of an entire flash memory area) is executed and the
read protection is disabled. Therefore, execute the chip erase (not sector erase) to disable the read protection.
Erasure Area Specification Data (n−2 byte data)
7
6
5
4
3
2
ERASTA
ERASTA
ERAEND
1
0
ERAEND
The start address of the
erasure area
0000:
0001:
0010:
0011:
0100:
0101:
0110:
0111:
1000:
1001:
1010:
1011:
1100:
1101:
1110:
1111:
from 0000H
from 1000H
from 2000H
from 3000H
from 4000H
from 5000H
from 6000H
from 7000H
from 8000H
from 9000H
from A000H
from B000H
from C000H
from D000H
from E000H
from F000H
The end address of the
erasure area
0000:
0001:
0010:
0011:
0100:
0101:
0110:
0111:
1000:
1001:
1010:
1011:
1100:
1101:
1110:
1111:
to 0FFFH
to 1FFFH
to 2FFFH
to 3FFFH
to 4FFFH
to 5FFFH
to 6FFFH
to 7FFFH
to 8FFFH
to 9FFFH
to AFFFH
to BFFFH
to CFFFH
to DFFFH
to EFFFH
to FFFFH
Note: When the sector erase is executed for the area containing no flash cell, TMP86FS49AUG stops the UART communication and enters the halt condition.
Page 260
Page 261
Transmit UART data
(Checksum of an entire area)
Transmit UART data
(Checksum of an entire area)
Jump to the start address
of RAM program
Transmit UART data
(Checksum)
RAM write process
Flash memory
write process
OK
Receive UART data
(Intel Hex format)
Infinite loop
Receive UART data
(Intel Hex format)
OK
Transmit UART data
(Product ID code)
Infinite loop
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = FBH)
Read protection setting
OK
Verify the password
(Compare the receive
data and flash
memory data)
Transmit UART data
(Echo back the baud rate
modification data)
NG
Verify the password
(Compare the receive
data and flash
memory data)
Verify the password
(Compare the receive
data and flash
memory data)
Receive UART data
NG
Non-blank product
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = FAH)
Receive data = FAH
(Read protection
setting mode)
Blank product check
Protection
Enable
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = C0H)
Receive data = C0H
(Product ID
code output mode)
Blank product check
Protection disabled
Read protection
check
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = 60H)
Receive data = 60H
(RAM loader
mode)
Blank Non-blank product
product
Protection
Enable
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = 90H)
Receive data = 90H
(Flash memory sum
output mode)
Blank product check
Protection disabled
Read protection
check
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = 30H)
Receive data = 30H
(Flash memory
writing mode)
Receive UART data
Modify the baud rate
based on the receive data
Blank Non-blank product
product
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = 5AH)
Yes
No
Adjust the baud rate
(Adjust the source
clock to 9600 bps)
Receive data =
5AH
Receive UART data
Setup
START
Transmit UART data
(Status of the read protection
and blank product)
Infinite loop
NG
Blank
product
Blank product check
Read protection check
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = C3H)
Receive data = C3H
(Flash memory status
output mode)
Non-blank product
Transmit UART data
(Checksum of an entire area)
Disable read protection
Chip erase
(Erase on entire area)
Transmit UART data
(Checksum of
the erased area)
Sector erase (Block erase)
Upper 4 bits x 1000H
to
Lower 4 bits x 1000H
Protection disabled
Read protection
check
Upper 4 bits < Lower 4 bits
Infinite loop
NG
Upper 4 bits > Lower 4 bits
Receive data
Receive UART data
OK
Verify the password
(Compare the receive
data and flash
memory data)
Blank
product
Blank product check
Transmit UART data
(Transmit data = F0H)
Receive data = F0H
(Flash memory
erasing mode)
Infinite loop
Protection
enabled
TMP86FS49AUG
20.14Flowchart
20. Serial PROM Mode
20.15 UART Timing
TMP86FS49AUG
20.15UART Timing
Table 20-19 UART Timing-1 (VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, fc = 2 to 16 MHz, Topr = -10 to 40°C)
Minimum Required Time
Parameter
Symbol
Clock Frequency (fc)
At fc = 2 MHz
At fc = 16 MHz
Time from matching data reception to the echo back
CMeb1
Approx. 930
465 µs
58.1 µs
Time from baud rate modification data reception to the echo back
CMeb2
Approx. 980
490 µs
61.3 µs
Time from operation command reception to the echo back
CMeb3
Approx. 800
400 µs
50 µs
Checksum calculation time
CKsm
Approx. 7864500
3.93 s
491.5 µs
Erasure time of an entire flash memory
CEall
-
30 ms
30 ms
Erasure time for a sector of a flash memory (in 4-kbyte units)
CEsec
-
15 ms
15 ms
Table 20-20 UART Timing-2 (VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, fc = 2 to 16 MHz, Topr = -10 to 40°C)
Minimum Required Time
Parameter
Symbol
Clock Frequency (fc)
At fc = 2 MHz
At fc = 16 MHz
Time from the reset release to the acceptance of start bit of RXD pin
RXsup
2100
1.05 ms
131.3 ms
Matching data transmission interval
CMtr1
28500
14.2 ms
1.78 ms
Time from the echo back of matching data to the acceptance of baud rate
modification data
CMtr2
380
190 µs
23.8 µs
Time from the echo back of baud rate modification data to the acceptance
of an operation command
CMtr3
650
325 µs
40.6 µs
Time from the echo back of operation command to the acceptance of
password count storage addresses (Upper byte)
CMtr4
800
400 µs
50 µs
CMtr2
RXsup
CMtr3
CMtr4
RESET pin
(5AH)
(28H)
(30H)
RXD pin
(5AH)
(28H)
(30H)
TXD pin
CMeb1
(5AH)
CMeb2
(5AH)
RXD pin
TXD pin
CMtr1
Page 262
CMeb3
(5AH)
TMP86FS49AUG
21. Input/Output Circuit
21.1 Control pins
The input/output circuitries of the TMP86FS49AUG control pins are shown below.
Control Pin
I/O
Input/Output Circuitry
Remarks
Osc.enable
fc
VDD
XIN
XOUT
Input
Output
Resonator connecting pins
(high frequency)
VDD
Rf
RO
Rf = 1.2 MΩ (typ.)
RO =0.5 kΩ (typ.)
XIN
XOUT
XTEN
Osc.enable
XTIN
XTOUT
Input
Output
fs
VDD
VDD
Rf
Resonator connecting pins
(Low frequency)
Rf = 6 MΩ (typ.)
RO
RO = 220 kΩ (typ.)
XTIN
XTOUT
VDD
R RIN
RESET
Input
Hysteresis input
Pull-up resistor
RIN = 220 kΩ (typ.)
R = 100 Ω (typ.)
Address-trap-reset
Watchdog-timer-reset
System-clock-reset
VDD
TEST
Input
R = 100 Ω (typ.)
R
Note: The TEST pin of the TMP86FS49AUG does not have a pull-down resistor. Therefore, fix the TEST pin at Low-level.
Page 263
21. Input/Output Circuit
21.2 Input/Output Ports
TMP86FS49AUG
21.2 Input/Output Ports
Port
I/O
Input/Output Circuitry
Remarks
Initial "High-Z"
VDD
Data output
P1
Tri-state I/O
Hysteresis input
I/O
Disable
R = 100 Ω (typ.)
R
Pin input
Initial "High-Z"
P3
I/O
Sink open drain output
High current output
Data output
R
Output latch input
R = 100 Ω (typ.)
Pin input
Initial "High-Z"
P2
I/O
VDD
Sink open drain output
Hysteresis input
Data output
R
Output latch input
R = 100 Ω (typ.)
Pin input
Initial "High-Z"
P5
I/O
Sink open drain output
High current output
Hysteresis input
Data output
R
Output latch input
R = 100 Ω (typ.)
Pin input
Initial "High-Z"
VDD
P-ch control
Data output
P0
P4
I/O
Sink open drain output or
C-MOS output
Hysteresis input
Output latch input
R
Disable
Pin input (Control input)
Page 264
R = 100 Ω (typ.)
TMP86FS49AUG
Port
I/O
Input/Output Circuitry
Initial "High-Z"
Analog input
Remarks
VDD
Data output
P67
P66
P65
P64
I/O
Tri-state I/O
Output latch input
R = 100 Ω (typ.)
R
Disable
Pin input
Key-on Wakeup
Initial "High-Z"
Analog input
P63
P62
P61
P60
P7
VDD
Data output
I/O
Tri-state I/O
R = 100 Ω (typ.)
Output latch input
R
Disable
Pin input
Page 265
21. Input/Output Circuit
21.2 Input/Output Ports
TMP86FS49AUG
Page 266
TMP86FS49AUG
22. Electrical Characteristics
22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
The absolute maximum ratings are rated values which must not be exceeded during operation, even for an instant.
Any one of the ratings must not be exceeded. If any absolute maximum rating is exceeded, a device may break down
or its performance may be degraded, causing it to catch fire or explode resulting in injury to the user. Thus, when
designing products which include this device, ensure that no absolute maximum rating value will ever be exceeded.
(VSS = 0 V)
Parameter
Symbol
Pins
Ratings
Unit
Supply voltage
VDD
-0.3 to 6.5
V
Input voltage
VIN
-0.3 to VDD + 0.3
V
VOUT1
-0.3 to VDD + 0.3
V
Output voltage
Output current (Per 1 pin)
Output current (Total)
IOUT1
P0, P1, P4, P6, P7 ports
-1.8
IOUT2
P0, P1, P2, P4, P6, P7 ports
3.2
IOUT3
P3, P5 ports
30
Σ IOUT1
P0, P1, P2, P4, P6, P7 ports
60
Σ IOUT2
P3, P5 ports
80
Power dissipation [Topr = 85 °C]
PD
250
Soldering temperature (time)
Tsld
260 (10 s)
Storage temperature
Tstg
-55 to 125
Operating temperature
Topr
-40 to 85
Page 267
mA
mW
°C
22. Electrical Characteristics
22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
TMP86FS49AUG
22.2 Recommended Operating Conditions
The recommended operating conditions for a device are operating conditions under which it can be guaranteed that
the device will operate as specified. If the device is used under operating conditions other than the recommended
operating conditions (supply voltage, operating temperature range, specified AC/DC values etc.), malfunction may
occur. Thus, when designing products which include this device, ensure that the recommended operating conditions
for the device are always adhered to.
22.2.1 MCU mode (Flash Programming or erasing)
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -10 to 40°C)
Parameter
Symbol
Pins
Ratings
VDD
Supply voltage
Input high level
Input low level
Clock frequency
NORMAL1, 2 modes
VIH1
Except hysteresis input
VIH2
Hysteresis input
VIL1
Except hysteresis input
VIL2
Hysteresis input
fc
VDD ≥ 4.5 V
VDD ≥ 4.5 V
XIN, XOUT
Min
Max
4.5
5.5
VDD × 0.70
Unit
VDD
VDD × 0.75
V
VDD × 0.30
0
VDD × 0.25
1.0
16.0
MHz
22.2.2 MCU mode (Except Flash Programming or erasing)
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85°C)
Parameter
Symbol
Pins
Supply voltage
(Condition 1)
VDD
Ratings
fc = 16 MHz
NORMAL1, 2 modes
IDLE0, 1, 2 modes
fc = 8 MHz
NORMAL1, 2 modes
IDLE0, 1, 2 modes
fs = 32.768 KHz
SLOW1, 2 modes
SLEEP0, 1, 2 modes
Min
Max
4.5
5.5
3.0
V
STOP mode
Supply voltage
(Condition 2)
(Note1)
Unit
fc = 8 MHz
NORMAL1, 2 modes
IDLE0, 1, 2 modes
fs = 32.768 KHz
SLOW1, 2 modes
SLEEP0, 1, 2 modes
2.7
3.0
STOP mode
Input high level
VIH1
Except hysteresis input
VIH2
Hysteresis input
VDD < 4.5 V
VIH3
Input low level
VDD ≥ 4.5 V
VIL1
Except hysteresis input
VIL2
Hysteresis input
VDD ≥ 4.5 V
VDD × 0.70
VDD × 0.75
VDD × 0.30
0
VDD = 2.7 to 3.0V (Note1)
fc
XIN, XOUT
1.0
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5V
Clock frequency
fs
Note 1:
VDD = 3.0 to 5.5V
XTIN, XTOUT
VDD = 2.7 to 3.0V (Note1)
VDD = 3.0 to 5.5V
VDD × 0.25
8.0
MHz
16.0
30.0
34.0
When the supply voltage VDD is less than 3.0 V, the operating temperature Topr must be in a range of -20°C to 85°C.
Page 268
V
VDD × 0.10
VDD < 4.5 V
VIL3
VDD
VDD × 0.90
kHz
TMP86FS49AUG
22.2.3 Serial PROM mode
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -10 to 40 °C)
Parameter
Supply voltage
Input high voltage
Input low voltage
Clock frequency
Symbol
Pins
VDD
VIH1
NORMAL1, 2 modes
Except hysteresis input
VIH2
Hysteresis input
VIL1
Except hysteresis input
VIL2
Hysteresis input
fc
Condition
VDD ≥ 4.5 V
VDD ≥ 4.5 V
XIN, XOUT
Min
Max
4.5
5.5
VDD × 0.70
VDD × 0.75
0
2.0
Page 269
VDD
Unit
V
VDD × 0.30
VDD × 0.25
16.0
MHz
22. Electrical Characteristics
22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
TMP86FS49AUG
22.3 DC Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85 °C)
Parameter
Symbol
Pins
Condition
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
–
0.9
–
V
–
–
±2
µA
100
220
450
kΩ
VHS
Hysteresis input
IIN1
TEST
IIN2
Sink open drain, tri–state port
IIN3
RESET, STOP
RIN2
RESET pull–up
VDD = 5.5 V, VIN = 0 V
ILO1
Sink open drain port
VDD = 5.5 V, VOUT = 5.5 V
–
–
2
ILO2
Tri–state port
VDD = 5.5 V, VOUT = 5.5 V/0 V
–
–
±2
Output high voltage
VOH
Tri–state port
VDD = 4.5 V, IOH = -0.7 mA
4.1
–
–
Output low voltage
VOL
Except XOUT, P3, P5
VDD = 4.5 V, IOL = 1.6 mA
–
–
0.4
Output low curren
IOL
High current port
(P3, P5 Port)
VDD = 4.5 V, VOL = 1.0 V
–
20
–
–
12.6
20
Hysteresis voltage
Input current
Input resistance
Output leakage current
VDD = 5.5 V, VIN = 5.5 V/0 V
Supply current in
NORMAL1, 2 modes
VDD = 5.5 V
VIN = 5.3 V/0.2 V
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
Supply current in IDLE
0, 1, 2 modes
Supply current in
SLOW1 mode
When a program
operates on flash
memory (Note5,6)
IDD
7.6
10
When a program
operates on flash
memory (Note5,6)
–
40
260
When a program
operates on RAM
–
14
21
–
12
19
–
11
18
–
0.5
10
VDD = 5.5 V
–
10
–
VDD = 3.0 V
–
2
–
VIN = 2.8 V/0.2 V
fs = 32.768 kHz
Supply current in
SLEEP1 mode
Supply current in
SLEEP0 mode
VDD = 5.5 V
Supply current in
STOP mode
Peak current for
SLOW1 mode
(Note5,6)
VIN = 5.3 V/0.2 V
IDDP-P
V
mA
mA
–
VDD = 3.0 V
µA
µA
mA
Note 1: Typical values show those at Topr = 25°C and VDD = 5 V.
Note 2: Input current (IIN3): The current through pull-up resistor is not included.
Note 3: IDD does not include IREF.
Note 4: The supply currents of SLOW2 and SLEEP2 modes are equivalent to those of IDLE0, IDLE1 and IDLE2 modes.
Note 5: When a program is executing in the flash memory or when data is being read from the flash memory, the flash memory
operates in an intermittent manner, causing peak currents in the operation current, as shown in Figure 22-1.
In this case, the supply current IDD (in NORMAL1, NORMAL2 and SLOW1 modes) is defined as the sum of the average
peak current and MCU current.
Note 6: When designing the power supply, make sure that peak currents can be supplied. In SLOW1 mode, the difference
between the peak current and the average current becomes large.
1 machine cycle (4/fc or 4/fs)
n
Program coutner (PC)
n+1
n+2
n+3
Momentary flash current
I DDP-P
[mA]
Max. current
Typ. current
Sum of average
momentary flash current
and MCU current
MCU current
Figure 22-1 Intermittent Operation of Flash Memory
Page 270
TMP86FS49AUG
22.4 AD Characteristics
(VSS = 0.0 V, 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85 °C)
Paramete
Symbol
Analog reference voltage
VAREF
Power supply voltage of analog control
circuit
AVDD
Condition
Min
Typ.
Max
AVDD - 1.0
–
AVDD
VDD
V
∆ VAREF
3.5
–
–
Analog input voltage
VAIN
VSS
–
VAREF
Power supply current of analog reference voltage
IREF
–
0.6
1.0
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
Analog reference voltage range (Note 4)
VDD = AVDD = VAREF = 5.5 V
VSS = 0.0 V
Non linearity error
VDD = AVDD = 5.0 V,
Zero point error
VSS = 0.0 V
Full scale error
VAREF = 5.0 V
Total error
Unit
mA
LSB
(VSS = 0 V, 3.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85°C)
Parameter
Symbol
Analog reference voltage
VAREF
Power supply voltage of analog control
circuit
AVDD
Condition
Min
Typ.
Max
AVDD - 1.0
–
AVDD
VDD
V
∆ VAREF
2.5
–
–
Analog input voltage
VAIN
VSS
–
VAREF
Power supply current of analog reference voltage
IREF
–
0.5
0.8
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
Analog reference voltage range (Note 4)
VDD = AVDD = VAREF = 4.5 V
VSS = 0.0 V
Non linearity error
VDD = AVDD = 3.0 V
Zero point error
VSS = 0.0 V
Full scale error
VAREF = 3.0 V
Total error
Unit
mA
LSB
(VSS = 0 V, 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.0 V, Topr = -20 to 85°C) (Note6)
Parameter
Symbol
Analog reference voltage
VAREF
Power supply voltage of analog control
circuit
AVDD
Condition
Min
Typ.
Max
AVDD - 0.5
–
AVDD
VDD
V
∆ VAREF
2.5
–
–
Analog input voltage
VAIN
VSS
–
VAREF
Power supply current of analog reference voltage
IREF
–
0.3
0.5
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
–
–
±2
Analog reference voltage range (Note 4)
VDD = AVDD = VAREF =2.7 V
VSS = 0.0 V
Non linearity error
Zero point error
Full scale error
VDD = AVDD = 2.7 V
VSS = 0.0 V
VAREF = 2.7 V
Total error
Unit
mA
LSB
Note 1: The total error includes all errors except a quanitization error, and is defined as a maximum deviation from the ideal conversion line.
Note 2: Conversion time is defferent in recommended value by power supply voltage.
Note 3: The voltage to be input on the AIN input pin must not exceed the range between VAREF and VSS. If a voltage outside this
range is input, conversion values will become unstable and conversion values of other channels will also be affected.
Note 4: Analog reference voltage range: ∆VAREF = VAREF - VSS
Note 5: When AD converter is not used, fix the AVDD and VAREF pin on the VDD level.
Note 6: When the supply voltage VDD is less than 3.0 V, the operating temperature Topr must be in a range of -20°C to 85°C.
Page 271
22. Electrical Characteristics
22.6 Flash Characteristics
TMP86FS49AUG
22.5 AC Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85°C)
Parameter
Symbol
Condition
Min
Typ.
Max
0.25
–
4
117.6
–
133.3
For external clock operation (XIN input)
fc = 16 MHz
–
31.25
–
ns
For external clock operation (XTIN input)
fs = 32.768 kHz
–
15.26
–
µs
NORMAL1, 2 modes
Machine cycle time
tcy
IDLE0, 1, 2 modes
µs
SLOW1, 2 modes
SLEEP0, 1, 2 modes
High-level clock pulse width
tWCH
Low-level clock pulse width
tWCL
High-level clock pulse width
tWSH
Low-level clock pulse width
tWSL
Unit
(VSS = 0 V, 3.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85°C) (Note1)
(VSS = 0 V, 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.0 V, Topr = -20 to 85°C) (Note1)
Paramete
Symbol
Condition
NORMAL1, 2 modes
tcy
Machine cycle time
IDLE0, 1, 2 modes
SLOW1, 2 modes
tWCH
Low-level clock pulse width
tWCL
High-level clock pulse width
tWSH
Low-level clock pulse width
tWSL
Typ.
Max
0.5
–
4
Unit
µs
117.6
–
133.3
For external clock operation (XIN input)
fc = 8 MHz
–
62.5
–
ns
For external clock operation (XTIN input)
fs = 32.768 kHz
–
15.26
–
µs
SLEEP0, 1, 2 modes
High-level clock pulse width
Min
Note 1: When the supply voltage VDD is less than 3.0 V, the operating temperature Topr must be in a range of -20°C to 85°C.
22.6 Flash Characteristics
22.6.1 Write/Retention Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V)
Paramete
Number of guaranteed writes to flash memory
Condition
VSS = 0 V, Topr = -10 to 40°C
Page 272
Min
Typ.
Max.
Unit
–
–
100
Times
TMP86FS49AUG
22.7 Recommended Oscillating Conditions
XIN
C1
XOUT
XTIN
C2
(1) High-frequency Oscillation
C1
XTOUT
C2
(2) Low-frequency Oscillation
Note 1: To ensure stable oscillation, the resonator position, load capacitance, etc. must be appropriate. Because these factors are
greatly affected by board patterns, please be sure to evaluate operation on the board on which the device will actually be
mounted.
Note 2: When using the device (oscillator) in places exposed to high electric fields such as cathode-ray tubes, we recommend
electrically shielding the package in order to maintain normal operating condition.
Note 3: The product numbers and specifications of the resonators by Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd. are subject to change. For
up-to-date information, please refer to the following URL:
http://www.murata.co.jp/
Page 273
22. Electrical Characteristics
22.6 Flash Characteristics
TMP86FS49AUG
22.8 Handling Precaution
- The solderability test conditions for lead-free products (indicated by the suffix G in product name) are shown
below.
1. When using the Sn-37Pb solder bath
Solder bath temperature = 230 °C
Dipping time = 5 seconds
Number of times = once
R-type flux used
2. When using the Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu solder bath
Solder bath temperature = 245 °C
Dipping time = 5 seconds
Number of times = once
R-type flux used
Note: The pass criteron of the above test is as follows:
Solderability rate until forming ≥ 95 %
- When using the device (oscillator) in places exposed to high electric fields such as cathode-ray tubes, we recommend electrically shielding the package in order to maintain normal operating condition.
Page 274
TMP86FS49AUG
23. Package Dimensions
LQFP64-P-1010-0.50D Rev 01
Unit: mm
Page 275
23. Package Dimensions
TMP86FS49AUG
Page 276
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit
microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI).
Toshiba provides a variety of development tools and basic software to enable efficient software
development.
These development tools have specifications that support advances in microcomputer hardware (LSI) and
can be used extensively. Both the hardware and software are supported continuously with version updates.
The recent advances in CMOS LSI production technology have been phenomenal and microcomputer
systems for LSI design are constantly being improved. The products described in this document may also
be revised in the future. Be sure to check the latest specifications before using.
Toshiba is developing highly integrated, high-performance microcomputers using advanced MOS
production technology and especially well proven CMOS technology.
We are prepared to meet the requests for custom packaging for a variety of application areas.
We are confident that our products can satisfy your application needs now and in the future.